CN103608751A - Information input system and information input method using extension key - Google Patents

Information input system and information input method using extension key Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN103608751A
CN103608751A CN201280020778.8A CN201280020778A CN103608751A CN 103608751 A CN103608751 A CN 103608751A CN 201280020778 A CN201280020778 A CN 201280020778A CN 103608751 A CN103608751 A CN 103608751A
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
input
key
selected
assigned
information
Prior art date
Application number
CN201280020778.8A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
朴泰运
沈相桢
卢熙明
朴珢秀
沈敏燮
Original Assignee
朴泰运
沈相桢
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority to KR10-2011-0017492 priority Critical
Priority to KR1020110017492A priority patent/KR20120097921A/en
Priority to KR10-2011-0029974 priority
Priority to KR10-2011-0029726 priority
Priority to KR20110029974 priority
Priority to KR20110029726 priority
Priority to KR10-2012-0009596 priority
Priority to KR20120009596 priority
Priority to KR10-2012-0013034 priority
Priority to KR20120013034 priority
Priority to KR20120014237 priority
Priority to KR10-2012-0014237 priority
Priority to KR10-2012-0017159 priority
Priority to KR20120017159 priority
Application filed by 朴泰运, 沈相桢 filed Critical 朴泰运
Priority to PCT/KR2012/001470 priority patent/WO2012115492A2/en
Publication of CN103608751A publication Critical patent/CN103608751A/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/02Input arrangements using manually operated switches, e.g. using keyboards or dials
    • G06F3/023Arrangements for converting discrete items of information into a coded form, e.g. arrangements for interpreting keyboard generated codes as alphanumeric codes, operand codes or instruction codes
    • G06F3/0233Character input methods
    • G06F3/0236Character input methods using selection techniques to select from displayed items
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • G06F3/04886Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures by partitioning the screen or tablet into independently controllable areas, e.g. virtual keyboards, menus
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers; Analogous equipment at exchanges
    • H04M1/02Constructional features of telephone sets
    • H04M1/23Construction or mounting of dials or of equivalent devices; Means for facilitating the use thereof
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M2250/00Details of telephonic subscriber devices
    • H04M2250/22Details of telephonic subscriber devices including a touch pad, a touch sensor or a touch detector
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M2250/00Details of telephonic subscriber devices
    • H04M2250/70Details of telephonic subscriber devices methods for entering alphabetical characters, e.g. multi-tap or dictionary disambiguation

Abstract

The present invention relates to an information input system and method using an extension key. The present invention relates to an information input system using an extension key and to an information input method using the system. The information input system comprises: an input unit which has a plurality of divided regions, and which detects a divided region selected by a user from among the plurality of divided regions; and an input analysis unit which allocates relevant information to the plurality of divided regions, and which analyzes, if the input unit detects the selection of any one divided region from among the plurality of divided regions, the information allocated to the divided region as being inputted. The input analysis unit enables an extension key to be allocated to at least one divided region from among the plurality of divided regions.; When the extension key is selected, the input analysis unit enables new information to be allocated to an extended region, which is a divided region determined according to the extension key.

Description

使用扩展键输入信息的系统和输入信息的方法 Input system information and the input information using the extended key way

技术领域 FIELD

[0001] 本发明涉及一种通过使用扩展键来输入信息的系统以及使用扩展键来输入信息的方法。 [0001] The present invention relates to a method of inputting information by using the extended key input to the system and using the extended key information. 具体地,本发明具有如下特征:当在微型化数字装置的输入系统中包含扩展键时,新项被分配给扩展区,并且该扩展键被选定以使用户能够输入新分配的信息 When an extended key information input system comprising miniaturized digital devices, a new entry is allocated to the extended area, and the extended key is selected to enable a user to input a new assignment: In particular, the present invention has the following features

背景技术 Background technique

[0002] 近来,在市场上诸如移动电话和游戏系统等许多微型化数字装置可供使用。 [0002] Recently, many miniaturization of digital mobile phones and gaming systems and other devices are available, such as on the market.

[0003] 这种微型化数字装置由于其便携式以及在任意时间、任意地点使用的优点而赢得偏爱,并且由于这点,甚至在未来各种产品将微型化并被制造。 [0003] Such miniaturized portable digital device because of its advantages and at any time, anywhere and used to win preference, and because of this, even in the future miniaturization of the various products and manufacturing.

[0004] 这种微型化数字装置的问题在于,空间不足以输入各种信息,诸如字符。 [0004] such a problem that the miniaturization of digital devices, insufficient space to input various information, such as characters.

[0005] 例如,在移动电话中,所有的字符和数字被设计成仅利用总共12个键来输入,并且,与使用广泛地用作个人计算机(PC)的键盘布局的QWERTY键盘布局相比,仅使用该少量的键来输入信息不方便并且输入速度极慢。 [0005] For example, in a mobile phone, all of the characters and numbers are designed to use only a total of 12 input keys, and using QWERTY keyboard layout is widely used as a personal computer (PC) keyboard layout comparison, using only a small number of the key input information input inconvenient and very slow.

[0006] 对于韩文的拼音字母(韩语字母),与其它字母相比,因为将辅音和元音分离的方法的多样性以及表不各个辅音和兀音的方法的多样性,所以各种输入方法连同移动电话的普及性一起得到使用。 [0006] For Korean phonetic alphabet (the Korean alphabet), as compared with other letters, because the method of diversity diversity consonants and vowels and the method of separating the respective consonant and Wu table does not sound, so that various input methods together with the popularity of mobile phones to be used.

[0007] 也就是,使用这些多样的方法为用户提供了通过尽可能地减少键按压的次数以及减少用于按压键的手指移动距离来方便地输入字符的方法。 [0007] That is, using these various methods is provided a method for easily inputting characters by reducing the number of key presses as possible and to reduce the moving distance of the finger pressing the key for the user.

[0008] 然而,尽管如此,将信息输入到移动电话中仍不如QWERTY键盘布局那样方便,并且产品研发者已经进行了多方面研究来开发通过最小数量的键尽可能地减少键按压次数以及减少用于按压键的手指移动距离的方法。 [0008] However, despite this, the information input into the mobile phone is still not as easy as QWERTY keyboard layout, and product developers have made various studies to develop a minimum number of keys by reducing the number of key presses as much as possible and reduce the use of the method of moving distance of the finger on the push button.

[0009] 尽管已经不仅针对韩文拼音字母而且针对诸如英语、中文和印地文等其它语言积极地就类似于韩文拼音字母输入方面的高效输入方法进行了研究,但是尚未研发出划时代方法,并且因此,近来市场上可供使用的智能电话采用了完整的QWERTY键盘布局。 [0009] Although it has been not only for the Korean alphabet and for other languages ​​such as English, Chinese and Hindi and other active and efficient input method is similar to the input aspects of the Korean alphabet has been studied, but have not yet developed the epoch-making method, and therefore recently available on the market smart phones using the full QWERTY keyboard layout.

发明内容 SUMMARY

技术问题 technical problem

[0010] 本发明提供了在输入系统的尺寸受限制的微型化数字装置中使用的输入系统中能够减少键按压次数以及减少用于按压键的手指移动距离的高效信息输入系统以及使用该输入系统的信息输入方法。 [0010] The present invention provides an input system for use in a miniaturized digital device system is limited by the size of the input of the number of key presses can be reduced in efficiency and reduce the moving distance information input system for pressing a finger and using the key input system the information input method.

[0011] 本发明还提供了存储用于执行该方法的计算机可读程序的计算机可读记录介质。 [0011] The present invention also provides a computer-readable program stored in a computer for performing the method readable recording medium. 技术方案 Technical solutions

[0012] 根据本发明的方案,提供了一种使用扩展键来输入信息的系统,该系统包括:输入单元,其具有多个分区并且检测用户从多个分区中所选定的分区;以及输入分析单元,其用于将相应的信息分配给多个分区并且分析如果输入单元检测到已选定多个分区中的任一个,则分配给所选分区的信息被输入,其中输入分析单元将扩展键分配给多个分区中的至少一个,并且如果扩展键被选定,则输入分析单元将新信息分配给包括由扩展键限定的分区的扩展区。 [0012] The embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a system using an extended key to input information, the system comprising: an input unit having a plurality of partitions and selected by the user is detected from the plurality of partitions partitions; and an input an analysis unit corresponding information for a plurality of partitions assigned to the input unit and analyzing the detected if any one of the plurality of partitions has been chosen and assigned to the selected partition information is input, wherein the input analysis unit extended keys assigned to at least one of the plurality of partitions, and if an extended key is selected, the new input information analysis unit comprises an extended key assigned to the partition of the extension area is defined.

[0013] 系统还可以包括输出单元,所述输出单元用于将分配给所选定分区的信息输出到屏幕上。 [0013] The system may further include an output unit, the output unit for outputting information assigned to the selected partition on the screen.

[0014] 如果属于扩展区的分区被选定,则分配给分区的信息可被初始化。 [0014] If you belong to the partition extended area is selected is assigned to the partition information may be initialized.

[0015] 输入单元可以包括键盘或触摸传感器,并且在为触摸传感器的情况下,通过包括位于触摸传感器下方的压力传感器,当用户按压触摸传感器时,用户是否已按压可通过由于触摸传感器向下移动而通过压力传感器检测到压力的方法来检测。 [0015] The input unit may include a keyboard or a touch sensor, and in the case of the touch sensor, by including a pressure sensor is located below the touch sensor, when the user presses the touch sensor, whether the user has pressed the movable downwardly through the touch sensor due a method to detect the pressure detected by the pressure sensor.

[0016] 输入单元可以检测是否已根据触摸、按压或触摸和释放选定了分区。 [0016] The input unit may detect whether a partition has been selected according to a touch, touch and release, or pressing.

[0017] 系统可用于游戏系统,并且当用户选择被分配有扩展键的分区时,输入分析单元可以将用于游戏系统的菜单分配给包括由扩展键限定的分区的扩展区。 [0017] The system may be used for a game system, and when the user selects the keys assigned extended partition, the input unit may be used for analyzing the game menu system comprises an extended key assigned to partition defining extents.

[0018] 当用户通过手指按压被分配有扩展键的分区、将手指拖拉到被分配有菜单的分区并且从被分配有菜单的分区释放手指时,输入分析单元可以判定出分配给释放位置处的分区的菜单已经被选定。 [0018] When the user finger pressure is allocated extended key partition, the finger drag it to the assigned menu partition and releases the finger from the assigned menu partition, the input analysis unit may be determined is assigned to the release position of partition menu has been selected.

[0019] 该系统可应用于字符输入系统且应用于韩文、英文、印地文和中文。 [0019] The system can be applied to a character input system and applied Korean, English, Chinese and Hindi.

[0020] 该系统可应用于移动电话且可以将字符键分配给被分配有键的分区,从而将电话号码输入到移动电话中。 [0020] The system can be applied to a mobile phone and can be assigned to the character keys assigned with the key partition, so that the telephone number input into the mobile phone.

[0021] 该系统可以为韩文拼音字母输入系统,分配与多个分区一一对应的第一字符组,并且如果被分配有扩展键的分区被选定,则将多个字符新分配给包括由扩展键限定的分区的扩展区。 [0021] The system may be a Korean alphabet input system, a plurality of partitions assigned to the first one-character group, and if the partition is assigned an extended key is selected, the new character will be assigned to the plurality comprises extended key expansion region defined partition.

[0022] 多个字符可以分配给至少一个分区,并且每当被分配有多个字符的分区被选定时,可以改变待输入字符,或者用于选择多个字符的功能键可被分配给至少一个分区,并且如果在被分配有多个字符的分区被选定之后分配有功能键的分区被选定,则可以根据被分配有功能键的分区的选择计数的数目来改变多个字符中的待输入字符。 [0022] The plurality of characters may be assigned to at least one partition, and each time a character is assigned a plurality of partitions have been selected, the character to be inputted may be varied, for selecting a plurality of characters or function keys may be allocated to at least a partition, and the partition is assigned if the function key is allocated after a plurality of partitions are selected character is selected, the plurality of characters may be changed according to the selected counted number is allocated partition function key of characters to be input.

[0023] 第一字符组可以为不具有任何元音的字符,并且包括元音的字符组可新分配给形成在至少一个扩展键被选定时所限定的扩展区的分区。 [0023] The first burst may not have any character vowel and vowel character set may include the newly assigned to the partition is formed at least at a selected extended key is defined by the extension area.

[0024] 被新分配有包括元音的字符组的扩展区可以通过围绕被选为扩展键的分区形成规则四边形的邻近分区来形成。 [0024] The extended area is newly allocated vowel character set comprises may be formed by forming regular quadrilateral surrounding adjacent the partition partition is selected as an extended key.

[0025] 当用于新分配包括元音的字符组的扩展键被选定时所分配的字符组可通过简单元音来形成。 [0025] When a character group comprising a newly allocated vowel keys extended character set is selected assigned may be formed by a simple vowel.

[0026] 与包括元音的字符组中的'丄,和'丁'对应的字符可被分配给位于形成扩展区的规则四边形中的各角部处的分区。 [0026] may be assigned to the character corresponding to the character set comprises the vowel 'Shang, and' D 'to form a partition located at each corner of the regular quadrilateral in the extended area.

[0027] 当用于新分配包括元音的字符组的扩展键被选定时,通过简单元音形成的字符组可以分配给扩展区,并且用于新分配包括元音的字符组的扩展键被再次选定时,通过复合元音形成的字符组可分配给扩展区。 [0027] When allocating a new extended key set includes a vowel character is selected, the character is formed by a simple set of vowels may be allocated to the extended area, and a newly allocated key character group including extended vowel when selected again, the group formed by a composite character can be assigned to vowels extents.

[0028] 辅音也可以分配给被分配有用于新分配包括元音的字符组的扩展键的分区,并且当被分配有扩展键和辅音两者的分区被选定时,可以分析出已根据当前的输入序列是用于辅音还是用于元音而选定了扩展键和辅音中的一个。 [0028] The consonants may be allocated to the newly allocated for dispensing comprises a partition extended character set vowel keys, and when both the key and the assigned consonants partitions have been selected to be analyzed is based on the current the input sequence is a consonant or a vowel key and the selected one of the consonants.

[0029] 输入单元可以包括触摸传感器,并且当用户通过手指选择用于新分配包括元音的字符组的扩展键、拖拉该手指到被分配有简单元音的分区并且释放该手指时,可以分析出通过组合在拖拉的同时触摸的简单元音而形成的复合元音被输入。 [0029] The input unit may include a touch sensor, and when the user selects a new finger assignment burst comprises extended vowel keys, to the drag of the finger partition is assigned vowels and simple release of the finger, may be analyzed a diphthong vowels is formed by simple combination dragged while the touch is input.

[0030] 在用于新分配包括元音的字符组的扩展键被选定两次之后选定分配给扩展区的简单元音时,可以分析出所选的简单元音的复合元音被输入。 [0030] when allocating a new extension region comprises a simple vowel after dispensing the selected extended key to be selected two vowels to the character set can be analyzed polyphthong simple selected vowel is input .

[0031] 当在用于新分配包括元音的字符组的扩展键被选定两次之后选定被分配给扩展区的两个不同的简单元音时,可以分析出通过组合两个所选的简单元音所形成的复合元音被输入,并且当用于新分配包括元音的字符组的扩展键被选定时,分配给扩展区的简单元音被选定,并且用于新分配包括元音的字符组的扩展键被再次选定时,可以分析出所选的简单元音的复合元音被输入。 [0031] When the selected two are allocated to different extents simple vowel after being selected for the new assignment includes two vowel keys extended character set, can be analyzed by a combination of two selected polyphthong formed simple vowel is input, and when used for a new assignment includes vowel extended key is selected character set, vowels allocated to simply extended area is selected and allocated for the new when extended vowel keys including character set is selected again, can be analyzed in simple selected vowel diphthongs is input.

[0032] 系统可应用于移动电话,并且第一字符组可以包括用于改变输入位置的“移动”(“move”)键、用于取消最新输入字符的输入的“取消”(“cancel”)键、或用于将第一字符组中所包括的辅音变成紧音(fortis)或送气音(aspirate)的紧音-送气音键。 [0032] The system can be applied to a mobile phone, and the character set may comprise a first input for changing the position of the "mobile" ( "Move") key for canceling the input of the latest input characters "Cancel" ( "Cancel") key, or for the first character included in the group becomes a tight sound consonant (Fortis) or aspirated (aspirate) a tight sound - aspirated key.

[0033] 第一字符组中的分配有辅音的分区可具有扩展键功能,并且当分配有辅音的分区被选定时,包括元音的字符组可分配给与辅音相邻的扩展区。 [0033] The first character group assigned consonants partitions may have extended key function, and when the partition is assigned a selected consonant, vowel character set comprising allocation extents may be given adjacent consonants.

[0034] 当分配有辅音的分区被选定时,元音以及辅音的紧音和送气音可分配给由所选的分区限定的分区。 [0034] When a partition is assigned a selected consonant, vowel and consonant immediately aspirated tone can be assigned to the selected partition defined by the partition.

[0035] 该系统可以为英语输入系统,多个字符可分配给多个分区中的每一个,并且当在多个分区中的一个或多个被选定之后选定被分配有扩展键的分区时,通过分配给所选分区的字符组合所能应用的单词列表可分配给扩展区且由用户选择。 [0035] The system may input English system, a plurality of characters assigned to each of the plurality of partitions, and the extended key is allocated when the partition is selected in a plurality of partitions, or a plurality of selected , the extents may be allocated to and selected by a user through a combination of characters assigned to a list of words that can be applied to the selected partition.

[0036] 当在扩展键被选定之后选定了分配给扩展区的单词中的任一个时,可以分析出所选的单词和空格键是顺序地输入的,并且当扩展键被选定时,分配给扩展区的单词中的任一个被选定,并且扩展键被再次选定时,可以分析出所选的单词和空格键是顺序地输入的。 [0036] When any selected key is allocated after the expansion zone extended to the selected word, the selected word can be analyzed and the spacebar are sequentially input, and when an extended key is selected when when assigned to any word in an extended area is selected, and an extended key is selected again, the selected words can be analyzed and the spacebar are sequentially input.

[0037] 当扩展键被选定,分配有多个字符的一个或多个分区被选定,并且扩展键被再次选定时,从通过分配给所选分区的字符的组合而能够应用的单词中选择的单词可作为大写字母被输入。 Word [0037] When an extended key is selected, a plurality of characters assigned one or more partitions are selected, and an extended key is selected again, the combination of characters allocated to the selected partition and can be applied the selected word may be input as a capital letter.

[0038] 数字也可以分配给被分配有多个字符的分区,并且当分配有多个字符的分区中的第一分区被选定时,分区被分配给扩展键,并且分配有多个字符的分区中的第二分区被选定时,分配给第一分区的多个字符中的与分配给第二分区的数字次序对应的字符可被输入。 [0038] The number may be assigned to partition a plurality of characters are assigned, and when there are a plurality of characters assigned to the first partition is selected partition, the partition is allocated to the extended key, and a plurality of characters assigned a second partition when the partition is selected, a first plurality of characters assigned to the partition and a second character assigned to a numerical order corresponding to the partition may be input.

[0039] 可以通过拖拉的方法来选定被分配有多个字符的分区。 [0039] may be assigned to a plurality of selected characters by dragging partition method.

[0040] 当选定扩展键时,选定分配给扩展区的单词中的任一个,并且再次选定扩展键,可输入所选单词,并且可将符号新分配给待选定的扩展区。 [0040] When the selected extended key, the selected word assigned to either one of the extension region, and the extended key is selected again, the selected word can be input, and may assign a symbol to be newly selected extents.

[0041] 当顺序地选择分配有多个字符的分区时,输入分析单元可以从包括分配给所选分区的字符组合的单词列表中提取一个单词,并且输出单元可暂时地输出所提取的单词。 [0041] When the partition assigned sequentially selecting a plurality of characters, a list of the input word from the analysis unit may include a combination of characters assigned to the selected partition to extract a word, and the output unit may output the extracted words temporarily.

[0042] 当分配给所选分区的字符组合在包括分配给所选分区的字符组合的单词中全部相同时,输出单元可仅将除了分配给所选分区的字符组合之外的字符输出到扩展区。 [0042] When the combination of characters assigned to the selected partition all the same, in addition to the output unit may be a combination of characters assigned to the selected partition character output word comprising only characters assigned to the selected partition combinations to the extension Area.

[0043] 当选定扩展键时,选定被分配有多个字符的一个或多个分区,并且再次选定扩展键,从能够通过分配给所选分区的字符组合而应用的单词中选择的单词可作为大写字母输入。 [0043] When the selected extended key, the selected one of the plurality of characters are assigned one or more partitions, and the extended key is selected again, the selected word can be allocated to the selected character and the application partition in combination word to be typed as uppercase letters. [0044] 系统可以为印地文输入系统,分配与多个分区一一对应的第一字符组,并且如果选定被分配有扩展键的分区时,将包括元音的字符组新分配给包括由扩展键限定的分区的扩展区。 [0044] The system may be a Hindi input system, a plurality of partitions assigned one correspondence with the first character set, and if extended keys are assigned to the selected partition, including the vowel characters assigned to the new group comprising defined by the extension area extended key partition.

[0045] 有益效果 [0045] beneficial effects

[0046] 由于迄今公知的韩语字符输入系统不考虑元音的形状来布置元音以尽可能地减少手指移动,所以难以支持用户的直觉。 [0046] Since the movement of the finger is arranged to reduce the vowel possible heretofore known Korean character input system does not consider the shape of a vowel, it is difficult to support the user's intuition. 然而,本发明将韩语字母中的辅音指定为键的主字符以便当每个键被第一次按压时输入对应的辅音并且指定除了被指定有辅音的键之外的至少一个键作为输入元音的元音启用键,从而使得用于韩语字母的键数量最小化。 However, the present invention is the Korean alphabet consonants designated as the primary key for the character corresponding to the input consonant when each key is first pressed and are designated with the outside except the specified consonant keys as at least one key input vowel vowel key is enabled, so that the number of keys used to minimize the Korean alphabet. 也就是,当元音启用键被按压时,甚至通过已被分配有辅音的键启用元音的输入,利用单个键也能够输入辅音和元音两者。 That is, when enabled vowel key is pressed, or even enable input has been assigned by a vowel with a consonant key, it is possible to use a single key input both consonants and vowels. 结果,减少了仅用于元音的独立键的数量,并且因此,减少了键的总数量,使得用于输入韩语字母的手指移动距离最小化,这增强了用户便利性。 As a result, reducing the number of separate keys for vowels only, and thus, reduces the total number of keys, for inputting the Korean alphabet such that the finger moving distance is minimized, which enhances the user convenience. 该原理还可应用于印地文和中文,并且在“预测文本输入方法”的情况下,通过设定与韩语的“元音输入启用键”对应的“预测单词选择功能键(扩展键)”,执行预定的单词选择功能和其他各种附加功能已使得输入字符所需的键数量最小化,并且此外,易于选择预测单词,从而提高了用户便利性和效率。 This principle is also applicable to Hindi and Chinese, and in the case of "predictive text entry method", the corresponding "key to enable vowel input" by setting the Korean "predicted word selection key (extended key)" performing a predetermined word select additional functions, and various other such that the input character is the number of keys required is minimized, and furthermore, easy to select a word prediction, thereby improving user convenience and efficiency.

附图说明 BRIEF DESCRIPTION

[0047] 图1是根据本发明的实施例的信息输入系统的框图; [0047] FIG. 1 is a block diagram of an embodiment of information input system of the present invention;

[0048] 图2是根据本发明的实施例的输入单元的概念性示意图; [0048] FIG. 2 is a conceptual schematic diagram of an input unit according to an embodiment of the present invention;

[0049] 图3是根据本发明的实施例示出的信息输入方法的流程图; [0049] FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating the information inputting method according to an embodiment of the present invention;

[0050] 图4是用于说明本发明应用于游戏系统的情况的图; [0050] FIG. 4 is a view for explaining the present invention is applied to a game system of Figure 1;

[0051] 图5至图38和图72是用于说明本发明应用于输入韩语的情况的图; [0051] Figures 5 through 38 and FIG. 72 is a view for explaining the case of the present invention is applied to the input of a Korean map;

[0052] 图39至图61是用于说明本发明应用于输入英语的情况的图;以及 [0052] FIGS. 39 to 61 are for explaining a case where English input is applied to the present invention of FIG.; And

[0053] 图62至图71是用于说明本发明应用于输入英语的情况的图。 [0053] FIGS. 62 to 71 are views for explaining the present invention is applied to the input of English FIG.

具体实施例 Specific Example

[0054] 现在将参照附图详细地说明本发明的示例性实施例。 [0054] Exemplary embodiments will now be described embodiments of the present invention in detail with reference to the drawings.

[0055] 图1是根据本发明的实施例的信息输入系统的框图。 [0055] FIG. 1 is a block diagram of an embodiment of information input system of the present invention.

[0056] 参照图1,信息输入系统包括输入单元110、输入分析单元120和输出单元130。 [0056] Referring to FIG 1, the information input system includes an input unit 110, an input analysis unit 120 and output unit 130.

[0057] 输入单元110包括多个分区并且检测用户是否选择了多个分区中的每一个。 [0057] The input unit 110 includes a plurality of partitions and detecting whether the user selected each of the plurality of partitions.

[0058] 多个分区可在它们之间形成有间隙或者形成为在输入单元110的整个区域中彼此连接。 [0058] The plurality of partitions may be formed or a gap is formed to be connected to each other in the entire region of the input unit 110 therebetween.

[0059] 可以通过检测分区上按压、手指触摸或者触摸和释放的方法来检测每个分区是否被选定。 [0059] The detection zone can be pressed by the finger touch or a touch and release method to detect whether each partition is selected.

[0060] 并非检测每个分区是否由任意一种方法选择,在普遍用于移动电话的常规键盘中,例如,形成键盘的每个键与其它键分离。 [0060] Not detected if each partition is selected by any of the methods, commonly used in a conventional mobile telephone keypad, for example, each key is formed separated from the other keys of the keyboard.

[0061]当诸如触摸板或触摸屏等输入系统检测到用户的触摸时,通过使用将触摸板划分成多个分区并且检测用户触摸了哪个分区的方法,可以获得与键盘相同的效果。 [0061] When the touch panel and a touch panel input system such as a user's touch is detected, by using the touch pad into a plurality of partitions and a method which detects the user touches the partition, the keyboard can be obtained the same effect.

[0062]即使输入单元110使用诸如触摸板或触摸屏等装置形成以检测触摸,也可以基于用户是否已按压分区来判定用户是否已选择分区。 [0062] Even if the input unit 110 uses a touch screen or a touch pad device is formed as to detect a touch, may be based on whether the user has pressed the partitions to determine whether the user has selected a partition.

[0063] 例如,可以利用用户手指的触摸区来判定用户是否已触摸或按压分区。 [0063] For example, to determine whether the user has touched or pressed region partition using a user's finger touch.

[0064] 在为利用电荷量的变化来判定触摸的装置的情况下,由于电荷量与触摸区成比例,所以当所产生的电荷量变化大于或等于预定阈值时,可以判定出按压,并且当所产生的电荷量变化小于预定阈值时,触摸可被判定为如常,并且因此,可以仅通过用于检测触摸的装置来判定用户是否已触摸或按压输入单元110。 [0064] In the case of using the change amount of charge determines the device touched, since the charge amount of the touch area is proportional to, when the changes in charge amount generated is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value, it can be determined that the pressing, and when the resulting when the charge amount change is less than a predetermined threshold value, the touch may be determined as usual, and therefore, may be determined whether the user has touched or pressed by the input unit 110 only means for detecting a touch.

[0065] 作为另一方法,用于检测触摸的压力传感器可包括在诸如触摸板之类的装置的下方。 The pressure sensor [0065] As another method for detecting a touch may include a device such as below the touch pad. 在该情况下,当用户按压触摸板时,位于触摸板下方的压力传感器可以根据触摸板的按压来检测该压力。 In this case, when a user presses the touch panel, the pressure sensor is located below the touch panel can be detected according to the pressing pressure of the touch panel.

[0066] 图2是根据本发明的实施例的输入单元110的概念性示意图。 [0066] FIG. 2 is a conceptual schematic diagram of an embodiment of an input unit 110 of the present invention.

[0067] 如图2所示,输入单元110包括位于触摸检测传感器201下方的压力传感器202。 [0067] 2, the input unit 110 includes a pressure sensor 201 positioned under the touch detection sensor 202. 当用户按压触摸检测传感器201时,诸如触摸板之类的触摸检测传感器201能够上下移动。 When the user presses the touch detection sensor 201, such as a touch sensor detecting a touch pad 201 moves up and down. 如果用户通过大于或等于预定压力的力来按压触摸检测传感器201,则位于触摸检测传感器201下方的开关形式的压力传感器202被按压,并且因此,能够检测到用户是否已按压触摸检测传感器201。 The pressure sensor detects if the user presses the touch sensor 201 by a force equal to or greater than a predetermined pressure, the touch detection sensor 201 is located below the form of a switch 202 is pressed, and it is possible to detect whether the user presses the touch sensor 201 is detected.

[0068] 作为触摸检测传感器201的移动方法,可以无斜度地按压整个触摸检测传感器201,或者可以有斜度地按压触摸检测传感器201,如图2所示。 [0068] As a method of moving a touch detection sensor 201, the slope can be pressed without the entire touch detection sensor 201, or there may be a slope pressing the touch detection sensor 201, as shown in FIG. 也即,不限制按压触摸检测传感器201的任意方向或方法。 That is, the pressing is not limited in any direction or a detection method for a touch sensor 201.

[0069] 作为另一方法,触摸板可以与键盘相同的格式布置。 [0069] As another method, a touch panel may be arranged in the same format keyboard. 也就是,通过使形成键盘的各个键的表面形成有用于检测触摸的装置,可以检测到用户是否已触摸,并且当按压键时,可以通过包括在检测常规的键盘中的按压的相同方法中的判定键是否被按压的方法来同时判定用户是否已触摸键以及用户是否已按压键。 That is, by forming the surface of the keyboard each key is formed with means for detecting a touch for, can detect whether the user has touched, and when the push button, can be by the same method includes pressing in the detection conventional keyboard in the method of determining whether a key has been pressed simultaneously determines whether the user has touched the key, and whether the user has pressed the key.

[0070] 根据用户是否已触摸输入单元110、按压输入单元110或者在输入单元110上进行触摸和释放,输入单元110将关于用户所选的分区的信息提供给输入分析单元120。 [0070] Depending on whether the user has touched the input unit 110, the input unit 110 or by pressing and releasing the touch on the input unit 110, an input unit 110 partitions the information selected by the user on the input supplied to the analysis unit 120.

[0071] 可以仅基于一个标准来判定用户是否已选择特定分区,诸如用户是否已触摸具体分区、按压具体分区、或触摸具体分区且然后从具体分区释放手指或类似物。 [0071] may be based on a standard to determine whether the user has only to select a particular partition, such as whether the user has touched the specific partition, the pressing particular partition or partitions and then touch particular finger or the like released from the particular partition. 然而,可以根据输入形式来改变判定标准。 However, the criteria may be changed according to the input form.

[0072] 下文将参照下面的实施例对这点进行更详细的说明。 [0072] Hereinafter with reference to the following Examples This point will be described in more detail.

[0073] 输入分析单元120利用与对于输入单元110的每个分区的触摸、按压或释放有关的信息来分析和判定用户想要输入的信息。 [0073] The input unit 120 using the information for each partition of the touch input unit 110 is pressed or released and analyzing information related to the analysis determines that the user wants to input.

[0074] 也就是,输入分析单元120将具体项分配给输入单元110的每个分区,并且当具体分区被选定时,分析出被分配给所选分区的信息已被输入。 [0074] That is, the input analysis unit 120 will be specifically allocated to the input each partition entry unit 110, and when a particular partition is selected, the analyzed information is assigned to the selected partition has been input.

[0075] 在该情况下,用于选择多条信息中的一条的扩展键被分配给输入单元110中所包括的多个分区中的至少一个,并且当扩展键被分配时,分配给扩展键的项被新分配给包括预定分区的扩展区。 [0075] In this case, the extended key for selecting a plurality of pieces of information is allocated to a plurality of partition input unit 110 included in at least one, and when the expansion key is assigned, allocated to the extended key items are assigned to a new extension region comprises a predetermined partition.

[0076] 在该情况下,优选考虑手指移动的是,从扩展区中排除分配有扩展键的分区,并且仅与分配有扩展键的分区相邻的分区被包括在扩展区中。 [0076] In this case, it is preferable to consider the finger is moved, is assigned the partition to exclude from the expansion zone extended key, and extended key assigned only to the adjacent partition partition is included in the extended area.

[0077] 在该状态下,当用户选择被分配有新分配项的分区时,输入分析单元120分析出与新分配项对应的信息已被输入。 [0077] In this state, when the user selects the partition is assigned a new assignment entry, the analysis unit 120 analyzes the input information corresponding to the newly allocated key has been input. [0078] 如果分配给扩展键的信息条数大于由扩展键限定的扩展区中所包括的分区的数量,则输入分析单元120分析出,当扩展键被第一次选择时,分配给扩展键的信息的部分被分配给限定的分区,并且当扩展键被再次选择时,其余信息被新分配给限定的分区,从而分析出分配给用户所选择的分区的信息已被输入。 [0078] If the number of messages assigned to the extended key is greater than the number of partitions defined by the extended key included in the extension region, the analysis unit 120 analyzes the input, when the expansion key is first selected, assigned to the extended key the partial information is assigned to the defined partition, and when an extended key is selected again, the remaining information is newly assigned to the partition is defined, the analysis information so that the partition assigned to the selected user has been entered.

[0079] 如果判定出扩展键被设定、新的信息被分配给由扩展键限定的分区并且已根据用户对被分配有新信息的分区的选择输入了单条信息,则输入分析单元120将原始分配的信息分配给被分配有新信息的分区。 [0079] If it is determined that an extended key set, the new information is allocated to the extended key defined partition and entered a single information according to a user is assigned a new information partition, the input analysis unit 120 to the original distribution of information distribution to be assigned a new partition information. 也就是说,进行初始化。 In other words, it is initialized.

[0080] 此外,由于包括在由扩展键限定的扩展区中的分区的数量与新分配给分区的信息条数相同,即使扩展键仅被选择一次,分配给扩展键的所有信息也能够分配给包括在扩展区中的分区,此时,如果扩展键被再次选择,则分区也可返回至原始状态。 [0080] Further, since the number of partitions in the extended key is defined in the extended area of ​​the same number of pieces of information to the new assigned to the partition, even if the extended key is selected only once assigned to all the information the extended keys can be assigned to zone included in the extended partition, this time, if the extended key is selected again, the partition can also return to the original state.

[0081] 分配给由扩展键限定的分区的信息可以总是固定或者根据扩展键而可变地限定。 [0081] partition information allocated by the extended key can be defined according to the extended key is always fixed or variably defined. 将通过示例性实施例详细地说明这点。 This point will be described in detail by means of exemplary embodiments.

[0082] 扩展键可分配给多个分区中的任意一个或一些。 [0082] extended key can be assigned to any one or some of the plurality of partitions.

[0083] 另外,每当扩展键被选择时,包括被分配有新信息的分区的扩展区可以根据每个扩展键而不同地设定。 [0083] Further, an extended key is selected each time, including extended area allocated partitions new information may be set differently according to each extended key.

[0084] 输出单元130将当前分配给每个分区的信息显示在IXD显示器上的分区上。 [0084] The output unit 130 the information currently assigned to each partition in the partition IXD displayed on the display.

[0085] 当输入单元110以触摸屏形式特别地实施时,输出单元130可供使用。 [0085] When the input unit 110 in a touch screen form particular embodiment, the output unit 130 are available.

[0086] 当输入单元110以触摸屏形式实施时,输出单元130将分区输出到屏幕上以对应于输入单元110的分区的位置和尺寸并且显示分配给各个分区的信息。 [0086] When the input unit 110 is embodied in the form of a touch screen, the output unit 130 outputs to the screen partition to correspond to the position and size of a partition of the input unit 110 and display to the information for each partition.

[0087] 当输入单元110以触摸板或键盘形式实施时,由于分配给触摸板的每个键或每个分区的信息能够显示在键盘布局或触摸板上,所以不一定需要输出单元130。 [0087] When the input unit 110 is implemented in the form of a touch pad or a keyboard, each key or information since each partition is assigned to a touch panel can be displayed on a touch panel or a keyboard layout, the output unit 130 is not necessarily required.

[0088] 在该情况下,甚至当分配给每个分区的信息被输出到屏幕时,可以显示所有的分区,仅当选择具体的扩展键时,才可以输出关于当前哪类信息分配给用户所选定的分区的信息或者指示具体扩展键已被选定的标记。 [0088] In this case, even when the information is assigned to each partition is output to the screen, all the partitions can be displayed only when selecting a particular extended key, the output can be assigned to what kind of information about the current user selected partitions or information indicating the particular key has been selected extension flag.

[0089] 图3是示出根据本发明的实施例的信息输入方法的流程图。 [0089] FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an information input method according to an embodiment of the present invention.

[0090] 参照图3,如果用户通过包括多个分区的输入单元110选择了具体的分区(操作301),则输入分析单元120判定所选的分区是否为被分配有扩展键的分区(操作302)。 [0090] Referring to FIG 3, if the user selected a particular partition 110 (operation 301) through the input unit comprises a plurality of partitions, the input analysis unit 120 determines whether the selected partition has a partition is assigned to an extended key (operation 302 ).

[0091] 如果所选的分区不是被分配有扩展键的分区,则输入分析单元120分析出分配给所选的分区的项已被输入(操作307)。 [0091] If the selected partition is not extended key is assigned to the partition, the analysis unit 120 analyzes the input key assigned to the selected partition has been input (operation 307).

[0092] 否则,如果所选的分区为被分配有扩展键的分区,则输入分析单元120将新的项分配给由扩展键限定的扩展区(操作303),并且如果判定出属于扩展区的分区已被选定(操作304),则输入分析单元120分析出新分配给属于扩展区的分区的项已被输入(操作305)。 [0092] Otherwise, if the selected partition is extended key is allocated partition, the input analysis unit 120 assigned to the new entry keys defined by the extended extension region (operation 303), and if it is determined that the extended area belongs partition has been selected (operation 304), the input analysis unit 120 to analyze the newly assigned expansion zone belong to the partition entry has been input (operation 305).

[0093] 否则,如果被分配有扩展键的分区被再次选择(操作308),则输入分析单元120将新项重新设定到扩展区(操作303)以允许用户重新选择新的选项。 [0093] Otherwise, if the partition is assigned an extended key is selected (operation 308) again, the analysis unit 120 inputs a new entry to the extended area is reset (operation 303) to allow the user to re-select a new option.

[0094] 在被分配有扩展键的分区被选定之后,如果被分配有扩展键的分区被再次选定,或者如果属于扩展区的分区未被选定,即,如果除了扩展区之外的分区被选择,则考虑到用户已经错误地选择了被分配有扩展键的分区,并且输入分析单元120使由扩展键限定的重新分配处理无效并且分析出被分配给由用户选定的上一分区的信息已被输入(操作305)。 [0094] After being assigned an extended key is selected partition if the partition is assigned an extended key is selected again, or if they are extended partition area is not selected, i.e., if in addition to the extended area partition is selected, taking into account that the user has erroneously selected the extended key is allocated partition, and the input analysis unit 120 that the redistribution process defined by the extended key is invalid and analyzed by the user is assigned to the selected partition on a the information has been input (operation 305). [0095] 当该一个输入处理完成时,判定是否执行另外的输入(操作306),并且如果执行,则重复上述操作。 [0095] When the input processing is completed, it is determined whether further input (operation 306), and, if performed, the above operation is repeated.

[0096] 根据本发明的输入系统和输入方法可用于各领域。 [0096] The input system and input method of the present invention can be used in various fields.

[0097] 代表性的应用领域为游戏系统中的输入系统以及诸如移动电话和个人数字助理(PDA)等移动装置中的字符输入系统。 [0097] Representative applications for the game system input system and a character input system of a telephone and a personal digital assistant (PDA) and other mobile devices such as mobile in.

[0098] 下文中,将参照附图对本发明的示例性实施例进行说明。 In [0098] Hereinafter, with reference to the accompanying drawings of exemplary embodiments of the present invention will be described.

[0099][第一实施例] [0099] [First Embodiment]

[0100] 图4是用于说明本发明应用于游戏系统的情况的图。 [0100] FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the present invention is applied to a game system.

[0101] 图4(1)和4(11)示出了在游戏系统中使用的输入系统以触摸板400的形式实施的情况,其中由虚线标识的每个四边形表示分区。 [0101] FIG. 4 (a) and 4 (11) shows an input system for use in a game system in a case where a touch pad embodiment 400, wherein the dashed line represents the partition identified by each quadrilateral.

[0102] 另外,假设分区401、402、403和404为被分配有扩展键的分区。 [0102] Further, the partition 401, 402 is assumed as being extended key assigned partition.

[0103] 当用户期望在以拖拉方法在触摸板上玩游戏的同时选择或执行具体菜单时,用户基于所要选择或执行的菜单来选择分区401、402、403和404中的任一个。 [0103] When a user desires to select or execute a menu while the particular method of playing a game in a drag on the touch panel, based on the user to select or execute a menu to select either one of the partitions 402, 403 and 404.

[0104] 可以通过简单的触摸、通过从处于触摸状态的分区401、402、403和404中的任一个的位置释放手指或者通过按压分区401、402、403和404中的任一个来实现分区的选择。 [0104] can be released by simply touching by position 401, from any of 404 and a partition in a touch state of the finger or a partition is achieved by pressing any one of the partitions 404 and 401, select.

[0105] 为了识别出当手指按压分区401、402、403和404中的任一个时实现了选择,可以预先设定阈值以根据触摸区将触摸与按压区分开,如上所述,或者压力传感器可置于触摸板的下方,如图2所示。 [0105] In order to identify when any of the finger press 404 and the partition 401, achieved when a selected threshold value may be preset to separate the region touches the touch area is pressed, as described above, or may be a pressure sensor placed below the touch panel, as shown in FIG.

[0106] 如果用户选择分区401,则之前未被分配信息的分区405和406属于扩展区,并且第一菜单和第二菜单分别分配给分区405和406。 [0106] If the user selects 401 a partition, the partition information is not allocated until 405 and 406 belong to the expansion area, and the first and second menus respectively assigned to the partitions 405 and 406.

[0107] 在该状态下,如果用户选择分区405或406,则选择并执行相应的菜单。 [0107] In this state, if the user selects a partition 405 or 406, the corresponding menu is selected and executed.

[0108] 还可以通过触摸、按压和释放中的任一种来执行选择第一菜单或第二菜单的方法。 [0108] may also be performed to select the first menu or the second menu touched by any method, in the pressing and release.

[0109] 当选择第二菜单时,最方便的方法可以识别到,当用户按压被分配有扩展键的分区401、移动(拖拉)手指至在触摸状态下被分配有第二菜单的分区406并且然后从分区406释放手指时,已经选择第二菜单。 [0109] When selecting a second menu, the most convenient method may recognize, when the user presses the key assigned extended partition 401, moving (dragging) the finger is assigned to the partition 406 in the second menu touch state and then release your finger from the partition 406, the second menu has been selected.

[0110] 下文将主要对能够应用于韩文输入系统的实施例进行说明。 [0110] Hereinafter, mainly applicable to a Korean input system according to embodiments will be described.

[0111][第二实施例] [0111] [Second Embodiment]

[0112] 图5示出了本发明应用于典型的移动电话的输入系统的示例,其中扩展键仅分配给'5'键501,并且图6示出了当扩展键501被选定时字符新分配给扩展区的示例。 [0112] FIG. 5 shows an example applied to a typical mobile telephone system according to the present invention, an input, wherein the extended key assigned only to '5' key 501, and FIG. 6 shows a character when the new extended key 501 is selected example extents allocated to.

[0113] 如图5所示,第一次分配给分区(键)的字符不包括任何元音,并且仅当扩展键被选择时才分配元音。 As shown in [0113] FIG. 5, the first character assigned to a partition (key) does not include any vowel and vowel allocated only when an extended key is selected.

[0114] 也即,扩展键被用作元音输入启用键。 [0114] That is, the extended vowel key is a key input is enabled. 当以字符输入模式选择扩展键时,被分配有'I'、'2'、'3'、'4'、'5'、'6'、'7'、'8'和'9'键的分区被用作由扩展键限定的扩展区以将 When the character input mode selection extended key is assigned with a 'I', '2', '3', '4', '5', '6', '7', '8' and '9' key as defined by the extended partition is key to the extended area

元音分配给每个分区。 Vowel is assigned to each partition.

[0115] 如上所述,当元音输入启用键(即扩展键)被选定时,优选的是被新分配有字符的扩展区可以包括与元音输入启用键相邻且以规则四边形包围元音输入启用键的分区。 [0115] As described above, when the input vowel key is enabled (i.e., an extended key) is selected, it is preferable that a character is newly allocated extents may include enabling input vowel key adjacent to and to surround the regular quadrilateral element sound input enabled partitioning key. 在该情况下,优点在于,在使得按压元音输入启用键之后的手指移动最小化的同时能够输入元 In this case, the advantage that, after the movement of the finger is pressed so that the vowel keys in the input enabled while minimizing the input elements can be

曰◦[0116] 在图5的情况下,通过将频繁使用的4 □' » 4Of、和4入'字母指定给对应的键以易于输入来布置辅音,其中通过按压每个键多达三次就能够输入所有相关的辅音。 Said ◦ [0116] In the case of Figure 5, the frequently used □ 4 ' »4Of, and the 4' corresponding to the letters assigned to the key to facilitate the consonant input arrangement, up to three times by pressing each key among them You can enter all relevant consonants. 也就是说,通过按压'I'键三次来输入'IV,并且通过分别按压'4'键两次和三次来输入'U,和 That is, input by pressing the 'I' key three times' IV, respectively, and by pressing the 'key twice, and three times to enter' 4 U, and

Asia

[0117] 元音未被指定给图5所示的键盘布局,并且为了输入元音,作为被限定为扩展键的兀音输入启用键501的'5'键被首先按压,然后另一键被按压,从而输入相应的兀音。 [0117] vowel is not assigned to the keyboard layout shown in FIG. 5, and to the input vowel key 501 is enabled is defined as the "5" key is first pressed extension key Wu sound input, and the other key is pressing, so that the input sound corresponding Wu. 该输入方法示于图6中。 The input method shown in Figure 6. 图6(1)示出了'5'键为元音输入启用键的情况的元音布置,其中'丄'、tK , HlPtT'被指定给其周围的'2'、'4'、'6'和'8'键,而不是给最初指定的辅音,并且'一'、'I'、'一'和'I'交替地指定给与角部对应的'I'、'3'、'7'和'9'键。 FIG 6 (a) shows a '5' for the vowel key arrangement of the input vowel key is enabled, wherein 'Shang', tK, HlPtT 'is assigned to its surrounding' 2 ',' 4 ',' 6 'and' 8 'key instead of a consonant originally specified, and' a ',' I ',' a 'and' I 'are alternately designated with corresponding corner portions of' I ',' 3 ',' 7 'and' 9 'key. 当元音输入启用键被按压时所启用的元音'卜' 、'H,、 '丄,、'丁,、'一'和'I'的周围键指定布置不限于图5(1),并且用户或装置制造商可以自由地改变该布置。 When the enable input vowel key is pressed enabled vowel 'Bu', ',, H' Shang ,, ',, D' a 'and' I 'is arranged around the key assignments are not limited to FIG. 5 (a), and the device manufacturer or the user can freely change the arrangement. 然而,如图5(1)所示指定的原因仅旨在根据元音次序按从左到右以及从上到下的次序将'卜'布置在左侧、将4 4 '布置在右侧,将'丄,布置在上面,并且将'丁'布置在下面,并且这不限制本发明的配置。 However, in FIG. 5 (1) shown is intended only to specified reasons vowel order from left to right and top to bottom order of the 'Bu' arranged on the left, the 44 'is disposed on the right side, the 'Shang, disposed above, and' D 'is disposed below, and this does not limit the configuration of the present invention. 因此,还可以如图6(11)和6(111)所示布置元音。 Thus, also in FIG. 6 (11), and 6 (111) disposed vowel FIG. 此外,这些简单元音还可以按除了元音输入启用键周围的交叉形式以外的某种形式来布置。 In addition, these vowels can simply press a form except the form of a cross around the vowel keys to enable input arrangement. 另外,不是简单元音的也包括在元音布置中,这是表明复合元音能够被包括以消除连续输入'一'和'|'的不便的示例。 Furthermore, not a simple vowel in vowel arrangement also included, which indicates that the composite is to be included to eliminate the vowels and 'a' continuous input | exemplary inconveniences'.

[0118] 已经对利用元音输入启用键输入简单元音的方法进行了说明。 [0118] The method already vowel key input is enabled using simple vowel input has been described. 在为韩文的情况下,除了图6所示的简单元音之外的复合元音'卜'、,必须能够被输入。 In the case of Korean, in addition to the simple vowel shown in FIG. 6 diphthongs 'Bu' ,, it must be input. 然而,通过图6所示的元音布置不能进行复合元音4 P、 '=|,、 'I'和'I'的输入,因此能够利用元音输入启用键来输入这些复合元音,如下面所要描述的。 However, the vowel is not performed by the arrangement shown in FIG. 6 diphthongs 4 P, '= | ,,' input I 'and' I ', it is possible to use the input vowel key input enable these diphthongs, as follows surface to be described.

[0119] 输入复合元音的第一种方法是通过在元音输入启用键被首先按压两次时将指定了简单元音的键改变为输入复合元音来输入复合元音的方法,如图7(1)所示。 [0119] The first method is the input composite vowel in vowel input keys by enabling the keys to change the specified simple vowel is pressed twice first input method to input composite diphthong vowels, FIG. 7 (1). 图7(1)示出了通过以与'卜'和' =I '相同的方式来分别布置' H '和' "T以及将' I,和'=11 '分别布置在' 1- '和H '的下方而使用户易于识别的布置,连同' K 、 '4' 、 '和'Ir'一起布置,虽然、HI'、 4 H '和'不是复合元音,即它们具有3个以上的笔画。图7(11)和6(111)示出了提供有能输入的元音的布置。另外,可以指定和布置当元音输入启用键被按压三次时能够额外输入的元音组。 FIG. 7 (a) shows by the 'Bu' and 'the I =' are arranged in the same manner 'H' and a ' "T and the' I, and '= 11' are disposed in the '1-' and H 'below the user easy identification arrangement, together with' K, '4', 'and' Ir 'are arranged together, although, HI', 4 H 'and' not a diphthong, i.e., they have three or more stroke. FIG. 7 (11), and 6 (111) is shown provided with a vowel can input arrangement. Further, when the arrangement can be specified and input vowel key is enabled vowel groups can additionally entered pressed three times.

[0120] 然而,由于使用户记住多种情况会导致不便,优选的是,通过尽可能地减少按压次数、仅布置关联的元音以及通过简单元音的组合来输入复合元音,从而能容易地输入元音。 [0120] However, since the user to remember many cases cause inconvenience, it is preferable that, as much as possible by reducing the number of compressions, and disposed only vowel associated input by a combination of simple diphthong vowels, so that it can easily input vowel.

[0121] 例如,如图7(1)所示,虽然能够通过按压元音输入启用键两次以及按压'9'键来输入4 =T,当字符输入自动机被配置为使得还可以通过顺序地输入'=T (参考图6(I)和图7 (I),在按压元音输入启用键两次之后按压'6'键)和'I'(参照图6 (I),在按压元音输入启用键一次之后按压'3'或'9'键)来输入sf,用户可以选择两种方法中的一种,并且能够选择根据用户而言方便的方法。 [0121] For example, FIG. 7 (1), although the key can be activated by pressing the vowel input twice and pressing '9' key input 4 = T, when the character input automaton can also be configured such that by sequentially input '= T (refer to FIG. 6 (the I) and 7 (I), the key is pressed twice after pressing the vowel input enabled' 6 'key), and' the I '(see FIG. 6 (I), the pressing element voice input is enabled once after pressing the key '3' or '9' key) input sf, the user can select one of two methods, and the method can be selected according to user convenience.

[0122] 也就是说,使得键按压次数和手指移动距离最小化的方法同时提供给选择顺序地输入' A IP ' I '的易于觉察的方法的新手和选择直接输入'彳P的方法的高手。 [0122] That is, the number of key presses such that a moving distance of the finger and a method of minimizing simultaneously to 'novice and method for easily perceived direct input selection' select sequentially input 'A IP' I P of the master left foot method .

[0123] 例如,在图6 (I)和图7 (I)中所示的键盘布局中输入sOP的键按压次序为6-5-5_4。 For example, an input keyboard layout as shown in formula (I) in FIG. 6 sOP in (I) and 7 [0123] key is pressed to order 6-5-5_4. 将该键按压次序与输入'01+'的键按压次序6-5-4进行比较,'5'键的第一次按压启用简单元音输入扩展功能,并且'5'键的第二次按压启用将简单元音启用状态变成复合元音启用状态的功能。 The key press input sequence '01 + 'key press sequence compared 6-5-4,' 5 'presses the first key to enable the primary simple vowel input extension, and' second press 5 'linkages Enabling the simple vowel enabled to become diphthongs enabled functional status.

[0124] 也即,如上所述,当通过按压元音输入启用键两次来启用复合元音启用状态时,指定了简单元音的键被改变成指定对应的复合元音而不是简单元音的键,并且通过按压任意键输入复合元音,而不是对应的简单元音。 [0124] That is, as described above, is enabled by pressing the key twice to enable the diphthong vowels input enabled state, designated a simple vowel key is changed to designate corresponding rather than simply diphthong vowels key, and the input complex vowels by pressing any key, rather than simply the corresponding vowels. 也就是说,在按压次序为6-5-5-4的情况下,输入了W.[0125] [5-X]表示简单元音'卜* 、 H * 、 '丄,、'丁,、'一'或'I',并且 That is, when the pressing order of 6-5-5-4, the input W. [0125] [5-X] represents a simple vowel 'Bu *, H *,' Shang ,, ',, D 'a' or 'I', and

[5-5-x]表示复合元音'卜'、' =T、 4JJ-'或'Ir' „ [5-5-x] represents the compound vowels 'Bu', '= T, 4JJ-' or 'Ir' "

[0126] [5-X] ( 'X'为任意键,并且当'X'不是'5'键时,[5-X]表示简单元音,并且当'X'为'5'键时,检查后续的键,并且输入被指定给后续键的元音)被分析为简单元音,并且[5-5-X]被分析为复合元音。 [0126] [5-X] ( 'X' represents any simple vowel key, and when the 'X' instead of '5' key, [5-X], and when the 'X' to '5' key, check subsequent key, and the input key is assigned to the subsequent vowel) is analyzed as a simple vowel, and [5-5-X] is analyzed as diphthongs. 因此,在自动机配置中,'5'键和后续键被分析为简单元音以实现元音的输入。 Thus, in the automatic machine configuration, '5' key and the subsequent keys are analyzed in order to achieve a simple vowel input vowel. [0127] 如果'5'键被按压三次或更多次,则每前两次键按压被忽略以将键按压分析为一次或两次,从而允许元音输入启用键能够根据键按压次数而按简单元音一复合元音一简单元音的次序来执行循环指定的功能。 [0127] If the '5' key is pressed three times or more, each of the first two key presses are ignored in the analysis of a key press once or twice, so as to allow the input vowel key is enabled according to the key press is capable of the number of depressions a simple sequence of vowels diphthong vowels a simple loop to perform the specified functions.

[0128] 可选地,如果' 5 '键被按压三次或更多次,则第三次按压可以用于将元音输入启用状态改变成元音输入禁用状态。 [0128] Alternatively, if '5' key is pressed three times or more, the third pressing the vowel input may be used to enable the state changes to the vowel input disabled. 这是一种用于校正虽然用户期望输入辅音但是用户错误地按压元音输入启用键的情况的方法,即,通过按压元音输入启用键两次来输入辅音的方法。 This is a calibration method, although the user desires to enter the user erroneously presses but consonant vowel key input is enabled for the case, i.e., by pressing the vowel key twice to enter enable input of the consonants method. 也即,元音输入启用键被用作取消按钮。 That is, the vowel input key is used to enable the Cancel button.

[0129] 当根据本发明的实施例元音输入是利用元音输入启用键实现时,优选的是,当元音输入启用键被实际上按压时,输出单元130将元音输入启用状态显示在屏幕上,如图8所示。 [0129] When an embodiment according to the present invention, the vowel input is to enable the use of the input vowel key is implemented, it is preferable that, when the enable input vowel key is pressed when in fact, the output unit 130 displays the vowel input enabled on the screen, as shown in FIG. 如上所述,当输入单元110是利用键盘等来实施时,由于能够通过打印或其它方法来标记形成键盘的字符分配键以及当扩展键被选择时所分配的字符,所以通过将当前是否选择扩展键,即键盘布局是否处于元音输入状态通知给用户,用户能够方便地输入韩文。 As described above, when the input unit 110 is implemented using a keyboard or the like, it is possible to mark key on the keyboard assigned character is formed by printing or other methods and a character key is selected when the extension assigned, it is currently selected by the extension key, the keyboard layout is in the vowel input status to the user, the user can easily input the Korean.

[0130] 也就是说,当用户按压元音输入启用键时,如果能够在屏幕上识别出元音输入启用状态而使得通过如图8所示从透明色到黄色对指针(光标)的背景色进行标记来识别元音输入启用状态,则能够判定后续的键是否要输入辅音或元音。 [0130] That is, when the user presses the input vowel key is enabled, the enabled state can be recognized if the vowel input on the screen 8 such that the background color from yellow to transparent color pointer (cursor) through FIG. marking to identify the vowel input enabled state, it can be determined whether the key to enter a subsequent consonant or vowel. 也就是,如果不存在这样的元音输入启用状态的标记,则用户会迷惑。 That is, if such a vowel input enabled tag does not exist, the user will be confused.

[0131] 尤其是,如图9所示,如果提供将图8所示的简单元音输入启用状态(将指针的背景色设定成黄色)与图9所示的复合元音输入启用状态(将指针的背景色设定成红色)区分开的方法,则用户可以进行更加正确的元音输入。 [0131] In particular, as shown in FIG. 9, if provided a simple vowel input enabled state as shown in FIG. 8 (the pointer is set to the background color of yellow) enabled a complex vowel input shown in FIG. 9 ( the pointer is set to red background color) distinguishable from the method, the user may be more accurate input vowel.

[0132] 尽管通过在图8和图9中改变背景色将输入状态彼此区分开,但是输入状态的区分还可以通过将指针的形状从括号束形式改变成四边形形式以及对当四边形的数量为I时的简单元音输入启用状态和当四边形的数量为2时的复合元音输入启用状态进行通知的方法来进行。 [0132] Although by in FIGS. 8 and 9 to change the background color of the input state are separated from one another, but to distinguish between the input states may also be obtained by the shape of the pointer changes from the bracket beams form a tetragonal form and number when quadrilateral is I simple methods vowel input enabled state and when the number of quadrilateral composite vowel input enabled 2:00 to perform the notification.

[0133][第三实施例] [0133] [Third Embodiment]

[0134] (3-1) [0134] (3-1)

[0135] 图10是将常规的输入系统与根据本发明的实施例的输入系统进行比较的图。 [0135] FIG. 10 is a conventional input system graph comparing input system according to an embodiment of the present invention.

[0136] 图1O(III)示出了韩国专利号为10-0291838的专利Naratgul输入系统的键盘布局,并且图1O(I)和(II)示出了根据本发明的实施例在从通过引入扩展键(元音输入启用键)的构思来分配字符的原始布置中仅去除除了辅音之外的元音之后元音输入启用键701应用于Naratgul输入系统的情况下的键盘布局。 [0136] FIG 1O (III) shows a Korean Patent No. 10-0291838 Naratgul input system of the keyboard layout, and FIG 1O (I) and (II) is shown according to an embodiment of the present invention by introducing the original arrangement of an extended key concept (enable input vowel key) assigned to a character in the keyboard layout is removed only in the case of addition after the vowel input vowel keys other than the consonant enable input 701 is applied to Naratgul system.

[0137] 乍一看能够判定出,在Naratgul输入系统中输入元音所需的四个键丄丁)、(I)和(一)被减少至三个键,并且其结果是,在原理上表明,与使用总共12个键的Naratgul输入系统相比,在使用总共9个键的根据本发明的实施例的键盘布局中,通过分别将'增加笔画(add stroke) '键和'复写(紧音)'键布置到'4'键和'6'键,能够显著地减少手指的移动。 [0137] At first glance, can be determined, four vowel keys to input the desired Shang Ding Naratgul input system), (the I) and (a) is reduced to three keys, and as a result, in principle showed that compared with Naratgul input system a total of 12 keys, using a total of nine keys in the keyboard layout of an embodiment of the present invention, respectively, by the 'increase in the stroke (add stroke)' key, and 'rewritable (the tight sound) 'key is arranged to' 4 'and the key' 6 'keys, can be significantly reduced movement of the finger. 现在将针对本发明应用的Naratgul输入系统描述作为示例的输入单词'迓'的键按压次序。 Sequence of key presses as an example of the input word 'receive as a guest' will now be described Naratgul input system for application of the present invention.

[0138] 根据图1O(III)所不的Naratgul字符输入系统,键按压次序为: [0138] The character input system Naratgul FIG 1O (III) are not, the key press order:

[0139] 2 —*m。 [0139] 2 - * m.

[0140] 在该情况下,通过通过按压'2'键选择,通过按压键以增加笔画来将* L,变成'C' ,通过按压'#,键将4C,变成双辅音'Ce' ,通过按压'7'键来输入'卜'以及最后通过按压'6'键来输入^ o',来输入„键按压的总次数为5,并且如果假设键之间的距离为1,在图10中所示的方法中计算出的手指移动距离为9.63。 [0140] In this case, by pressing the '2' key selection, by pressing a key to increase the stroke by the * L, becomes' C ', by pressing' # key 4C, become double consonant 'of Ce' , input by pressing the '7' key 'Bu' ^ o and the final input by pressing the '6' key 'to enter "key pressed is the total number of 5, and the distance between the bond is 1 if it is assumed, in FIG. 10 in the method shown in the calculated movement distance of the finger is 9.63.

[0141] 根据应用了根据本发明的实施例的元音输入系统的改进的Naratgul字符输入系统,如图10(1)所示,键按压次序为: [0141] The application of a system according to a modified embodiment of the vowel input of the present invention is a character input system Naratgul, 10 (1), a key press order:

[0142] 2 — 4 — 6 — 5 — 4 — 9 (FIG.10 (I)的情况)。 [0142] 2 - 4 - 6 - 5 - 4 - 9 (FIG.10 (I) of the case).

[0143] 在该情况下,通过通过按压'2'键选择tL5 ,通过按压'4'键将'匕,变成5通过按压'6'键将4C5变成双辅音`sCf ,通过顺序地按压'5'和'6'键以选择元音s卜^来输入'卜,,以及最后通过按压'9'键输入' o',来输入'S' ••键按压的总数量为6,并且如果假设键之间的距离为1,则图7中所示的方法中计算的手指移动距离为7.8。 [0143] In this case, by pressing the '2' to select TL5, by pressing the "4" key "dagger into 5 by pressing the" 6 "key into a double consonant 4C5` sCf, by sequentially pressing '5' and '6' keys to select the input vowel s ^ Bu 'Bu ,, and finally by pressing the' 9 'key input' O ', to enter the' total number of s '•• key 6 is pressed, and if bond is assumed that the distance between a moving distance of the finger 7 in the method shown in FIG. 7.8 is calculated.

[0144] 也就是说,尽管键按压次数增I,但是手指移动距离减少了大约20%。 [0144] In other words, despite the increase in the number of key presses I, but the finger moving distance is reduced by about 20%. 这提供了在图7所示的键盘布局中以总共9个键的数量输入全部韩语字母的方法。 This provides a method for inputting the Korean alphabet to the number of all of a total of nine keys in the keyboard layout shown in FIG. 7.

[0145] 而且,由于能够以9个键输入韩语字母,所以能够将附加功能添加到具有12个键的键盘布局中的其余3个键,从而能够总体地提高效率。 [0145] Further, since it is possible to input the Korean alphabet keys 9, it is possible to add additional functionality to the remaining 3 keys in the keyboard layout has 12 keys, thereby improving the overall efficiency. 例如,不是按压菜单键或'移动'键来输入空格0、句点C )或问号(?),而是能够使用在现有Naratgul输入系统中已经用作'增加笔画'功能或'复写(紧音)'功能的'#,键或键,从而增强了键盘布局的便利性。 For example, pressing the menu button or not the 'move' 0 key to enter a space, period C) or a question mark (?), But can be used in the prior systems have been used as input Naratgul 'increased stroke' function or 'replication (tight sound ) 'function' #, or key, thereby enhancing the convenience of the keyboard layout. 除了输入韩语字母所需的键按压次数和手指移动距离之外,这是对于实际文本输入而言重要的比较点。 In addition to the Korean alphabet keys to enter the desired number and pressing the finger movement distance, which is important in terms of the actual text entry point of comparison.

[0146] 此外,本发明的优点在于,由于能够以总数9个键输入韩语单词,因而在用户熟悉键盘布局之后,能够无需观看键盘布局来容易地输入字符,便于一只手操纵。 [0146] Further, the advantages of the present invention is that, since it is possible to input a Korean word Total nine keys, so users become familiar with a keyboard layout, the keyboard layout can be easily without viewing the input character, to facilitate a manual operation.

[0147] 如上所述,根据本发明的实施例的输入系统具有如下优点:能够容易地使用有限数量的分区,并且通过将最初分配给分区的字符设定为除了元音之外的字符以及将分配给当扩展键被选择时包括在扩展区中的分区的字符设定为包括元音的字符或仅设定为元音,还能够缩短手指移动距离。 [0147] As described above, according to the input system has the advantage that an embodiment of the present invention: can be easily used and the limited number of partitions, and the character is initially assigned to the partition by setting the character except the vowel assigned included in the extended area extended key is selected when the character set comprises characters partitioned vowel or a vowel set only, but also possible to shorten the movement distance of the finger.

[0148] (3-2) [0148] (3-2)

[0149] 图11是用于将常规的输入系统与根据本发明的实施例的输入系统进行比较的图。 [0149] FIG. 11 is a conventional input system graph comparing input system according to an embodiment of the present invention. [0150] 图1l(III)示出了Cheonjiin字符输入系统的键盘布局,并且图1l(I)和(II)示出了根据本发明的实施例的在从通过引入扩展键(元音输入启用键)的构思来分配字符的原始布置中仅去除除了辅音之外的兀音之后兀音输入启用键801应用于Cheonjiin字符输入系统的情况下的键盘布局。 [0150] FIG. 1l (III) shows a keyboard layout Cheonjiin character input system, and FIG. 1l (I) and (II) shows the vowel input is enabled in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention by introducing in the extended key ( original arrangement of keys) allocated concept character keyboard layout in addition to removing only the case where Wu sound input enabled character input key 801 is applied to the system after Cheonjiin Wu consonant sound outside.

[0151] 通过将根据本发明的实施例的扩展键(元音输入启用键)的构思应用于图 [0151] applied by the (vowel key input is enabled) in accordance with an embodiment of the extended key concept of the present invention, FIG.

11 (III)中所示的Cheonjiin键盘布局,输入元音所需的与Cheon (含义为天:•)、]!(含义为地:一)以及In(含义为人:I)对应的所有键能够用于其它功能,如图1l(I)和(II)中所示。 Cheonjiin keyboard layout, and the required input vowel Cheon (days meaning: •) as shown in (III), 11] (meaning to: a)! And In (human meanings: the I) corresponding to all keys can be for other functions, as shown in FIG. 1l (I) and (II),. 因此,通过将对应的功能应用于键盘的键,能够解决辅音冲突问题以及Cheonjiin字符输入系统的“空格”(“space”)键问题。 Therefore, the corresponding function key will be applied to the keyboard, to solve conflicts and consonant "space" Cheonjiin character input system ( "space") key issues.

[0152] 由于图11示出了'移动'键(最终辅音键:'6'键)或菜单键('0'键)被布置在键盘中央的格式,所以用户便利性增强。 [0152] Since FIG. 11 shows a 'moving' key (final consonant keys: '6' key) or menu ( '0' key) is arranged in the center of the keyboard format, the user convenience is enhanced.

[0153] 能够通过在输入与最终辅音对应的辅音之后按压'最终辅音'键以使接下来通过将输入光标移动至下一栏来输入同一个键,来解决辅音冲突问题、Cheonjiin的不方便性问题。 [0153] After the input through the final consonant corresponding to the consonant pressing 'final consonant' so that the next key to a key input by the same input cursor moves to the next column to resolve conflicts consonants, inconvenience of Cheonjiin problem. 例如,'最终辅音'键对应于Cheonjiin键盘输入系统的'移动'键,并且由于按压'最终辅音'键两次可充当“space”键,所以获得了与实质上将'移动'键移至键盘布局中央相同的结果。 For example, 'final consonant' key corresponding to 'movement' key Cheonjiin keyboard input system, and the pressing 'final consonant' key twice to act as a "space" key, is obtained substantially with the 'move' button to move the keyboard same central layout result.

[0154] 例如,为了根据本发明输入单词'時吾Of禮按压次序为: [0154] For example, according to the order of I Of Li pressing the input word 'present invention are:

[0155] 4-4-5-4-4-5-7-4-4-6-4-5-6-5-3 0 [0156] 对于Cheonjiin韩语字符输入系统,键按压次序为: [0155] 4-4-5-4-4-5-7-4-4-6-4-5-6-5-3 0 [0156] Korean character input system for Cheonjiin, order of pressing keys:

[0157] 0-0-1-2-0-3-0-0-( '移动,键)-0-2-1-1。 [0157] 0-0-1-2-0-3-0-0- ( 'moving key) -0-2-1-1.

[0158] 根据该示例,尽管在本发明中除了'移动'键之外键按压次序比Cheonjiin字符输入系统中较大,但是在Cheonjiin字符输入系统中手指移动距离显著地增加,因为在输入音节'吾'之后用户等待较长时间或者按压位于被分配有字符输入键盘的区域之外的'移动'键来输入'O,。 [0158] According to this example, although in addition to 'movement' is pressed against the bond order of the ratio of the present invention, the character input system Cheonjiin larger, but significantly increased in the character input system Cheonjiin movement distance of the finger, because the input syllable ' We 'after the user presses or wait longer positioned is assigned a region other than the character input keyboard' movement 'button to enter' O ,.

[0159] 也就是说,在Cheonjiin输入方法中增加手指移动距离的主要原因在于,由于辅音冲突不得不按压'移动'键,并且由于根据本发明最初没有元音布置在键盘布局中,所以与'移动'键对应的项能够移至用于输入字符的区域。 Mainly [0159] That is, the increase in the finger movement distance Cheonjiin input method is that since the consonants have the pressing conflict 'mobile' key, and since the present invention is not initially disposed in the vowel keyboard layout, and so ' mobile 'key corresponding to the item can be moved to an area for inputting a character.

[0160] 另外,尽管在辅音o和'□'被指定给距元音最远的'0'键的Cheonjiin字符输入系统中手指移动距离显著地堦加,根据本发明,用于解决辅音冲突问题的'移动'键被指定给位于键盘中央的'6'键,并且用于元音的键不是必要的,使得将已指定给'0'键的' o*和 [0160] Further, although the consonant and o '□' is assigned to the farthest from the vowels '0' Cheonjiin character input keys in the system is significantly jie applied to the finger movement distance, according to the present invention, for solving the conflict consonant the 'mobile' key is assigned to the center of the keyboard '6' key, and the key for the vowel is not necessary, so that which has been assigned to the '0' key 'o * and

指定给'4'键。 Assigned to the "4" key. 其结果是,所有键与键盘布局的中央相邻,并且因此,即使不通过视觉上感测键盘布局,通过手指对键盘布局触摸感觉就能够觉察到至下一键的任何移动,因此,输入速度提高并且不是通过整只手的运动而是通过拇指运动就能够实现字符输入,从而提供进一步的便利性。 As a result, all the keys adjacent to the central keyboard layout, and therefore, without visual sensing by sensing the keyboard layout, the keyboard layout of a touch by a finger can be perceived in any sense to move to the next key, therefore, the input speed but to improve and not by movement of the thumb can be achieved character input by the whole hand movement, providing further convenience. 这是本发明的9键输入方法的显著优点。 9 key input method which is a significant advantage of the present invention.

[0161] 在上文所述的实施例(3-1)和(3-2)中,将作为两种公知的有代表性的字符输入方法的Cheonjiin字符输入方法和Naratgul字符输入方法进行比较,本发明被配置为将辅音和元音指定给同一个键并且通过扩展键而不是通过指定了元音的键和指定了辅音的其它键来启用元音。 [0161] In the embodiments described above in Example (3-1) and (3-2), the character input method as two well-known representative of Cheonjiin Naratgul character input method and a character input method are compared, the present invention is configured to assign to the same consonant and vowel keys and the extended key rather than through a specified vowel keys and consonant keys are specified to enable other vowels.

[0162] 常规地,由于根据由初始辅音、中间元音和最后辅音形成的韩文的特点在大多数情况下被分配有形成初始辅音的辅音的键以及被分配有形成中间元音的元音的键单独地定位在左右或者上下,所以手指必须频繁地上下移动或者左右移动。 [0162] Conventionally, since the characteristics of the Korean consonant is formed by the initial, intermediate and final consonant vowel are allocated in most cases there is formed an initial consonant and consonant keys are assigned vowel in vowel formed keys alone or vertically positioned at right and left, it must be moved up and down or left and right fingers move frequently. 然而,根据本发明,由于辅音和兀音不是单独布置的,用于输入初始辅音和中间兀音或者输入中间兀音和最后辅音的手指移动距离相对地减小,从而与其它韩文输入方法相比大幅减少了手指运动。 However, according to the present invention, since the consonant sounds, and Wu is not a separate arrangement for inputting the initial consonant sound and Wu intermediate or final consonant input sound intermediate Wu finger moving distance is relatively reduced, as compared with other Korean input method significantly reduced finger movement.

[0163] 图12示出了关于代表性地应用于市场上可获得的移动电话的韩文输入方法的按压计数数据和手指移动距离数据的曲线图,这些披露在了因特网上(http://rockl209.tistory.com/296)。 [0163] FIG. 12 illustrates the pressing count on Korean input method typically applied to the mobile phone available on the market data and a graph of the finger moving distance data, which are disclosed in the (http Internet: // rockl209 .tistory.com / 296). 乍看就能判定出,在图11中所示的键盘布局中的手指移动距离比任何其它方法都短。 At first glance, it can be judged that the moving distance of the finger in the keyboard layout shown in FIG. 11 are shorter than any other method.

[0164] 在原理上,这能够容易地理解,因为通过9个键能够进行任何输入,这是本发明的目的,从图12中清楚地显示出。 [0164] In principle, it can be easily understood, since the input can be performed by any nine keys, which is the object of the present invention, clearly show in FIG. 12.

[0165] 在为被视为当前最方便用户的Cheonjiin的情况下,即使如本发明中元音的布置移至中央以减少手指移动距离而键按压次数不变,手指移动距离被减至37.2 (+a,a表示由于辅音冲突用于按压'移动'键的手指移动距离)而键按压次数不变仍为37(在图12的数据中有误差),但是,键按压次数和手指移动距离分别比图11的键盘布局中多10%和20%,这显然表明了Cheonjiin的改进的键盘布局的便利于比根据本发明的键盘布局的便利性低。 [0165] considered as being at the most user-friendly Cheonjiin case, even if the present invention is arranged as moved to the central vowel finger moves to reduce the number of times the same distance, a key press, the finger moving distance is reduced to 37.2 ( + a, a denotes a finger for pressing the conflict since consonant 'movement' of the moving distance of the key) is pressed while the key 37 is still the same number of times (there is an error in the data of FIG. 12), however, the number of key pressing and moving distance of the finger, respectively 20% and 10% more than the keyboard layouts in FIG. 11, which clearly indicates the improved convenience in keyboard layout Cheonjiin lower than keyboard layout according to the convenience of the present invention.

[0166] 通过图12的数据能够理解,当实现对元音的理解时,使用的便利性比当前任何其它键盘布局都更多地增强。 [0166] Data can be understood from FIG. 12, when implementing the understanding of vowels, ease of use are enhanced more than any other current keyboard layout. 尤其是,图12中所示的平均手指移动距离(根据一个按压动作的手指移动距离)表明了用户感觉三星(Samsung)的Cheonjiin字符输入方法方便的原因。 In particular, the average distance of movement of the finger shown in FIG. 12 (a pressing operation according to the finger movement distance) indicates the reason for the user feels convenient Samsung (Samsung) Cheonjiin the character input method. 也即,尽管因为在按压键一次之后的手指移动距离对应于单个键的尺寸,所以三星的Cheonjiin字符输入方法提供了用户能够容易查找和移至下一个键的便利性,但是用户不能容易地查找和移至下一个键并且感觉Naratgul难用,因为平均手指移动距离几乎为两个键之间的距离的双倍,除非用户熟悉Naratgul字符输入方法。 That is, although because the finger after pressing the key once to move a distance corresponding to the size of a single key, so Samsung's Cheonjiin character input method provides the user can easily find and move to the next key convenience, but the user can not easily find and move down a key and feeling Naratgul difficult to use, because the average distance of finger movement is almost double the distance between two keys, unless the user is familiar with Naratgul character input method. 然而,根据本发明,因为平均手指移动距离为0.86,小于1,所以与Cheonjiin字符输入方法相比用户能够更容易地查找和移至下一个键。 However, according to the present invention, as 0.86, less than 1, as compared with a character input method Cheonjiin user to more easily find and move to the average moving distance of the finger key. 也就是说,表明了启用通过9个键进行字符输入的原因,并且从人机工程方面考虑由于仅通过拇指运动就能够处理9个键,所以用户能够无需观看键盘布局来进行输入。 In other words, indicating the reasons for character input is enabled through 9 keys, and due consideration will be able to handle nine keys only by movement of the thumb, so the user can watch without the need for input from the keyboard layout ergonomics.

[0167] 现在将对如下示例进行说明:通过从最初布置的字符中排除元音而增加的功能能够引入具有有限数量分区的输入系统中。 [0167] Now examples will be described as follows: vowels by excluding from the character in the original arrangement and increased functionality can be introduced input system having a limited number of partitions.

[0168][第四实施例] [0168] [Fourth Embodiment]

[0169] (4-1) [0169] (4-1)

[0170] 当前的实施例涉及到应用了根据本发明的元音输入方法的辅音布置,其中通过考虑到实际使用频率的次数来将一个或两个辅音指定给每个键但是将具有较高使用频率的辅音(图14)指定为主要字符以使得当每个对应的键被按压一次时输入主要字符来布置辅音,并且辅音的布置次序为韩文辅音次序,以使用户能够容易地熟悉布置次序。 [0170] The present embodiments relate to an application arrangement according consonant vowel inputting method of the present invention, to which one or two consonant key assigned to each use, but will have a higher frequency of use by taking into consideration the actual frequency consonant (FIG. 14) is designated as the primary frequency such that when the character corresponding to each input key is pressed once primarily consonant characters are arranged, and the arrangement order of the Korean consonant is a consonant order to enable a user to readily familiar arranged order.

[0171] 因此,如图13所示,进行辅音布置以分别将' 、 4LCj 、*3' 、 *oo5 、 4H5 、 4人天,和'古,指定给'I'、'2'、'3'、'6'、'7'、'8' 和'9' 键以及将输入除了这些辅音之外的'紧音'所需的功能指定给'4'键来输入所有的辅音。 [0171] Accordingly, 13, respectively, arranged to be consonant ', 4LCj, * 3', * oo5, 4H5, 4 days people, and 'old, assigned to the' I ',' 2 ',' 3 ',' 6 ',' 7 ',' 8 'and' 9 'and the key input in addition to these consonant' tight sound 'function to the desired' 4 'button to enter all the consonants. 由于被指定了'古'的'9'键的手指按压动作与其它键相比是不自然的,所以优选的是*两者均指定给位于键盘布局的中央区域中的'8'键。 Since the finger is specified 'old' of the '9' key pressing action is unnatural as compared with other keys, it is preferable * are assigned to the central region of the keyboard layout of the '8' key. 因此,由于键按压次数增加I之外输A4 与输入* X ^无实质差别,所以优选的是' ^ *被布置在键盘布局的中央行中。 Thus, since the number of times the key is pressed to increase the input to I input A4 * ^ X-insubstantial differences, it is preferable that '^ * is arranged in the center line of the keyboard layout.

[0172] 同样,由于与'9'键相同的原因,通过将仅一个字符指定给指定了'《»的'7'键,提供了输入的方便性。 [0172] Also, since the '9' key the same reason, only a character assigned to the assignment by the '' »7 '' key, provides ease of input.

[0173] 送气音'I' v 4E5 , 'SI'和灭作为最后的字符被分别指定给被指定有、 'C,、 和I'的键。 [0173] aspirated 'I' v 4E5, 'SI' and off as the last character is assigned to each designated with a, 'C ,, and I' key. 也就是,分别通过按压被指定有'],和'H,的'I'和 That is, there are designated by pressing a '], and' H, the 'I' and

'V键两次来输;W和'SI',并且通过按压被指定有' C '和*人X'的'2'和'8'键三次来输入和'天' Jl过这样做,9个键满足了输入所有辅音的条件,使得通过一个手指来容易地输入韩文字符。 'Key twice to input V; W is and' the SI ', and is designated by pressing with a' C 'and the person * X' '2' and '8' key three times to enter and 'day' of Jl By doing so, 9 a key input condition is satisfied all the consonants, so to easily input a Korean character by a finger.

[0174] (4-2) [0174] (4-2)

[0175] 除了实施例(4-1)之外,为了防止作为第一个音节的最后一个辅音和第二个音节的最初一个辅音必须输入在tzII'中的的辅音之间的这种冲突的情况,图15示出了辅音布置方法,其将指定给'2'键的*和分别重新指定给被指定了!,的'I'键和被指定了*5S的'3'键,并且将'移动'键的功能分配给已被指定了和4C*的'2'键从而通过将'移动'键的功能分配给单个键来防止手指移至'移动'键来减少整体的手指移动。 [0175] In addition to the embodiment (4-1), in order to prevent a consonant as the first consonant of the last syllable and second syllable must enter tzII 'of such a conflict between the consonant case, FIG. 15 illustrates a consonant arrangement method which will be assigned to the '2' * re-assign the key and to is specified!, the 'I' key and a designated * 5S of the '3' key, and function 'mobile' key has been allocated to the designated 4C * and the '2' key so as to prevent the finger to 'move' keys to decrease the overall movement of the finger allocation by 'mobile' bond to a single bond.

[0176] 应用于图13和图15中所不的辅音布置的情况的兀音布置分别对应于图6 (II)和图7 (II)。 [0176] FIG applied and Wu tone arrangement 13 in FIG. 15 are not arranged in a case where the consonants respectively correspond to FIGS. 6 (II) and 7 (II). 如果' L.,和《 c,彼此分离且分别与' I,和'己,组合,则预测键按压次数增加。 If 'L., and "c, respectively, separated from each other and' the I, and 'have, in combination, the predicted increase in the number of key presses. 因此,作为可能将* L.,和4 C吩别与' -1 5,分离的方法,提供了借以执行紧音功能的将'移动'键功能分配给'4'键的方法(在图13(1)中标记为'**')。 Thus, as may be * L., thiophene and 4 respectively and C '-15, the separation method is provided whereby a tight sound function execution' mobile 'key function is assigned to' 4 'method (FIG. 13 bond (1) labeled '**').

[0177] 由于辅音冲突实际发生的情况比使用每个键的情况更不常见,所以通过在紧音功能键被按压两次时启用' 移动'键功能,使用频率为第二最高的4能够被指定为'2'键的第一个字符。 [0177] Since the actual conflict situation consonant are less common than the case of using each of the keys, so when enabled 'mobile' function key is pressed twice through a tight sound function key, the second highest frequency of use can be 4 designated as '2', the first character keys.

[0178] 将用于执行紧音功能的'**'键指定给'4'键是为了减少手指移动距离,因为需要紧音功能的所有辅音、 '匚' ,'H,、 '人'和'X'布置左侧。 [0178] The functions for performing tight sound '**' is assigned to the key '4' key is to reduce the moving distance of the finger, because all consonant required tight sound function, 'contraband', 'H ,,' person 'and 'X' is arranged on the left side. 同样,'天,和*A'被指定给相同键的原因在于,如上文所述,将仅指定给'9'键是有益的,并且将 Similarly, the reason 'days, and * A' is assigned to the same key that, as described above, to assign only the '9' key is beneficial, and

仅指定给'9'键的另一原因在于允许'X,尽可能地接近'**'键。 Only assigned to '9' key Another reason is to allow 'X, as close as possible' * 'key.

[0179] 用于执行紧音功能的'**'键不仅执行将变成的紧音改变功能,而且通过将最后辅音和后续初始辅音指定给同一个键来执行用于防止发生辅音冲突的功能。 [0179] for performing the functions of tight sound '**' into the key only performs a tight sound changing function, and by specifying the final consonant and an initial consonant subsequent to the same key used to perform the function of preventing a conflict consonant . 例如,当输入单词4^時'时,为了输入'zf的丄,和在图13的键盘布局中输入之后,必须按压'移动'键,并且'移动'键的该功能通过'**'键来执行。 For example, when, after the input word ^ 4 ', in order to input' ZF of Shang, and an input keyboard layout in FIG. 13, the pressing must be 'moved' key, and the function 'mobile' key by the '*' key performed. 也就是说,输入的键按压次序为: That is, a key press sequence entered as:

[0180] 1-5-4-2-4-2-5-4 [0180] 1-5-4-2-4-2-5-4

[0181] [0181]

+ f+, -f- , o 口, Hh , L- C ' + I傘拿,+ f [___ [ ' + + , (0| 口) + F +, -f-, o port, Hh, L- C '+ I take umbrella, + f [___ [' + +, (0 | port)

[0182] 尽管的双重显示表示在紧音改变功能中相同辅音的重复,但是'**'键执行'移动'键的功能以防止辅音冲突,能够理解为表示允许输入另一辅音。 [0182] Although the dual display function represents change repeating the same consonant sound in tight, but the '*' key performs the function 'mobile' consonant key to prevent conflicts, it can be understood to mean the other to allow the input consonant. 当相同的辅音紧接着紧音输入时,按压'**'键得到相同的效果。 When the same consonant followed tight sound input, pressing '*' key to get the same effect.

[0183] 尽管因为* L.,不具有紧音而能够通过按压'**'键一次来输入'办斗',在'I,用作 [0183] Although as * L., capable of having no tight sound by pressing '*' key once to enter 'do bucket' in 'the I, as

中的最后一个辅音和初始辅音的情况下,因为通过按压'**'键来输入与紧音对应的tH5 ,所以按压'**'键一次导致错误。 In the case of the initial consonants and last consonants, because, by pressing '*' key corresponding to the input tight sound TH5, so that the pressing '*' key once causes an error. 因此,为了允许'**'键执行辅音冲突防止功能和紧音改变功能,通过允许'**'键执行当'**'键被按压一次时防止最后辅音和初始辅音之间的辅音冲突的功能以及当'**'键被按压两次时执行紧音改变功能,能够防止如在'對7|»的情况下两种功能都可能的情况。 Accordingly, in order to allow '**' collision prevention function key to perform a consonant sound and tight change function, by allowing the '*' key to perform when the '*' key is depressed once to prevent the collision between the final consonant and an initial consonant consonant and when the function '**' performs tight sound change function key is pressed twice, it is possible to prevent 'of 7 | case »cases both functions are possible.

[0184] 因此,本发明的构造在于,通过分别按压'**'键一次和两次,'**'键执行防止最后一个辅音和初始辅音之间的辅音冲突的功能以及紧音改变功能。 [0184] Accordingly, the present invention is constructed, '*' key once and twice, '**' consonant key to perform a function of preventing a collision between the final consonant and an initial consonant sound and tight changing function by individually pressing.

[0185] (4-3) [0185] (4-3)

[0186] 不同于上述实施例,通过允许' ο时丸行与上述双辅音功能对应的图13和图15的'**'键的功能,利用韩文辅音中4 O 5的特殊性,进一步增强了输入的方便性。 [0186] Unlike the embodiment described above, by allowing 'when the double-row balls ο consonant corresponding to the function 13 and 15' ** 'function keys, Korean consonant specificity using 4 O 5 is further enhanced the convenience of the input.

[0187] 当发明韩文时,通过将用作初始辅音的' 与用作最后一个辅音的区分开,用作初始辅咅的' O »被用作支持元音的形式而不具有实质的声音值的元素。 [0187] When the Korean invention, 'the last consonant of a separate region used, is used as the initial secondary Pou' will be used by the initial consonant O »are used as support in the form of a vowel sound without having substantial value Elements. 也即,不能够在辅音之间使用O „当前实施例的配置的核心是使用该特性。 That is, without using O between consonants "core configuration according to the current embodiment is to use this feature.

[0188] 也就是说,当在图16所示的键盘布局中输入时,通过在首先按压'I'键以输入'π* ,按压'4'键以及再次按压'I'键的方法中输入,两次,能够解决必须通过按压相同的'I'键来输入第一个音节izT的最后一个辅音和第二个音节4:7丨的(-1'的问题。 [0188] That is, when the input keyboard layout as shown in FIG. 16, by first pressing the 'I' key to input 'π *, pressing the "4" key is pressed again and' I 'key input method twice, the input must be able to solve the last consonant of the first syllable and second syllable izT 4 by pressing the same 'I' key: 7 problems of Shu (-1 ".

[0189] 如果'I'键被连续地按压两次而不按压与4 O»对应的'4'键,则无需输入,两次来输入£ =I '。 [0189] If the 'I' key is pressed twice consecutively without pressing with 4 O »corresponding '4' key, no input to the two input £ = I '. 因此,与* O »对应的'4'键用作'移动'键以仅防止辅音冲突,而无需实质上输入辅音之间'c^ β此外,按压与辅音之间的4C)*对应的'4'键两次将第一个辅音改变成紧音以执行输入双辅音的功能。 Thus, the O * »corresponding '4' key as 'move' consonant key to prevent conflict only, without substantially between the input consonant 'c ^ β Further, 4C between the pressing consonant) * corresponding to' 4 'key twice the first consonant is changed to a tight sound input to perform the dual function of consonants.

[0190] 由于在辅音之间不能连续地输入* 两次,所以除了'移动'键功能之外,通过按压'4'键两次,能够执行双辅音输入功能。 [0190] Since the input can not be continuously between two consonant *, so in addition to 'move' key function by pressing the "4" key twice, a double consonant input function can be performed. 例如,在图15的键盘布局中,用于输入4的键按压次序为7-4-4-5-6-3-4-3-6,其中'4'键被按压两次以输入第一个音节'晳'的'HH5,并且为了防止'3'键应被连续按压两次的情形,'4'键在'3'键之间被按压以被连续地按压,因为第二个音节的初始辅音与第一个音节的最后一个辅音相同。 For example, the keyboard layout in FIG. 15, for pressing the input key sequence is 7-4-4-5-6-3-4-3-6 4, wherein the "4" key is pressed twice to a first input syllable 'Xi' is' HH5, and in order to prevent the '3' key case should be continuously pressed twice, '4' key 'is pressed so as to be continuously pressed between the 3' key, because the second syllable an initial consonant and a final consonant first syllable of the same. 由于该方法不实际地影响4 的输入,通过允许8 O'执行'移动'键功能和双辅音输入功能,通过按压图9的键盘布局中的元音输入启用键能够输入的元音' I '和'一'能够连同辅音一起使用。 Since this method does not actually affect the input 4, the 'run' moved by allowing 8 O 'double consonant key input function and the function is enabled vowel key can be inputted by pressing the vowel input keyboard layout in FIG 9' I ' and 'a' can be used together with a consonant. 因此,由于在元音中具有最高使用频率的'I'能够通过一次按压动作来输入,所以能够减少总的键按压次数,使得输入效率提高。 Thus, since the highest frequency in the vowels 'I' can be input by a pressing operation, it is possible to reduce the total number of key presses, so improving the efficiency of input. 此外,通过将'丁彳'和61+' 1502指定给图9的键盘布局中的已被指定有' I '和'一'的键,用于每两个元音'丁i '和'丄卜货四次按压动作能够减少成两次按压动作以输入HPi斗' 1502中的每个,并且此外,如图16(111)所示,'f和'xjf 1503中的每个能够通过三次按压动作来输入,使得大大提高输入效率。 Moreover, by 'left foot D' and 61+ 'assigned to the keyboard layout 1502 of FIG. 9 has been designated' I 'and' a 'key, for each of the two vowels' D i 'and' Shang Bu pressing operation can be reduced four cargo pressed twice to input operation HPi bucket 'are each 1502 and, in addition, 16 (111) as shown,' and F 'xjf 1503 can be pressed by each of the three an operation input, so greatly improving the efficiency of input.

[0191] (4-4) [0191] (4-4)

[0192] 本发明的另一实施例是一种辅音布置方法,其防止在多个辅音被指定给单个键且根据按压次序顺序地输入的多次击键方法中发生的辅音冲突(某音节的最后一个辅音和后续音节的初始辅音被指定给同一个键的情况)。 [0192] Another embodiment of the present invention is a method of consonant arrangement which is assigned to a single key to prevent the conflict of the plurality of consonants and consonant according to (a syllable method of generating multiple keystrokes entered sequentially in the order of pressing Finally, a subsequent initial consonant and consonant syllables is assigned to the case where the same key).

[0193] 对于该辅音布置方法,本发明限定了单独的选择功能键。 [0193] For this method consonant arrangement, the present invention defines a separate selection key. 选择功能键的功能允许选择除了被指定给每个键的主字符之外的非主字符。 Function selection key allows the selection of addition is assigned to each key of the main character of the non-primary characters.

[0194] 根据图17(1)的键盘布局,由于仅主字符显示在其对应的键上,所以当其对应的键被按压时输入主字符,并且当在其对应的键被按压之后键(即,选择功能键)被按压时输入非主字符。 [0194] According to FIG. 17 (1) keyboard layout, since only the main character is displayed on its corresponding key, the input of the main character when its corresponding key is pressed, and which when pressed against its corresponding bond ( i.e., selection key) non-primary input characters is pressed.

[0195] 例如,通过在按压与* I,对应的键之后按压键来输入.>同样,通过在按压与对应的键之后按压键两次来输入'1Ί' β因此,在图17(1)的键盘布局中,指定给其对应的键的主字符和非主字符如下。 [0195] For example, after the input by pressing the * I, presses the key corresponding to the key.> Similarly, after pressing the corresponding key presses key twice to enter '1Ί' β Thus, in FIG. 17 (1) keyboard layout, the keys assigned to the corresponding primary and non-primary characters following characters. 括号中的字符为依次布置的非主字符。 Characters in brackets is a non-main characters arranged in order.

Figure CN103608751AD00211

[0200] 在具有12个键的键盘移动电话的情况下,或'#,键可充当选择功能键,并且这可根据用户的方便性来确定。 [0200] In the case where the mobile telephone keypad 12 having keys or '#, may act as a key to select the function key, and this may be determined according to the convenience of the user. 在具有该辅音布置的键盘布局中,韩文的输入与键盘移动电话的第二实施例中所描述的相同,并且辅音的输入与如上文所描述的相同。 In the keyboard layouts with consonant arrangement, the second embodiment is identical to the keyboard input of the mobile phone as described in Korean, and the same consonant as hereinbefore described.

[0201][第五实施例] [0201] [Fifth Embodiment]

[0202] (5-1) [0202] (5-1)

[0203] 当根据本发明的实施例的输入单元110包括用于检测用户的触摸的装置(诸如触摸板或触摸屏)时,本发明允许通过触摸和拖拉来输入初始辅音和中间元音。 [0203] When the input unit according to an embodiment of the present invention comprise a touch device 110 (such as a touchpad or touch screen) for detecting a user, the present invention allows for an initial consonant and a vowel in the input by touching and dragging. 也就是说,能够将辅音和兀音两者同时输入作为音节。 In other words, can the two consonants and syllables as the Wu sound input simultaneously.

[0204] 作为参照图13的示例,通过按压与对应的'I'键,按压具有元音输入启用功能的'5'键以输入,并且然后按压'4'键,在现有的键盘移动电话中输入'7卜'.[0205] 通过将由使用触摸传感器的虚拟键盘形成的输入装置与这种键盘移动电话进行比较,通过触摸与'I'键对应的区域以输入4T5 ^在手指正在触摸触摸传感器(触摸屏移动电话的屏幕)的状态下将手指移动至与'5'键对应的区域以启用元音输入启用功能,在手指触摸状态下将手指移动至与'4'键对应的区域,以及从触摸传感器释放手指,经由一次运动来输入'7 P 。 [0204] By way of example with reference to FIG. 13, by pressing the corresponding 'I' key, is pressed to enable input function having a vowel '5' key to enter, and then presses the "4" key, the mobile telephone in a conventional keyboard enter 'Bu 7'. [0205] by using the input device by the touch sensor of the virtual keyboard is formed with such a mobile telephone keypad comparison by touching the key regions corresponding to 'I' to the input 4T5 ^ finger is touching the touch the state of the sensor (the touch screen of the mobile phone screen) moves the finger to the "5" key corresponding to the area to enable the vowel input enable function, a finger touch state moves the finger to the key regions corresponding to '4', and releasing the finger from the touch sensor to input '7 P via a single movement.

[0206] 在该情况下,三次触摸通过一次触摸来替代,使得输入速度显著增大。 [0206] In this case, three instead of one touch by touch, such that the input speed is significantly increased. 如果在该音节输入方法中期望输入'時',则通过首先触摸与'2'键对应的区域,再次触摸与'2'键对应的区域一次,在手指正在触摸触摸传感器(触摸屏移动电话的屏幕)的状态下将手指移动至与'5'键对应的区域以启用元音输入启用功能,在手指触摸状态下将手指移动至与'4'键对应的区域,以及从触摸传感器释放手指,来输入'cp φ 'Is' if desired enter the syllable input method, then by first touches the '2' key corresponding to the region, again touches the key regions corresponding to '2' once the finger is touching the touch sensor (the touch screen of the mobile phone screen ) in a state where the finger is moved to '5' to enable the key regions corresponding to the vowel input function is enabled, the finger moves to '4' corresponding to the key region, and releasing the finger from the touch sensor in a finger touch state to enter 'cp φ

[0207] 也就是说,能够使用滑移(stroke)方法,即,在已经实现初始辅音的选择的状态下,无需从触摸传感器释放手指来选择期望的元音。 [0207] That is, it is possible to use the slip (Stroke) method, i.e., a state has been achieved in the selection of the initial consonant, without releasing the finger from the touch sensor to select a desired vowel.

[0208] 在为简单元音的情况下,通过选择辅音,在手指触摸状态下启用元音输入启用功能,将手指移动至与简单元音对应的键区域,以及释放手指,能够输入具有'辅音+简单元音'形式的音节。 [0208] In the case of simple vowels, consonants by selecting the enabled state vowel in the finger touch input function is enabled, moving a finger to the key region corresponding to a simple vowel, and a release finger, can be input with 'consonant + simple vowel 'form syllables.

[0209] 然而,与简单元音不同的是,复合元音不能通过一次滑移来输入。 [0209] However, simple vowel is different, not diphthongs by one input to the slip. 这样的话,能够通过选择辅音,在手指触摸状态下将手指移动到与键“5”对应的区域以启用元音输入启用功能,通过从触摸传感器释放手指从而启用复合元音输入启用状态,在该状态下触摸与复合元音对应的区域,并从触摸传感器上释放手指,来输入复合元音。 In this case, it is possible by selecting a consonant, the finger is moved to the "5" key to enable the region corresponding to the vowel input function is enabled in the finger touch state, enabling complex vowel input enabled by releasing the finger from the touch sensor, the touch region in a state corresponding diphthongs, and release the finger from the touch sensor input diphthongs.

[0210] 例如,通过以下步骤来输入Op:触摸对应于与,ο 口_对应的键“6”的区域,在手指触摸状态下将手指移动到键“5”对应的区域,从触摸传感器释放手指,触摸键“6”对应的区域(此处对应于,卜υ,然后从触摸传感器释放手指。也就是说,既然除了在与中央的键“5”对应的区域释放手指之外,_'的输入与简单元音的输入具有相同的滑移轨迹,那么复合元音可以被简单地输入。该实施例仅仅表明本发明的元音配置可允许在滑移模式下可实现“辅音+元音”的同时输入。因此,即使在利用虚拟键盘进行字符输入的方法中的辅音输入没有从触摸传感器上释放手指,当前的配置也将完成辅音输入。 [0210] For example, input by the steps of Op: a touch area corresponding to the, o port _ corresponding to the key "6", in the finger touch state to move the finger to the "5" corresponds to the region of the key, is released from the touch sensor finger, a touch key "6" corresponding to the area (corresponding to herein, Bu [upsilon], and then releases the finger from the touch sensor. That is, since in addition to the release of the key with the central finger of "5" corresponding to the area, _ ' simple input vowel input trajectory having the same slip, the diphthongs can be simply input. this example shows that only a vowel of the present invention may allow for the configuration may be implemented in a shuffle mode "consonant + vowel input "simultaneously. Thus, even if the consonant input method using a virtual keyboard in the character input does not release the finger from the touch sensor, the current configuration will be completed consonant input.

[0211] (5-2) [0211] (5-2)

[0212] 图18显示了将实施例(15-1)以及实施例(4-4)联合起来得到的输入方法。 [0212] FIG. 18 shows an input method of Example (15-1) and Example (4-4) obtained together.

[0213] 如图18所示,当输入Ό|.7μψ时,第一个音节'Op通过以下步骤输入:从利用手指触摸》0.键的状态开始,将手指移动到与元音输入启用键(+)对应的区域,将手指移动到与指定给'卜•的键对应的区域,并且从触摸传感器上释放手指。 [0213] As shown in FIG 18, when the input Ό | .7μψ, the first syllable 'Op input by the steps of: using a finger touch from a "key state 0. Initially, the finger is moved to the activated key and the vowel input (+) corresponding to the area, move the finger to the region assigned to the 'Bu • corresponding to the key, and releases the finger from the touch sensor. [0214] 第二音节'7 P是通过通过以下步骤输入:从利用手指触摸,Π,键开始,将手指移动到与元音输入启用键(+)对应的区域,将手指移动到与被指定给^ |^的七,键对应的区域,并且从触摸传感器上释放手指。 [0214] The second syllable '7 P is inputted by the following steps: from a finger touch, [pi, to start, to enable the finger to move with the vowel key input (+) corresponding to the region, to move the finger with the designated a ^ | ^ seven, corresponding to the key areas, and releases the finger from the touch sensor.

[0215] 最后音节*則'是通过以下方法输入:触摸,人*键,从触摸传感器上释放手指,触摸键从而将输入的字符*人》变为'从%在手指触摸状态下将手指移动到与元音输入启用键 [0215] * the final syllable 'is input by the following method: When touched, the * key, releases the finger from the touch sensor, the touch key characters so that the person entered * "to"% will move the finger from the finger touch state to enable the vowel input key

(+)对应的区域,将手指移动到与被指定给'I,的,C.»键对应的区域,并且从触摸传感器上释放手指。 (+) Corresponding to the region, to move the finger is assigned to 'I, and C. Region »corresponding to the key, and releases the finger from the touch sensor.

[0216] 在图18中,黑暗的圆圈表示触摸-释放(以下简称,黑色圆圈表示相对于触摸屏的“触摸-释放”操作和相对于键盘的,“按压”操作),曲线表示在用手指触摸触摸传感器的状态下的移动路径,其中,所述曲线的起始点表示触摸开始点并且箭头标识触摸终止点。 [0216] In Figure 18, the dark circle indicates touch - releasing (hereinafter referred to as black circles represent relative to the touch screen "touch - release" operation, and with respect to the keyboard, "pressing" operation), the curve shows touched with a finger the moving path of the touch sensor in a state, wherein the starting point, the starting point of the curve indicates touch and touch end point identified by arrow.

[0217] (5-3) [0217] (5-3)

[0218] 图19是用于比较在键盘上另一种输入'OP的方法的图表。 [0218] FIG. 19 is a graph for comparing the another input method 'OP on the keyboard.

[0219] 在第一种方法中,如图19(1)所示,'OP通过以下步骤输入:触摸和释放ο键(①),触摸和释放元音输入启用键两次(②,③),然后触摸和释放.□•键(④)。 [0219] In the first method, FIG. 19 (1), 'OP input by the steps of: ο key touch and release (①), a touch and release of the enable input vowel key twice (②, ③) then touch and release. □ • key (④). 此处由于在键盘移动电话上触摸-释放操作与按压释放操作是相同的,因此在键盘移动电话上输入%1'的过程与图19(1)中的过程是相同的。 Here since the touch keyboard on the mobile telephone - with the pressing release operation of the release operation is the same, so the input keyboard on the mobile telephone 1% 'procedure as (1) in FIG. 19 is the same process.

[0220] 然而,由于图19(11)到图19 (IV)中具有箭头的曲线表示在触摸状态下手指在触摸传感器上的移动,因此该方法不能应用于键盘上并且仅能应用于使用触摸传感器的虚拟键盘系统中。 [0220] However, since FIG. 19 (11) 19 to (IV) curve with arrows showing movement of the finger in the touch state on the touch sensor, and therefore the method can not be applied to only be applied to the keyboard and touch virtual keyboard system sensor. 在图19(11)中,过程①用来输入fo%过程②是简单元音启用过程,同时过程③是复合元音启用过程以及τ卜%勺输入过程。 In FIG 19 (11), for inputting the process ① ② FO process is simple vowel% enabled process, while the process ③ is enabled process and diphthongs% spoon τ Bu input process. 如果过程②之后键的触摸-释放立即完成的话,则输入'0丨',.然而,由于在过程③中第一触摸点是对应于元音输入启用键的区域,因此过程③与图18(1)中的同时执行的过程③和④具有相同的效果。 If a key after the process ② - immediate complete release, then enter '0 Shu', however, since the process ③ in the region of the first touch point corresponding to the vowel key input is enabled, and thus the process ③ in FIG. 18 (. process ③ and ④ performed simultaneously 1) have the same effect. 这样的话,其达到了省略一次触摸-释放操作的效果,从而提高了输入效率。 In this case, it reaches the omitted one touch - releasing effect operation, thereby improving the efficiency of input.

[0221] 同样地,在图19(111)中的过程①与图18(1)中的过程①和②有相同的效果,并且在图19(111)中的过程②与图19(1)中的过程③和④也具有同样的效果,从而导致省略两次触摸-释放操作的效果。 [0221] Similarly, the process in FIG. 19 (111) ① in FIG. 18 process ① and ② (1) of the same effect, and the process in FIG. 19 (111) to ② in FIG. 19 (1) the process ③ and ④ also has the same effect, resulting in two touch omitted - operate release effect.

[0222][第六实施例] [0222] [Sixth Embodiment]

[0223] (6-1) [0223] (6-1)

[0224] 与辅音类似,在输入元音的情况下,也可以通过使用选择功能键将简单元音变为复合元音。 [0224] consonant Similarly, when the input of vowels, may be selected by using the function keys to the vowel becomes simple diphthongs.

[0225] 图20显示了该实施例,其中%〖'的输入与的输入具有相同的轨迹以及相同的触摸-释放操作,但最后执行选择功能键的触摸-释放从而输入哪。 [0225] FIG. 20 shows this embodiment, wherein 〖% 'input and input having the same trajectory and the same touch - a release operation, but performed last selection key touch - which released to enter.

[0226] 需要考虑的是,用户按照与辅音的选择相同的方式来输入元音,其简单地具有这样的优势,通过按照相同的轨迹以及相同的触摸一释放操作来输入但是最终执行功能选择键的触摸一释放操作来输;VOh并且提供了仅通过选择功能键的触摸一释放来更正Op的错误输入方法,即使在图19 (I)到图19(111)中的'Op被错误的输入也不更正该'Op的错误输入。 [0226] to be considered that the user selected in accordance with the same manner consonant vowel input that simply have the advantage that, in accordance with the input through the same trajectory as well as the same touch but ultimately perform a release operation function selection key touch a release operation input; VOH and provide erroneous input methods to correct Op only by touching the selection key a release, the erroneous input even in FIG. 19 (I) to FIG. (111) in 'Op 19 do not correct the 'Op erroneous input.

[0227] 此外,如图17所示,在输入图17所示的简单元音之后在对应于选择功能键的区域上执行触摸-释放以输入其相应的复合元音的方法被提供。 [0227] Further, as shown in Figure 17, after a simple vowel shown in FIG. 17 corresponding to the input performed on the touch area selection key - an input method is provided to release the corresponding compound vowels. 该方法是这样一种方法,其在输入'M或'之后在对应键的区域上执行触摸-释放以输入并且在输入'Py V丄》,或I 丁I之后,在对应键的区域上执行触摸-释放以分别输入》NK或者'買^在音节输入方法中,尽管在手指触摸状态下,如图19中的曲线所示的手指移动不能应用在键盘移动电话上,但是可通过使用键实现这样的功能,即将触摸一次元音输入启用键所输入的元音(如图17(1)中所示的元音组)变为触摸两次元音输入启用键所输入的元音(如图17 (II)中所示的元音组)。 This method is a method which performs a touch input on the 'M or' key after the corresponding area - and released to the input performed on a region corresponding key after the input of 'Py V Shang ", I D or I touch - are released to enter "NK or 'Buy ^ syllable input method, although the finger touch state, shown by curve 19 in FIG finger movement on the keyboard can not be applied in a mobile telephone, but may be achieved by using a key such features, i.e. touch one vowel input vowel key input is enabled (FIG. 17 (1) shown in vowel group) twice a vowel becomes touch input vowel key input is enabled (FIG. 17 (II) the group shown in vowel).

[0228](第七实施例) [0228] (Seventh Embodiment)

[0229] (7-1) [0229] (7-1)

[0230] 本发明的实施例(7-1)提供了这样一种方法,即通过触摸与元音输入启用键对应的区域最多三次而不是输入“简单元音+简单元音”或“复合元音+简单元音”的组合或者考虑与元音输入启用键所对应的区域已经被触摸三次,从而在同一时间内选择性地输入21个韩文元音。 Up to three [0230] Example (7-1) of the present invention provides a method that enable the touch key corresponding to the vowel input instead of the input region "simple vowel + vowel simple" or "complex-membered + vowel sounds simple combination ", or the corresponding region of the key considerations enable input vowel has been touched three times, thereby selectively inputting Hangeul vowels 21 at the same time.

[0231] 如图21(1),21 (III)和21 (III)所示,通过触摸元音输入启用键一次来选择性地输入简单元音组(8个字符卜,Ί,丄,丁,一,I,以及H,参见图21(1)),通过触摸元音输入启用键两次来选择性地输入复合元音组(7个字符I=»=I,、丌H,4I ,以及H ^参见图21(11)),通过触摸元音输入启用键三次来选择性地输入复杂元音组(6个字符丄I,-M-, -lH, Ή, Tl,以及Tll,参见图21 (I II))。 [0231] FIG. 21 (1), 21 (III) and 21 (III), the vowel input enabled by touching the key once to input selectively simple vowel groups (eight characters Bu, Ί, Shang, D , a, I, and H, see FIG. 21 (1)), enabled by touching the key twice to selectively inputting the vowel input complex vowel groups (7 characters I = »= I ,, Ji H, 4I, and H ^ see Fig. 21 (11)), enabled by touching the key three times to input selectively inputting the vowel complex vowel groups (six characters Shang I, -M-, -lH, Ή, Tl, and Tll, see FIG. 21 (I II)). 如图21 (I)所示,ΙΟ个辅音被排列在元音输入启用键的周边,与图17中的选择功能键1602不同的是,当在多次击键方法中辅音被输入并且键用于实现“移动”键的用于防止在图21的辅音排列中的辅音冲突问题的功能时,键以及元音输入启用键可以结合在一起从而减少元音输入启用键的触摸次数。 FIG. 21 (I) shown, ΙΟ consonant keys are arranged in the periphery of the vowel input enabled with the selection key 1602 in FIG. 17 is different, when a consonant is inputted in the multi-tap method and the key with when implemented in the "move" key for preventing conflict in the functional problems consonant consonant in the arrangement of Figure 21, the input vowel key and the key may be bonded together thereby enable reducing the number of touch input vowel key is enabled.

[0232] 也就是说,在不需要触摸元音输入启用键三次以输入复杂元音组的元音时,在复杂元音组中的元音可通过两次触摸,即触摸键然后触摸元音输入启用键1901来选择。 [0232] That is, without the need to enable the touch key three times to input a vowel vowel input complex vowel groups and vowel complex vowel group by two touches, i.e., touch the touch key and a vowel input enable button to select 1901. 因此,键1902对应于元音输入启用键1901的两次触摸,由此减少了键触摸的次数。 Thus, the key 1902 corresponding to the input vowel key 1901 to enable the two touches, thereby reducing the number of key touch.

[0233] 该方法可应用于键盘移动电话上,并且提供了通过两次触摸(键一次+元音输入启用键一次)来消除必须按压元音输入启用键三次所带来的不便利性的方法。 [0233] The method can be applied to mobile phone keyboard, and provides twice by touch (enabled key + vowel input key once again) to eliminate the inconvenience of the method key three times brings to press vowel input enabled .

[0234] 在图21中,由于键的功能就是防止辅音冲突的“移动”键的功能,因此,尽管位于辅音之间的键执行输入空格的移动,但在选择键之后,当元音被立刻输入时, After [0234] In FIG. 21, since the function of preventing the function key is the "move" the consonant key conflict, therefore, despite moving key performed to enter a space located between the consonants, but selection keys, when vowels are immediately input,

键执行按压元音输入启用键两次的功能而不是输入空格的移动。 Vowel input key to execute moving and pressing the function key twice to enable rather than enter a space.

[0235] 然而,尽管在使用触摸传感器的虚拟键盘输入方法中执行键的触摸-释放操作,但是复杂元音必须不显示在屏幕上,除非元音输入启用键是由于在触摸键之后辅音键可能被输入而被触摸。 [0235] However, despite the implementation of touch keys in the virtual keyboard input method using a touch sensor - releasing operation, but must not be complicated vowel displayed on the screen, unless the input vowel key is enabled due to the consonant key, possibly after touch key It is entered and touched. 如果在图21中的键执彳丁图17中选择功能键1602的功能,则键不能具有触摸两次元音输入启用键的功能。 Function keys if the key 1602 in FIG performed butoxy left foot 21 in FIG. 17 is selected, the key does not enable a touch input vowel key twice function.

[0236] 这是因为简单元音的输入以及复杂元音的输入是经过同样的过程的,因为当 [0236] This is because the input simple and complex vowels are vowels through the same process as when

键执行选择功能键的功能时,元音输入启用键必须在键的触摸-释放之后被触摸从而输入简单元音的情形可能发生,由此产生两个功能通过相同的过程来执行的矛盾。 Performing the function key selection key, a vowel key must be input to enable the touch key - is released to enter a simple touch after the vowels situation may occur, thereby generating two contradictory functions performed by the same procedure.

[0237] 图22显示了当图21中的键盘布局变为水平模式时的元音排列。 [0237] FIG. 22 shows that when the keyboard layout in FIG. 21 becomes horizontal arrangement pattern vowel. 在图21和22的键盘布局中,元音输入启用键1901以及2101的优势是提供了一种方法,该方法即:通过形成在使用触摸传感器的典型的虚拟键盘上存在的分离的菜单键并用手指触摸该菜单键,选择性地同时输入诸如句点、逗号或者问号之类符号,与在图21(1)和图21(11)所示的元音输入启用键的触摸-释放装置或触摸状态下的简单元音输入类似。 Keyboard layout in FIG. 21 and 22, the advantages of the input vowel key is enabled 1901 and 2101 is to provide a method that is: formed by a separate menu virtual keyboard on a typical use of the sensor and by the presence of the key a finger touches the menu key, such as a selective simultaneously input period, comma, question mark or the like symbols, and in a enable key 21 (a) and vowels enter (11) in FIG. 21 touch - a touch state or release means similar simple vowel Excitations.

[0238] 在键盘移动电话中,通过按压元音输入启用键并且然后在图21的情形下,按压'O', 'X ',或,古咮输入“ ? ”, “.”, “ ? ”,并且在图22的情形下,按压,Ξ W,或,.咮输入符号而不是输入相应的辅音。 [0238] In the mobile phone keypad, the key input is enabled by pressing the vowel and then in the case of FIG. 21, the pressing 'O', 'X', or, NEB old type "?", ".", "?" and in the case of FIG. 22, the pressing, Ξ W, or. NEB input symbols instead of entering the corresponding consonant.

[0239] (7-2) [0239] (7-2)

[0240] 本发明的实施例(7-2)提供了一种方法,该方法没有使用在实施例(7-1)的配置中提供的复杂元音输入方法中用在减少元音输入启用键按压次数(在使用触摸屏的虚拟键盘上触摸的次数)的方法中所使用的键,而是使用元音输入启用键。 Vowel input method using complex [0240] Example embodiments of the present invention (7-2) is provided a method which is not used in the configuration of the embodiment (7-1) is provided to reduce the input vowel key is enabled pressing the number key method (the number on the touch screen virtual keyboard touch) is used, but the use of vowel input key enabled.

[0241] 如图23(111)所示,不是执行连续地按压元音输入启用键两次以输入复合元音(在触摸屏方法中,两次触摸-释放操作)的动作,而是通过输入简单元音(①,②)并且随后再次按压兀音输入启用键(③)来输入复合兀音。 [0241] 23 (111), the vowel is not performed continuously presses the enter key twice to enable input diphthongs (in a touch screen method, two touches - release operation) operation, but simply by entering vowel (①, ②) and then again presses Wu sound input key is enabled (③) to the input composite Wu tone.

[0242]然而,当复合元音(' I=', W4 tTTf4 Mf, I',或者'=|丨')通过图23(111)所示的方法输入时,不能按照自动配置的方式来执行连续地输入形成复合元音的每一个简单元音的方法。 [0242] However, when the composite vowel | when ( 'I =', W4 tTTf4 Mf, I ', or a' = Shu ') input by the method shown in FIG. 23 (111) can not be performed in an automatic manner the configuration continuously input a simple method for each vowel diphthongs formed. 例如,想要连续地输入•和'卜'以输入时,根据图23地自动配置方式,则会输入LP丽不是1J-K For example, to continuously input • and 'Bu' is to enter, in accordance with automatic configuration of FIG. 23, it will not enter the LP Korea 1J-K

[0243] 也就是说,在图23(1)所示的键盘布局中,必须在按压元音输入启用键之后按压4[,键来输入'1%然后必须在按压元音输入启用键之后按压,□ I键来输;^卜'。 After pressing [0243] That is, as shown in FIG. 23 (1) keyboard layout must be pressed 4 [, key input "1% must then enable input vowel key is pressed after pressing the vowel keys to enable input , □ I input keys; ^ Bu '. 然而,按压元音输入启用键以输入^卜•的动作会使得输入兀音^Jj变为其对应的复合兀音,jjJ的过程而不是启动元音输入启用功能的过程,因此最后按压《 Π »键也会使得辅音》Π »本身被输入。 However, press the Enter key to enable input vowel ^ BU • action will make sound ^ Jj Wu entered into a corresponding compound Wu sound, vowel input process to enable the function of jjJ process instead of starting, so the final press "Π »consonant keys also makes" Π »itself is input.

[0244] 因此,如图23(IV)所示,优选的是在进行复杂元音输入时,如上所述,采用如下方法:使用连续地按压元音输入启用键两次然后选择被分配有对应的复杂元音的分区。 [0244] Thus, FIG. 23 (IV), it is preferable that the complex during the vowel input, as described above, using the following method: using a continuous pressing vowel key twice, and then select the enable input is assigned with a corresponding the complex partition vowels.

[0245] 7-3) [0245] 7-3)

[0246] 在输入复杂元音时,为了增强用户对复杂元音排列的直觉,即使增加了键数量也可采用按压形成复杂元音的所有简单元音的方法。 [0246] When input complex vowel, vowel complex to enhance the user's intuition arrangement, even if all the simple method of increasing the number of vowel key presses may also be employed to form complex vowels.

[0247] 例如,在输入和'丨以输入Hf的方法中,可将图23 (IV)中所示的自动配置变成图24(IV-1)中所示的配置。 [0247] For example, the input and 'Shu Hf to the input method may be automatic configuration in FIG. 23 (IV) into the configuration shown illustrated in FIG. 24 (IV-1).

[0248]也就是说,当元音输入启用键被按压两次时,从那以后,两键的按压则被用来输入与元音对应的字符。 [0248] In other words, when the input is enabled vowel key is pressed twice, since then, two key presses were used for character input and the corresponding vowel.

[0249][第八实施例][0250] (8-1) [0249] [Eighth Embodiment] [0250] (8-1)

[0251] 在第五实施例中,描述了初始辅音以及中间元音可简单地通过触摸和拖拉操作而被输入的实施例。 [0251] In the fifth embodiment, described in the initial consonant and vowel Example intermediate simply by touching and dragging operation being entered.

[0252] 尽管在第五实施例中仅仅描述了中间元音是简单元音的例子,但是复杂元音,例如,'斗,Tl, τ|, xH,一I,Ti丨,或丄I.也可以通过相同的方式输入。 [0252] Although only a vowel intermediate described in the fifth embodiment is a simple example of a vowel, vowel however complex, e.g., 'bucket, Tl, τ |, xH, a I, Ti Shu, Shang, or I. you can also be entered in the same manner.

[0253] 这将在与第五和第七实施例相关的实施例中描述。 [0253] This embodiment will be described embodiments relating to the fifth and seventh embodiments.

[0254] 应用在图23中的键区键盘布局的键按压方法也可应用到触摸屏上,并且进一步地利用拖拉操作以减少键触摸的次数的例子如图25所示。 [0254] FIG. 23 is applied in the method of pressing the key layout of the keyboard can also be applied to a keypad on a touch screen, and further use of the drag operation to reduce the number of key touch example shown in Figure 25.

[0255] 图25(11)显示了可以通过一个拖拉操作代替两次触摸来作为输入的》P方法,如同图23 (II),并且图25 (III)也显示了'TT'可通过一次拖拉操作和随后的触摸-释放操作来实现输入。 [0255] FIG. 25 (11) shows a "P method by a touch drag operation instead of two as an input, as in FIG. 23 (II), and FIG. 25 (III) also shows the 'TT' by a dragging operation and the subsequent touch - free operation for input.

[0256] 此外,图25(111-1)显示了可通过一次拖拉操作来输入所有复合元音中的每一个。 [0256] In addition, FIG. 25 (111-1) can be displayed by one input of each of the drag operation in all diphthongs. 然而,按照图24(111-1)所描述的输入过程中的错误发生的概率则高于图24(111)中的错误发生概率。 However, according to FIG. 24 (111-1) probability input process described in FIGS. 24 an error occurs an error (111) is higher than the probability of occurrence.

[0257] 其原因是由于在图25(111)中拖拉操作的结尾点是清晰的。 [0257] The reason is because the end point of the drag in FIG. 25 (111) operation is clear. 也就是说,在图25(111)中,简单元音被正确地确定,并且相应地,复杂元音也被正确地确定。 That is, (111) in FIG. 25, simple vowel is correctly determined, and accordingly, the complex vowels are correctly. 然而,尽管25(111-1)具有操作不会中断这样的优势,但是在实际的手指拖拉过程中,手指可能会与 However, although 25 (111-1) has the advantage that operation is not interrupted, but in the actual process of dragging a finger, the finger might

一起经过'"P和'。因此图2 5 (II1-1)适用于移动轨迹像触笔一样被正确地实现的情形,并且对于移动轨迹像手指那样不正确地被实现的情形不是优选的。 After together ' "P and" Therefore the case of FIG. 25 (II1-1) applies to the case of the same movement locus as the stylus is correctly implemented, and as for the movement locus is implemented incorrectly finger image is not preferable.

[0258] 最后,图25(IV)显示了复杂元音可通过一次触摸-释放操作以及随后的拖拉操作来实现输入。 [0258] Finally, FIG. 25 (IV) show a complex vowel by one touch - a release operation and subsequent drag input operation is achieved. 图25(IV)中的特性是,输入的复杂元音是由拖拉操作的起点和终点所对应的简单元音的组合来确定的。 Characteristic in FIG. 25 (IV) is a complex vowel is input by the drag operation start and end points corresponding to the simple combination of vowels determined.

[0259] (8-2) [0259] (8-2)

[0260] 图26中显示了在拖拉方法中输入,公(I),'0.(II和I1-1),以及(III)的示例,其中的元音的排列组合与图25中相同,都是通过扩展键进行排列,并且进一步地,图26(1)显示输入的过程,图26 (II)显示了输入的过程,图26 (III)则显示了输入.21|.的过程,图26(11-1)则显示了通过输入《呈•并再次执行元音输入启用键的触摸-释放操作以输入复合元音的输入I啲过程。 [0260] FIG. 26 shows the drag input method, well (I) '0. (II and I1-1), and (III) is an example, the same arrangement in combination with FIG. 25 where the vowel, through the extended key are arranged, and further, FIG. 26 (a) shows the input process, FIG. 26 (II) shows a process input, FIG. 26 (III) displays the input .21 |. process, FIG. 26 (11-1) is displayed by input "and was executed • vowel input key enabled touch again - release operation to process input I GOD complex vowels.

[0261] 将图26(11)与图26(11 — I)相比,由于图26(11)中所示的手指移动的轨迹是自然地经过对应于1卜'或,I'的区域,而不是直接地从与元音输入启用键对应的区域移动到与》丄》对应的区域,因此可能会导致输入或'匀'的输入过程的混乱。 [0261] FIG 26 (11) in FIG. 26 (11 - I) compared, since FIG. 26 (11) shown in the finger is moving naturally through the locus corresponding to 1 Bu 'or, the I' region, rather than moving directly from the area corresponding to a key input to enable the vowel "Shang" corresponding region, the input could lead to confusion or 'uniform' input process. 然而,即使图26(11 -1)中所示的手指移动轨迹在中间会经过与*卜^?丨对应的区域,也只有当手指在》丄,位置释放时,在12^被正确地输入之后兀音输入启用键才会被再次触摸,从而使得正确的输入成为可能。 However, the finger even when the movement trajectory illustrated in FIG. 26 (11-1) goes through the intermediate Bu ^ *? Shu corresponding region, when the finger is released only in the "Shang, position 12 is entered correctly ^ after Wu sound input will enable key is touched again so that the correct input is possible.

[0262] 与复合元音不同的是,复杂元音的一个优势是其拖拉操作的终点是清晰的,因此处理经过中间的点并不是一个大的问题。 [0262] The difference is that the complex vowels, an advantage is its complex vowel end of the drag operation is clear, the processing through the middle point is not a big problem. 例如,如图26(IV)所示,当被输入时,在拖拉操作中,手指不仅经过'1%也经过'I'和.卜',并且此时,由于其终点对应于'H %因此只有1_L,是能够与'H货合的元音,并且因此,发生在图23(111-1)中的错误则不会是问题。 For example, FIG. 26 (IV), when the input is in the drag operation, not only through the finger '1% has also been' I 'and. Bu', and at this time, since its end corresponding to the 'H% Thus only 1 - L, is capable of 'H bonded goods vowel, and therefore, occurs in FIG. 23 (111-1) is the error is not a problem.

[0263] 图26所示的拖拉操作的优势在于,其允许省略触摸-释放操作,因此可通过一次拖拉操作来实现所有元音的输入,而该输入方法则显示在图27和28中。 Advantage of the drag operation shown in [0263] FIG. 26 is that it allows a touch omitted - release operation, it can be implemented by a single drag operation input all of the vowel, and the input method are shown in FIGS. 27 and 28.

[0264] 图27和28的不同之处仅在于,两者的辅音和元音的排列分别是水平模式和垂直模式,同时除了方向具有90度的不同之外,两者输入简单元音、复合元音以及复杂元音的输入方法均相同。 [0264] is different from Figures 27 and 28 only in that both the consonants and the vowels are arranged in the horizontal mode and vertical mode, and in addition to having a different direction than 90 degrees, the two simple inputs vowels, compound vowel and vowel inputting method of the complex are the same.

[0265] 如上所述,根据当前的实施例输入“辅音”+ “元音”的方法提供了通过一次拖拉操作而易于输入韩文的方法,前提仅仅是用户对8个简单元音的位置熟悉且保证元音输入正确时,因为元音键确定轨迹的区域是示例性地限定的。 [0265] As described above, a method and easily enter the drag operation by one Korean The current method "consonant" + "vowel" embodiment according to the input, the position of the user is provided only 8 simple and familiar vowel ensure the correct input vowel, vowel key as determined trajectory regions are exemplarily defined.

[0266] 当用户在输入单元110上执行拖拉操作时,根据本发明的实施例,输入分析单元120可以确定I)在拖拉过程中被分配给已经被触摸的所有分区的字符已经被选定,或者2)只有被分配给比预定的区域大的被确定用于触摸的分区的字符已经被选定。 [0266] When the drag operation performed on the user input unit 110, according to an embodiment of the present invention, the analysis unit 120 may determine that the input I) is assigned to the character in the dragging process all partitions have been touched has been selected, or 2) be greater than a predetermined area is determined for a touch of the character assigned to the partition has been selected.

[0267] 此外,当在拖拉操作中被分配给已经被触摸的所有分区的字符被顺序地输入时,输入分析单元120可以确定3)只有能组成音节的字符已经被选定,4)分配到所选的第一分区的字符和被分配给手指释放操作中所选的分区的字符已经被选定并且只有能通过插入在所选的第一字符和最后选定字符之间形成音节的字符已经在被分配给中间被触摸的分区中被选定。 [0267] Further, when a character is allocated in all partitions to the drag operation has been touched is input sequentially, an input analysis unit 120 may determine 3) syllable can be composed of only characters has been selected, 4) assigned to a first partition of the selected character and character assigned to the finger release operation of the selected character has been selected and the partition can be inserted between the selected first and the last character of the selected character has been formed syllables is chosen in the intermediate partition is allocated to the touched.

[0268] 在这种情况下,所选的第一字符可表示首次选择用来输入初始辅音或中间元音的字符。 [0268] In this case, the first selected character may represent a first choice used to enter characters initial consonant or vowel intermediate. 在为中间元音的情况下,在元音输入启用键被触摸之后,作为扩展键或第一触摸字符的元音输入启用键,可被假设为所选的第一字符。 In the case where after the intermediate vowel, vowel enable input key is touched, the key is enabled as a vowel key or a first touch input extension characters may be assumed for the selected first character.

[0269] 当输入分析单元120在方法3)中确定时,为了在拖拉方法中同时输入复杂元音,则最大程度上能够防止误解的元音布局是重要的。 [0269] When the input analysis unit 120 determines in method 3), in order to simultaneously input complex vowel drag method, the maximum extent possible to prevent misunderstanding vowel layout is important.

[0270] 例如,上一个实施例中,当被输入时,可能存在以下问题:''位于》M的位置时,是否已经输入^ '或,4 '是不清楚的。 [0270] For example, in one embodiment, when input, there may be the following question: '' is in "position M, whether the input ^ 'or 4' is unclear.

[0271]为了减少这种误解,当与简单元音对应的8个元音* K.),丄,丁,一,I,H,以 [0271] In order to reduce such a misunderstanding, when simple vowel corresponding to the vowel 8 * K.), Shang, D, a, I, H, to

及Ή ,围绕元音输入启用键来排列时,UJ和'丁^J必须排列在规则四边形的角部位置,如图27和28所示,以通过一次拖拉操作来输入所有简单元音、复合元音以及复杂元音中的任意一个。 And Ή, when enable input keys arranged around the vowel, and the UJ 'D ^ J must be arranged at the corner portions of the regular quadrilateral positions, 27 and 28, to the drag operation by one input to all simple vowels, compound vowel and any vowel in a complex.

[0272] 如果将•丄•和t^H受置在角部位置,则任何复杂元音都不能通过显示在屏幕上的简单元音的组合来进行输入。 [0272] If the Shang • • receiving and t ^ H disposed in the corner positions, any complex vowel combination can not be displayed by a simple vowel on the screen for input. 这将参照图30详细描述。 This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 30. 图30 (I)显亍了将•丄•和设置在角部区域,其中即使通过邻近区域选择了或来输入,又,或平可以通过这样的轨迹来输入的元音也只能是1或'平% FIG. 30 (I) to a substantially right foot • • Shang and disposed in the corner regions, wherein the or even selected by a proximity input, and vowel flat or may be input through this trace can only be 1 or 'level%

[0273] 然而,当》丄,和设置在角部区域中时,如图30 (II)和30 (III)中所示,字符输入自动配置中的矛盾就会产生,其中通过该字符输入自动配置经由用于输入角部区域的元音的轨迹输入两个元音。 [0273] However, when the "Shang, and disposed in the corner regions in FIG. 30 (II) and 30 (III) shown in the character input conflict will produce auto-configuration, by which the automatic character input two vowels configuration input via the input trajectories for the vowel portion of the corner region.

[0274] 例如,图30(11)显示输入'I'的手指移动,其中轨迹①允许Oh区域被实际选定而不经过或*平$勺区域,由此正确地完成了的输入。 [0274] For example, FIG. 30 (11) displays the input 'I' finger movement, which allows the trajectory Oh region ① or * without going through the actual level of the selected region $ spoon, thereby completed correctly input. 然而,由于生成轨迹①的可能性基本上为0,因此实际上手指的移动轨迹是跟随轨迹②而不是轨迹①。 However, due to the possibility of generating the trajectory ① is essentially zero, so in fact is to follow the motion of the finger rather than track the trajectory ② ①. 此时,由于已经输入了不想要的'W,其实际上没有输入'r的方法,并且如果轨迹②被指定为输入'r,则输入的轨迹不能是连接<丄.到'I'的轨迹,并且必须选择其他轨迹。 At this time, since the input has undesirable 'W is, in fact, that there is no input' r method, and if the trajectory is specified as input ② 'r, then the trajectory can not be connected to input <Shang. To' track I ', and you must choose another path. 然而,尽管这违背了这样的直觉,即复杂元音输入方法必须是连接形成复杂元音的简单元音的轨迹,但这会产生难题,并且在屏幕上画这样一个违背直觉的轨迹实际上是不可能的,并且用户必须记得这样的轨迹中的每一个,或者如果用户没有记住这样的轨迹中的每一个,则将使得用户必须学习如何使用输入系统,从而带来不便。 However, despite this contrary to this intuition that complex vowel input method must be simple vowel track connected to form a complex vowel, but will have problems, and draw the trajectory of such a counter-intuitive on the screen is actually impossible, and the user must remember this trajectory each, or if the user does not remember every one of these trajectories, so that the user will have to learn how to use input system, thus inconvenience.

[0275] 这一点也体现在图30(111)中。 [0275] This is also reflected in FIG. 30 (111). 也就是说,尽管没有将元音《丄《设置在角部区域,但如图30(111)所示的轨迹①和②也不会产生任何问题。 That is, although there is no vowel "Shang" is provided in the corner regions, but in FIG. 30 (111) path shown in ① and ② causes no problems. 然而,元音会产生问题,因为用于输入'M的轨迹会覆盖用于输入复杂元音的轨迹,如图30 (III)所示的轨迹④。 However, vowels problem since input 'will cover the tracks trajectory for the M input complex vowels, 30 (III) as shown in FIG ④ track.

[0276]因此,在图30(11)或图30(111)所示的简单元音排列布局中,并且尤其是,当*丄.和'丁放有被设置在角部区域时,uj和中的至少一个将不允许出现在输入包括uj和 [0276] Accordingly, the vowels are arranged in a simple layout of FIG. 30 (11) shown in FIG. 30 or (111), and in particular, when the Shang *. And when 'D placed is provided in the corner regions, and UJ at least one will be allowed to appear in the input and includes uj

的复杂元音的轨迹上,该轨迹将Lu和'丁'与每一个简单元音连接起来从而形成相应的复杂元音。 Complex vowel on the trajectory, the trajectory of Lu and 'D' are connected to each simple vowel together to form the corresponding compound vowel.

[0277] 可选的是,可将为是复杂元音,这样可通过连接'和'I'的轨迹来输入1^。 [0277] Alternatively, the complex will be vowels, which can be connected via an input 1 'and' I '^ trajectory. 为了实现这一点,尽管'―丨也对应于形成复杂元音'纠'的第一简单元音,但'必须和《丄《和样设置在角部区域。 To achieve this, although "- Shu also corresponds to the formation of a complex vowel 'a first simple vowel, but' must be correct and" Shang "and the like is provided in the corner regions. 然而,如图30(1)所示,只有当将'设置为面对'r时,则即使没有将'设置在角部区域也不会产生问题。 However, FIG. 30 (1), only when the 'set to face' R & lt, even without the 'provided no problem occurs in the corner regions. 由于与'形成复杂元音的简单元音仅仅是'I,,因此即使除了简单元音'之外的简单元音被设置在,周边,也不会产生任何问题。 Since the 'simple vowel complex is formed only vowel' I ,, even if the addition to simple vowel 'simple vowel is provided, outside, it does not produce any problem.

[0278] 然而,与,不同,由于UJ和V必须远离元音'',此外'丁.需远离'七和Hl'而*丄嚅远离' P和'H',也就是说,由于》JU和*丁*中的每一个必须相距三个元音,因此没有一种排列方法能够这样排列,即,使》丄远离'1-VH ',和,I',同时》丁《也必须远离'卜V"!匕和'r。即,当前配置的原则是不同于'配置,》丄,和必须设置在角部区域。只有当》丄•和都设置在角部区域时,不管剩余的其他元音设置在何处,当通过拖拉操作来输入复杂元音时,拖拉操`作都不会与输入简单元音的任务轨迹相冲突。 [0278] However, with the different, and V must be kept away because UJ vowel 'addition' D. required away 'and seven on Hl' and * Shang away softly 'P and the' H ', that is to say, since the "JU * and D * in each of three vowels to be apart, so there is no method capable of such an arrangement are arranged, i.e., so that the "Shang away '1-VH', and, the I ', while" D "must be away from' Bu V "! dagger and 'R & lt. that is, the principle is different from the current configuration' configuration," Shang, and must be provided in the corner regions only when "• Shang and are disposed in the corner regions, regardless of the other remaining vowel provided where, when a complex vowel input by the drag operation, the drag operation for the `input will not conflict with the task simple vowel trajectory.

[0279]当》丄,和》丁•中的仅仅一个不可避免地被设置在角部区域时,只有不能与设置在角部的元音形成复杂元音的其他形成复杂元音的那些元音设置在邻近的左右区域以及邻近的上下区域时,也才不会产生问题。 [0279] When "Shang, and" D • in only one is inevitably disposed in the corner regions, not only those provided other vowels forming a complicated complex vowel in vowel of the vowel portion of the corner when disposed adjacent the left and right vertical region and the adjacent region, it is also no problem.

[0280] 然而,当UJ和中的仅仅一个被设置在角部区域时,与图27 (IV)和图28 (IV)中所示的输入类似复杂元音的轨迹形成在一条直线上不同,即使输入复杂元音的拖拉操作无法形成,这也并不是最基本的问题。 [0280] However, when only one of UJ and is provided in the corner regions, and FIG. 27 (IV) complex and 28 similar vowel input path shown in (IV) is formed in a straight line different, even if the input complex vowel drag operation can not be formed, which is not the basic problem. 因此,当前的配置提供了这样一种方法,即,通过沿着触摸式输入装置的虚拟键盘上的必要的元音和辅音移动手指的一次触摸输入所有元音和辅音中的任意一个。 Thus, the current configuration is provided such a method, i.e., by an arbitrary input all vowels and consonants are necessary along one touch movement of the finger vowels and consonants virtual keyboard on the touch input device.

[0281] 图29显示了如上所述的拖拉输入方法可以一一对应于第二实施例中所示的键盘按压操作,其中数字代表按压的顺序。 [0281] FIG. 29 shows a drag input method as described above may correspond to the keyboard shown in the second embodiment of the pressing operation, where the numbers represent the pressing sequence.

[0282] 也就是说,对应于图26 (I),26 (I)以及26(111)中的简单元音'空\复合元音'S»以及复杂元音的按压操作被分别显示在图29 (I)、图29 (II)和图29(111)中。 [0282] That is, corresponding to FIG. 26 (the I), the 26 (the I) and 26 (111) simple vowel "empty \ diphthongs' S» and complex vowels pressing operation is shown in FIG. 29, respectively (I), 29 (II) and 29 (111). 然而,虽然针对图26(1)和图26(11)执行了相同的键盘按压操作,但对于图26(111)可执行两个键盘按压操作,如图29(111)和图29(111-1)所示。 However, while for FIG. 26 (a) and 26 (11) performs the same operation of the keyboard is pressed, but FIG. 26 (111) may perform two operations keyboard presses, 29 (111) and 29 (111- ) shown in FIG. 图29(111-1)显示了根据图23的配置执行的方法,而图29(111)则显示了根据图24(IV-1)的配置执行的方法。 29 (111-1) shows a configuration diagram of the method 23 is performed, and FIG. 29 (111) shows a method is performed in accordance with the configuration of FIG. 24 (IV-1) of.

[0283](第九实施例)[0284] 第九实施例提供了将元音输入启用键分配到两个键的方法,由此使得元音的输入更加方便。 [0283] (Ninth Embodiment) [0284] The ninth embodiment provides a method for the vowel keys allocated to the enable input of the two keys, thereby making it easier to input the vowels.

[0285] 如图31所示,当键排列布局是按照水平方向进行时,只有一个元音输入启用键时用于输入元音的手指移动则会不方便。 [0285] As shown in FIG 31, when the key layout is arranged according to a horizontal direction, only one finger movement input vowel key will enable the vowel input inconvenient. 为了克服这个问题,通过在左侧和右侧分别设置元音输入启用键2901和2902,则可以容易地执行元音输入,并且当提供如图31所示的键排列布局时,通常来说会使用两只手(两个拇指),这样也减少了手指(拇指)的移动从而使得输入变得简单。 To overcome this problem, enable key 2901 and 2902, the vowel input can be easily performed, and when providing the key arrangement layout shown in FIG. 31, in general, be provided by the vowel input left and right, respectively, use of both hands (thumb two), which also reduces the movement of the finger (thumb) so that the input becomes simple.

[0286] 此外,由于辅音选择键2903和2904分别设置在左右两侧,因此就可以容易地选择指定给每一个键的非主要字符,并且通过位于中央的键2905可以实现多种功能。 [0286] Further, since the consonant selection keys 2903 and 2904 are respectively disposed on left and right sides, and therefore can be easily assigned to the selected non-main characters of each key, and may perform various functions 2905 through a centrally located key. 例如,可将键2905指定为“空格”或“取消”键,并且可通过在其上增加扩展功能来作为输入多个符号的菜单键。 For example, the key 2905 may be designated as "space" or "cancel" button, and by increasing the extension on which the plurality of symbols as input menu key.

[0287](第十实施例) [0287] (Tenth Embodiment)

[0288] 第十实施例涉及未将扩展键分配到特定分区的实施例,其中是否选择扩展键是根据用户的手势来确定的。 [0288] The tenth embodiment relates to an extended key is not assigned to a particular partition embodiments, wherein the extended key is selected according to whether a user's gesture determined.

[0289] 例如,当输入辅音时,如果手指从首次触摸触摸传感器的点移动预定的直线距离之后释放该手指的话,则启用元音输入启用键的功能(该直线距离与中心点为首次触摸点的圆形的半径对应,并且具有该半径的圆周之外的区域则是元音输入启用区域)。 [0289] For example, when a consonant, if the finger is moved after the predetermined linear distance from the initial touch point of the finger releasing the touch sensor, then the enable input is enabled vowel function (a straight line from the center point of the first touch point bond radius corresponding to the circular, and has a region outside the circumference of the radius is the vowel input enabled area).

[0290] 选择辅音以作为指定给虚拟键盘的键的字符,该键与手指首次触摸触摸传感器的位置对应,并且如果在该状态中手指从该键释放,可能会输入另一个辅音,并且如果在手指已经从第一次触摸位置移动了预定距离之后再释放,则启用元音输入窗口,从而准备输入元音(如果该距离太短,则元音输入窗口可能会由手指的偶然移动而启用,但是如果这个距离太远的话,则启用元音输入窗口则变得不方便,因此,该距离可以根据用户的便利性来设置)。 [0290] assigned to the selected consonant as a character of a virtual keyboard, the key corresponding to the position of the finger first touches the touch sensor, and if the key is released from the finger in this state, the other consonants may be input, and if the finger has moved from the first touch position and then release after a predetermined distance, enabling vowel input window, thereby setting up the input vowel (if the distance is too short, the vowel input window may be enabled by the accidental movement of the finger, but if the distance is too far, then the vowel input window to enable it becomes inconvenient, and therefore, the distance may be set according to user's convenience).

[0291] 参照图21的键盘布局来描述上述过程。 [0291] Referring to FIG. 21, the keyboard layout procedure described above. 如图21⑴中的辅音输入窗口所示,当'謂^仅通过一个手指输入时,如果没有当前的配置,则用户必须忍受这样的不方便,即手指触摸被指定有*魯4勺触摸传感器的区域,移动到元音输入启用键以触摸元音输入启用键并启用元音输入窗口(图21 (II)),并且返回到被指定有元音》H •的区域。 FIG 21⑴ consonant in the input window, when a '^ that when input by only one finger, if no current configuration, the user must tolerate such an inconvenience, i.e., with a finger touch is designated Lu * 4 tablespoons touch sensor region, to move the input vowel key is enabled to enable a touch input vowel key and a vowel enable input window (FIG. 21 (II)), and returns to being assigned the vowel "H • region.

[0292] 然而,利用当前的配置,用户可通过以下操作简单地输入'ft:在触摸*容'的状态中将手指移动到被指定有'H $勺区域,从触摸传感器释放手指,并且再次触摸被指定有元音 [0292] However, with the current configuration, the user can simply enter the following 'ft: * receiving the touch' has moved to the designated 'H $ spoon state region in the finger, the finger is released from the touch sensor, and again touch is assigned a vowel

的区域(然而,此时,用于元音输入启用的手指移动距离必须短于从被指定有-容,的键区域到被指定有'H ^的键区域之间的距离)。 Region (however, this time, to enable the input vowel finger movement distance is shorter than the designated with a - is the specified tolerance, there is a key region to the distance between the 'H ^ key area).

[0293] 此外,当前的配置提供了这样的优势,即在输入了被指定给触摸传感器左侧区域的辅音之后,双手都可用于输入被指定给触摸传感器右侧区域的元音,由此提供了增加输入便利性并提高效率的方法。 [0293] Further, the present arrangement provides the advantage that the input is assigned to a left area of ​​the touch sensor after a consonant, the hands can be assigned to an input area of ​​the touch sensor on the right side of the vowels, thereby providing a method of increasing input convenience and efficiency.

[0294]如果没有当前的配置,则会产生这样的不方便,即,在手指正在触摸触摸传感器的状态中,手指必须从左到右或从上到下移动。 [0294] If no current configuration, will produce such an inconvenience, i.e., the finger is touching the touch sensor state where the finger to be moved from top to bottom or left to right.

[0295] 例如,输入通过以下操作实现:利用左拇指触摸被指定有的左上区域,移动左拇指长于启用元音输入窗口的直线距离的距离,释放左拇指,并利用右拇指触摸被指定Wt H ^的触摸传感器的区域。 [0295] For example, input operation is achieved by the following: left thumb touch is designated using some upper left area, left thumb moving distance is longer than the linear distance vowel enable input window, releasing the left thumb, and is designated by the right thumb touch Wt H ^ touch sensor area. 类似的是,输入'Efl'通过以下操作实现:利用右拇指触摸'C»,移动右拇指长于元音输入启用半径的距离,释放右拇指以启用元音输入窗口,并利用左拇指触摸被指定有Hl'的区域而不用长距离的移动手指以输入移动到元音输入启用键,以及被指定有$勺区域,由此消除长距离移动一个手指而导致的不方便。 Similarly, the input 'Efl' is achieved by the following operations: by the right thumb touch 'C », right thumb moving distance longer than the radius of the enable input vowel, vowel release right thumb to enable input window, and is designated using the left thumb touch there are areas Hl 'is a long distance without moving a finger to move to the input vowel input key is enabled, and are designated with the $ spoon area, thereby eliminating long distance move a finger and cause inconvenience.

[0296] 因此,当根据当前的配置进行字符输入时,手指的移动距离被减少,并且利用双手输入,手指的移动距离被进一步地减少。 [0296] Thus, when the character input according to the current configuration, the moving distance of the finger is reduced, and input with both hands, the moving distance of the finger is further reduced.

[0297](第十一实施例) [0297] (Eleventh Embodiment)

[0298] 在如上所述的实施例中,只描述了这样的示例,其中没有字符被分配给作为扩展键的元音输入启用键并且新的字符被分配到扩展区。 [0298] In the embodiment described above, only such example is described in which no characters are assigned as vowel key input is enabled and the extended key character is allocated to the new extents.

[0299] 然而,如第十一实施例所示,也可将特定的字符分配给扩展键。 [0299] However, as shown in the eleventh embodiment can also be assigned to a specific character extended key.

[0300] 根据第十一实施例,将扩展键分配给对应于辅音》Π»的分区,其中》Π ^是在辅音输入阶段中被输入,并且在元音输入阶段中执行扩展键的功能。 [0300] The "wherein [pi» partition "Π ^ consonant is inputted in the input stage, and performs key expansion function of the vowel input stage eleventh embodiment, the extended key assigned to the corresponding consonant.

[0301] 详细地说,如图32所示,沿着围绕被指定有》的键区域移动手指的轨迹来实现元音的输入,其中元音输入方法遵照图27和28中所示的原理。 [0301] In detail, as shown in FIG. 32, to realize the input vowel key region along the trajectory of movement of the finger are designated with the surrounding "the principle shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 where the vowel input method compliant. 辅音则通过在每一个对应的键区域执行触摸-释放操作来实现输入。 Consonant is performed by touching the key corresponding to each region - free operation for input.

[0302] 然而,任何紧音和送气音(aspirates),例如和fTT,可通过输;<然后触摸“送气音,紧音”键以顺序地变为》-1-=1-1l-H1来输入。 [0302] However, any tone immediately aspirated (aspirates), and FTT e.g., transmission through; <touch "aspirated, tight sound" key to sequentially become "-1- = 1-1l-H1 to input.

[0303] 参照图32更详细的说明,输入通过以下操作实现:触摸*1»键区域,将手指移动到键区域从而启用元音键盘布局,将手指移动到》卜'键区域,并且释放手指从而同时输入.].和'卜、也就是说,当手指开始触摸辅音,经过键区域,并从希望的元音键区域释放时,对应于第一触摸键区域的辅音和最后选择的兀音(根据兀音键盘布局已经被启用的状态中手指的移动来确定复杂元音或复合元音)被输入。 [0303] A more detailed description with reference to FIG. 32, the input operation is achieved by: * Touch 1 »key region, to move the finger to the vowel key area of ​​the keyboard layout is enabled, moving the finger to the" Bu "key area, and releases the finger thereby simultaneously input.]. and 'Bu, i.e., when the finger touch start consonants, Wu sound through the key region, and when the desired area is released from the vowel key, consonant corresponding to a first region of the touch key and the final selection (determined in accordance with complex vowel or diphthong Wu tone keypad layout movement state has been activated in the finger) is input.

[0304] 然而,在输入时,当手指触摸》键区域并且从相同的位置释放时,只有被输入了,并且如果期望有元音与.α*—起输入的话,则这能通过在f□«键区域被触摸时移动手指到启用的元音键盘布局上期望的元音键区域,并且用与其他辅音输入相同的方法从期望的元音键区域释放手指,得以实现。 [0304] However, when an input, when the finger touches "area key and the same position when released from only is input, and, if desired vowel and .α * - from the input, then it can in f □ mobile «key region is touched by a finger when a desired vowel to vowel key region keyboard layout enabled, and releases the finger from the desired region of the vowel keys entered by the same method with other consonants, are achieved. 因此,当前配置的构思是虽然在触摸传感器被触摸的第一位置是键区域时,*α.被输入了,但是当手指在触摸其他辅音键区域的状态中移动到》口》键区域时,不输入字符》□•依然可以启用元音键盘布局。 Thus, the idea of ​​the current configuration is that while the first position in the touch sensor is touched is a bond area when, * α. Is input, but when the finger is moved to the "mouth" key area of ​​the touch another consonant key area state, no enter the character "□ • vowel can still enable the keyboard layout. 此外,当只有元音输入时,则 In addition, when only a vowel input,

键不能使用,因此可提供分配分离的元音键3101的方法,其中即使当元音键被触摸时,也启用兀音键以仅输入兀音。 Key can not be used, thus providing a method 3101 vowel keys allocated separation, wherein even when the vowel key is touched, the keys are also enabled to enter only Wu Wu sound.

[0305](第十二实施例) [0305] (Twelfth Embodiment)

[0306] 在第十二实施例中,其中将描述每一个键执行扩展键功能的情况。 [0306] In the twelfth embodiment, the case where each key performs the function of the extended key which will be described below.

[0307] 也就是说,在上面的实施例中,尽管只有元音输入启用键被用作扩展键,但在第十二实施例中将描述被分配有相应的辅音的每一个分区也可以执行扩展键的功能的示例。 [0307] That is, in the above embodiment, although only the input vowel key is used to enable an extended key, but in the twelfth embodiment described are assigned to each respective partition may be executed consonant example of a function key expansion.

[0308] 多个字符集被分配给分区,并且当用户选择特定分区时,分配给分区的扩展键的多个字符也被分配给属于由扩展键限定的扩展区的分区。 A plurality of characters [0308] a plurality of characters are assigned to a partition, and when the user selects a particular partition, the partition assigned to the extended key is also assigned to a partition belonging to the extended key defined extension area.

[0309] 在本实施例中,没有字符可被分配给被分配有扩展键的分区(即,该分区被排除在扩展区之外),或者可以将字符分配给被分配有扩展键的分区以及属于扩展区的其他分区(即,该分区被包含在扩展区之内)。 [0309] In the present embodiment, the characters may not be allocated to the extended key allocated partition (i.e., the partition is extended region excluded), or may be assigned to the character keys are allocated extended partition, and other partitions belonging to an expanded region (i.e., the partition is contained within the extension area).

[0310] 图33显示了字符也被分配给被分配有扩展键的分区的实施例。 [0310] FIG. 33 shows an embodiment of the character is also assigned to the keys are assigned extended partition. [0311] 图33显示了对应于每一个扩展键的紧音和送气音被分配给每一个对应的扩展区的实施例,并且《P»键也执行元音输入启用键的功能,如第十一实施例所述的。 [0311] Figure 33 shows the input vowel key is enabled functions corresponding to each extended key tone immediately aspirated embodiment are assigned to the extension area corresponding to each, and "P» key is also performed, as in the tenth one case of the embodiment.

[0312] 除了根据当前配置将元音输入与辅音输入区分之外,每一个分区的扩展区的方向可由系统设计者自行决定。 [0312] In addition to the configuration according to the current input consonant vowel input distinction addition, the direction of extension of each partition area by the system designer to decide. 也就是说,当对应于紧音或送气音的元音从其对应的简单辅音延伸出来并且被选择时,如果手指通过《O»键区域,则元音输入将产生混淆,因此优选的是根据图33所示来进行键盘布局的设置从而避免出现混淆。 That is, when the sound corresponding to or immediately aspirated vowel extending therefrom and corresponding to the selected consonant is simple, if the finger by "O» key region, the vowel input will be confusing, it is preferable that in accordance with As shown in FIG. 33 be set keyboard layout to avoid confusion.

[0313] 如图33 (VI)所示,当是I»的送气音的天和是'X*的紧音的'XT被垂直地设置时,与图33 (V)相比,选择的手指移动减少。 [0313] FIG. 33 (VI), when a I »aspirated days and is 'X * tight sound' XT, is disposed vertically, as compared with FIG. 33 (V), the selected finger to reduce movement.

[0314](第十三实施例) [0314] (Thirteenth Embodiment)

[0315] 第十三实施例具有如下特征:将辅音和扩展键功能分配给每一个分区,并且当选择扩展键时,除了已经分配给其对应的分区的辅音的紧音和送气音之外,元音也被分配给由扩展键定义的扩展区,这样,用户可以选择同时输入紧音或送气音和元音。 [0315] thirteenth embodiment has the following features: the distribution function of consonants and extended key to each partition, and when the selected extended key, in addition to the partition has been assigned to the consonant sound and its corresponding tight aspirated, vowels are allocated to the extension key definition extension area, so that the user can choose to enter the plenum tight sound or a vowel sound.

[0316] 如图34(1)所示,当触摸输入方法中的虚拟键盘能确保足够的空间以在被分配有辅音的12键区域的左右两侧分别提供一列的空闲空间时,当前的配置可应用在该虚拟键盘上。 When [0316] FIG. 34 (1), when a touch input method in a virtual keyboard to ensure enough space to the left and right sides of the key region 12 is allocated consonant provide a free space, respectively, the current configuration It can be applied on the virtual keyboard.

[0317] 这将参考图34详细描述。 [0317] This will be described in detail with reference to FIG 34. 在手指在其上触摸之前,虚拟键盘的键盘布局具有如图34(1)所示的排列,其中辅音被分配给10个键。 Before finger touch on the virtual keyboard layout has a keyboard arranged as shown in FIG. 34 (1), wherein consonants are assigned to the ten keys. 在该状态下,如果键区域被触摸,则根据本发明的第九实施例配置的元音排列显示在,~1,键周围(参见图34(11)),并且在该状态下,期望的元音的输入可通过拖拉操作来实现,如图27和图28所示,因此,可以通过一次触摸来同时输入辅音和兀音。 In this state, if the key area is touched, according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention, the vowels are arranged in the configuration of a display embodiment, to 1, the surrounding keys (see FIG. 34 (11)), and in this state, a desired vowel input may be achieved by the drag operation, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, therefore, can be input by touching a consonant sound and Wu simultaneously.

[0318] 如果期望输入'邛或WK取代,的由,=1,或》Tl,组合的音节通过将手指移动到^键区域(参见图34(111))或ΠΤ键区域(参见图34(IV))从而在触摸.键的状态下执行元音输入的拖拉操作而输入。 [0318] If the desired input 'mound or WK substituted, by, = 1, or "Tl, combined syllable by moving the finger to the ^ key region (see FIG. 34 (111)) or ΠΤ key region (see FIG. 34 ( IV)) is input so that a drag operation performed in the input vowel. a state where the key touch.

[0319] 图35显示了与》[翁U1的元音和辅音对应的排列,并且图36显示了与'人'和V的兀音和辅音对应的排列。 [0319] FIG. 35 shows the "[vowels and consonants are arranged corresponding Weng U1, and FIG. 36 shows the arrangement corresponding to the consonant sound Wu 'person' and V. 图37和图38显不了与,O呀卩'古'对应的兀音和辅音的扩展的排列。 37 and 38 and not significant, O die corresponding to the extended consonant sound Wu 'old' arranged Jie. 此处,与'I,I=, H,A,和X”不同的是,IO1并不具有将被扩展的紧音和送气音。然而,在图33所示的辅音排列中,扩展和设置元音的空间对'容,来说则是不够用的。为了补充空间,可以提供一种方法,即当将处于位于'古,键上的手指触摸状态的手指移动到扩展的*容'键3701,以一起输入元音时,将*容*指定为,O,的扩展辅音并且如图37所示设置键盘布局以一起输入兀音或将扩展的*容*键3701分配给'古*键以显不兀音的排列。 Here, the 'I, I =, H, A, and X "is different, IO1 does not have to be expanded tone immediately aspirated. However, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 33 consonant, the expansion and setting vowel space "volume, it is not enough. for supplements, may provide a method, i.e., when located in the 'old, finger touch state of the finger on the key to move to the extended volume *' key 3701, when the input vowel together, * the volume designated as *, O, extended consonant and the keyboard layout shown in FIG 37 is provided with the input tone or extended Wu * 3701 * key assigned to the content 'key Old * Wu arranged to substantially no sound.

[0320] 因此,如图34到38所示,根据每一个辅音键区域周边的元音排列,同时输入“辅音+元音”更有效地增加了本发明的优势,从而通过一次触摸来启用输入每一个辅音和元音。 [0320] Thus, as shown in FIG. 34 to 38, each of the vowel keys are arranged around the region of the consonant, while the input "consonant + vowel" effectively increases the advantages of the present invention to enable one touch input by each of consonants and vowels.

[0321](第十四实施例) [0321] (Fourteenth Embodiment)

[0322] 第十四实施例涉及紧音和送气音键。 [0322] Example embodiments relate to a fourteenth immediately aspirated key tone. 在如上所述的实施例中,通过输入辅音并且接着将输入的辅音改变为紧音和送气音来输入紧音和送气音键。 In the embodiment described above, followed by a consonant and consonant immediately changed to the sound input to the input aspirated immediately aspirated key tone. 根据本发明的实施例当需要同时输入“辅音+元音”时,这将导致连续性的降低。 According to an embodiment of the present invention, when the need to enter "consonant + vowel", which leads to a reduction continuity.

[0323] 因此,根据第十四实施例,当执行同时输入“辅音+元音”之后,紧音和送气音键被触摸时,已经输入的辅音变为紧音或送气音。 [0323] Thus, according to the fourteenth embodiment, when performing input simultaneously "consonant + vowel", when tightened aspirated tone key is touched, the consonant sounds has been entered or changed immediately aspirated.

[0324] 例如,当利用拖拉操作同时输入》和*卜*来输入7卜Z后,如果紧音和送气音键被触摸的话,则将已经被输入的音节变为9p,并且如果再次触摸紧音和送气音键的话,则 After [0324] For example, when using a drag operation while the input "and input 7 * * Bu Bu Z, if the tone immediately aspirated key is touched, it will syllable becomes 9P has been input, and if touched again tight aspirated key tone, then

,'变为WK , 'To WK

[0325] 因此,即使已经输入元音,依然能实现这样的变化过程,》[ -* E ^d ['tU — S — _ 4 U、零入4 从4 人、以及fTZ -+ ic KX Xfo [0325] Accordingly, even when the vowel has been input, it is still capable of realizing such a change process, "[- * E ^ d [ 'tU - S - _ 4 U, 4 from the zero-4, and fTZ - + ic KX Xfo

[0326] 此外,可以通过同样的方法实现从.0倒*含,的变换。 [0326] In addition, the same method can be achieved by down from 0.01 * containing conversion. 例如,如果在'OP输入之后触摸紧音和送气音键,则OP变为'却。 For example, if a 'touch tone aspirated immediately after the key input OP, OP becomes the' cooling. 进一步地,如果在喵卩输入之后触摸紧音和送气音键,则 Further, if the touch tone immediately after Meow Jie aspirated input key,

又再次变为*0p, And again becomes * 0p,

[0327] 上述配置具有如下优势:如图33至图38所示的选择辅音的紧音和送气音的操作可以省略,并且通过触摸紧音和送气音键来保持连续的操作。 [0327] the above-described configuration has the following advantages: FIG selected consonant 38 shown in FIG. 33 to be aspirated immediately tone operations may be omitted, and to maintain a continuous operation through a touch tone immediately aspirated key. 也就是说,只要用户记住了的位置,则用户不需要再考虑,=T和Tl.的位置,并且进一步地,用户也不需要再考虑•E*,1CC*,.!!.,'出',,Μ','殳•苁',和》含,的位置,由此导致字符输入变得更加简单的优 In other words, as long as the user remember the location, the user does not need to consider, = T and Tl. Location, and further, the user does not need to consider • E *, 1CC * ,. !!., ' a ',, Μ', '• Boschniakia glabra Shu ", and" containing, position, thereby resulting in a character input easier Priority

[0328] 根据本发明的实施例的输入系统不仅可应用在韩文也可应用在用于输入其他语言(例如,英文和印地文)的系统中。 [0328] According to an embodiment of the input system of the present invention can be applied not only in the Korean also be applied to other systems for the input language (e.g., English and Hindi) of.

[0329] 首先,在英文中,由于辅音通常紧挨着辅音,分离的元音输入启用键,如同韩文中的设置,可能不会带来较大的优势。 [0329] First, in English, because the consonants are usually next to the consonants, vowels separate key input is enabled, as set in the Korean, may not lead to greater advantage.

[0330] 取而代之的是,当引入单词预测输入系统时,本发明的扩展键的构思可能在字符输入中会带来很大的方便。 [0330] Instead, when the input word prediction system is introduced, extended key concepts of the present invention may bring great convenience of the character input.

[0331] 根据单词预测系统,当多个字符被分配给单个的分区时,对能根据用户所选择的分配到分区的字符的组合形成的单词进行预测并且显示给用户,如果用户选择其中的一个单词,则将该选定的单词输入。 [0331] The word prediction system, when a plurality of characters are assigned to a single partition, to partition the word combination can be selected according to a user assigned to form the character is predicted and displayed to the user, if the user selects one of them word, then the word selected input.

[0332] 也就是说,不同的是,此处实现的输入是基于单词而不是基于字符。 [0332] In other words, the difference is that to achieve here is word-based, rather than input-based characters.

[0333] 在这种情况下,用户所选择的分配到分区的字符的组合所能形成的单词的种类被分配到当用户选择扩展键时所定义的扩展区,用户可选择分区以输入用户所期望的单词,多个单词中将被输入的单词被分配给该分区。 Type [0333] In this case, the user selected a character assigned to the combination of words that can be formed in the partition is assigned to a user selection when the extended zone defined by an extended key, the user may select to enter the user partition the desired word, the word in the inputted plurality of words is assigned to the partition.

[0334] 具体的实施例将参考附图进行描述。 [0334] Specific embodiments will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings.

[0335](第十五实施例) [0335] (Fifteenth Embodiment)

[0336] 根据常见的键盘移动电话的英文键盘布局,如图39(1)所示,文本符号被指定给“I”键(或者^ QZii可被指定给“I”键,并且可通过模式转换对文本符号进行划分并将其指定给相应的键),而26个字母则被指定给“2”到“9”键。 [0336] The common English keyboard layout keyboard of the mobile phone, 39 (1), the text is assigned to the symbol "I" key (or ^ QZii may be assigned to "I" key, and the mode conversion by text symbols divided and assigned to corresponding keys), and 26 were assigned to the letter "2" to "9" key. 在当前实施例的配置中,符号和字符没有被指定给键中的一个从而允许键执行选择预测单词的扩展键功能。 In the configuration of the present embodiment, the symbols and characters are not assigned to the keys so as to allow a key to perform the selection of the extended key word prediction function.

[0337] 下面将描述将“5”键指定作为扩展键从而与韩文一样来满足用户方便性的目的的实施例。 [0337] Next will be described the "5" key specified as the extension key and so as to meet Korean embodiment user convenience purposes. 字母被指定给除了“5”键3801以外的“I”到“9”键,,其上没有指定字符给“5”键3801,与韩文中的元音输入启用键类似(可给其指定数字“5” ),因此,使得“5”键3801相当于功能键,用于选择预测的单词和用来输入符号。 In addition to letters are assigned to the "5" key 3801 other than "the I" to "9" keys,, which does not specify which character specified number keys enabled similar (to be a "5" key 3801, in the Korean vowel input "5"), therefore, the "5" key 3801 corresponds to the function key, for selecting a word and the prediction for the input symbol. 当在韩文中利用元音输入启用键输入元音时,对应于元音启用键的扩展键3801可用来选择预测单词以及以预测性的文本输入方法进行文本输入。 When enabled in Korean vowel input using the key input vowel corresponding to the vowel keys enable extended key 3801 is used to select a word and to predict the predictive text input method for text input.

[0338] 将扩展键应用于触摸类型虚拟键盘系统的实施例如图40所示。 [0338] The expanded key applied to a touch type, for example, a virtual keyboard system embodiment 40 shown in FIG. 图40显示了在触摸屏类型的输入装置中输入句子“I am a boy”的过程中输入“am”的阶段。 Figure 40 shows the process of an input sentence in a touch screen type input device of "I am a boy" entered in "am" stage. 众所周知的文本预测输入系统T9 Nuance请参考(www.t9.com)。 The well-known text predictive input system T9 Nuance refer to (www.t9.com). 在虚拟键盘3903上,在“ I”键(“ 1”,“a”,“b”以及“c”被指定到其上)和“6”键(“6”,“11”,“!11”和“0”被指定到其上)上的手指的触摸-释放用来输入“am”(在下文中,如图40到图61所示当虚拟键盘输入系统利用触摸屏和触摸面板时,黑色的圆圈表示触摸-释放操作,带有箭头的线则表示拖拉操作,其中该线的尾部表示首次触摸点而箭头的头部则表示释放点)。 On the virtual keyboard 3903, the "I" key ( "1", "a", "b" and "c" is assigned thereto), and "6" keys ( "6", "11", "! 11 "and" 0 "is assigned to the touch of the finger on their upper) - release for inputting" AM "(hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 40 to FIG. 61, when a virtual keyboard input system using the touch screen and a touch panel, a black circles represent touch - release operation, lines with arrows represent the drag operation, the tails line indicates where the first touch point and the head of the arrow indicates the release point). 这与如图25所示的标记方法相同,可预测的数字和单词的数量是5,例如“ 16”,“an”,“am”,“co”和“cm”,其均列在预测单词列表窗口3902中,并且具有最高使用频率的“an”则临时地输入到输入窗口3901中(参见图40 (II))。 This is the same numerals in the method shown in FIG. 25, the number of predictable and digital words is 5, for example, "16", "an", "am", "co" and "cm", which are listed in the predicted word list window 3902, and having a highest frequency of use "an" is temporarily inputted into the input window 3901 (see FIG. 40 (II)). 如图40所示,输入到输入窗口的单词显示具有下划线,其表示输入到输入窗口的该单词只是临时输入的单词并且单词预测状态依然在进行中。 40, inputted to the input window displayed underlined word, a word which represents the input to the word input window and input only temporary status word prediction is still in progress.

[0339] 此后,当手指触摸扩展键,在非释放状态下通过拖拉操作移动到“3”键,并且从“3”键处释放手指时,则最终输入“am”(参见图40 (III)),并且在该状态下触摸空格键以输入“space”(参见图40 (IV)) ο[0340] 如图40 (IV)所示的通过空格键输入“space”的方法可通过如图41(111)中的一个拖拉操作更简单地实现。 [0339] Thereafter, when a finger touches the extended key in the non-released state by the drag operation is moved to the "3" key, and releases the finger from the "3" key at the last input "AM" (see FIG. 40 (III) ), and the touch key in this state, the space to enter the "space" (see FIG. 40 (IV)) ο [0340] FIG. 40 (IV) shown by a space key input "space" in FIG. 41 can be obtained by a method in a (111) a drag operation more easily realized. 也就是说,尽管在图40中需要两次触摸操作来选择预测的单词(参见图40(111))并且输入“spaCe”(参见图40 (IV)),但是对应于两次触摸的工作可通过图41中的一次触摸拖拉操作来完成。 That is, although the touch operation requires two in FIG. 40 to select the word prediction (see FIG. 40 (111)) and inputs "spaCe" (see FIG. 40 (IV)), corresponding to two but may be a touch operation It is accomplished by the one-touch drag operation 41 of FIG.

[0341] 参见图42来描述扩展键的该操作原理,其中简单扩展键触摸4101允许数字“5”被输入(参见图42 (I)),并且拖拉操作4102和4103分别从图42 (II)和43 (II)所示的扩展键开始,从而允许选择预测单词而不是输入字符或数字(“5”)。 [0341] Referring to FIG 42 described the operating principle of an extended key, wherein a simple extension key Touch 4101 allows the number "5" is input (see FIG. 42 (the I)), and a drag operation 4102 and 4103, respectively, from FIG. 42 (II) and extended key shown in (II) 43 starts, to allow for selection of predicted words rather than the input character or number ( "5"). 然而,如图42(11)所示的从扩展键开始终止于其他键的拖拉操作4102完成预测单词的选择和输入,并且如图42(111)所示的再次返回扩展键的拖拉操作4103能同时实现预测单词的选择和输入以及“space”的输入。 However, as shown in FIG. 42 (11) starts from the extended key terminates the drag operation to other keys 4102 completion prediction word selection and input, and as extended key 42 is returned again to formula (111) can drag operation 4103 while achieving the predicted word selection and input and input "space" of.

[0342] 根据图42(IV)所示的拖拉操作4104,当拖拉操作从不是扩展键的键开始并通过从扩展键上释放手指来终止于扩展键时,指定给开始拖拉操作的键的符号被输入。 [0342] (IV) 4104 shown drag operation, the drag operation from the key when the start key is not an extended and expanded by releasing the finger from the key to terminate the extended key, assigned to the symbol start drag operation keys 42 according to FIG. It is input.

[0343] 因此,根据当前的配置,当扩展键被使用时,可通过“ I”到“9”键容易地实现预测单词的选择/输入、“space”的输入、以及符号的输入(如果需要的话,也可额外地使用“O”键、键和“#”键),由此提供了一个大拇指就可以容易进行操作的输入系统。 [0343] Thus, according to the current configuration, when the expansion key is used, by "I" to "9" keys to easily realize the predicted word selection / input "Space" input, and the input symbol (if necessary you may also be additionally used "O" key, and the key "#" key), thereby providing a thumb can easily operate the input system. 即,可以提供比需要双手输入的QWERTY键盘更加容易的输入方法。 That is, it provides easier than QWERTY keyboard requires two hands enter the input method.

[0344] 即,扩展键的使用并不需要手指移动到预测单词列表窗口3902来选择/输入预测单词并且允许期望的单词被很容易地选定。 [0344] That is, the extended key does not need to use the finger is moved to the predicted word list window 3902 to select / enter the word prediction and allows the desired word is selected easily. 由于扩展键的使用不需要用户从预测单词列表窗口3902中直接选择期望的单词,因此,即使预测单词列表窗口小,扩展键的使用并不受影响,并且能够解决输入窗口3901被预测单词列表窗口3902所阻挡而带来的不方便。 The user does not require the use of an extended key to select the desired word from the word prediction list window 3902, and therefore, even a small prediction word list window, and using the extended keys is not affected, and can solve the input window is predicted word list window 3901 3902 brought inconvenient to stop.

[0345] 在英文中,“ space ”在文本输入过程中是最常使用的,可将其指定给扩展键以进一步减少手指的移动。 [0345] In English, "space" in the text input process is the most commonly used, it can be extended to a specified key to further reduce the movement of the finger. 为了做到这一点,通过采用用于输入数字“5”或将数字“5”指定给扩展键之外的其他键的分离虚拟键盘模式从而实现数字“5”的输入不会存在任何问题。 To do this, by using for inputting the number "5" or the number "5" key of the designated separation other than the extended key to enabling the virtual keyboard mode number "5" is input will not be any problems.

[0346] 例如,如图59(1)或图59(11)所示的键排列显示了没有将数字“5”指定给扩展键的结构,并且在这种情况下,扩展键可执行“space”输入功能而不影响数字输入功能。 [0346] For example, FIG. 59 (a) or FIG. 59 (11) shows the key arrangement is not the number "5" is assigned to the extended key structure, and in this case, the extended key to perform the "space "input function without affecting the digital input function.

[0347] 当扩展键执行“space”输入功能时,如果在临时输入状态3904中(通过对单词设置下划线或设置单词的背景颜色来标识作为临时输入状态)显示在输入窗口中的预测单词就是要输入的单词,则触摸-释放扩展键的动作可将临时输入状态改变为确认状态(临时输入单词的下划线消失)并且同时允许“space”输入,由此通过一次触摸-释放操作来执行预测单词的选择和“space”输入。 [0347] When the expansion key performs "space" input function, if the temporary input state 3904 (by word setting the underline or set of words of the background color is identified as a temporary input state) displays the predicted word in the input window is to word input, the touch - temporary release operation of the extended key input state can be changed to acknowledgment status (temporary input word underlining disappears) while allowing "space" input, whereby by touching one - to perform word prediction release operation select and "space" input.

[0348] 当单词预测状态结束时,扩展键仅仅简单地执行“space”输入功能。 [0348] When the word prediction state, simply performs only the extended key "space" input function. 如果扩展键被设置在单词预测状态,但没有通过不伴随拖拉操作的简单触摸-释放操作来执行任何功能,则该扩展键作为手指休息区域。 If the extension is provided in the key word prediction state, but not by a simple touch is not accompanied by the drag operation - release operation to perform any function key as the extended finger rest area. 此外,当单词预测状态结束或没有开始时,如果从扩展键移动手指到另一个键并且在该另一个键处释放手指的操作被定义为对应于手指释放位置处的键的键输入功能而不是上述的预测单词选择功能,则尽管第一手指触摸键是扩展键,但是可以很容易地执行字符输入的键选择。 Further, when the end status word prediction or not started, if moving the finger from key to another key, and extended release operating finger is defined to correspond to the key at the release position of the finger in the input function key at another key instead of above the predicted word selection, although the first finger touch key is an extended key, but can easily be performed to select a character input. 进一步地,如果将“shift”功能增加到该操作上,则用来大写单词首字母的“shift”键(上档转换键)的单独动作则可以省略。 Further, if the "shift" functionality to this operation, the first letter is capitalized words to "shift" key (warp key on the file) separate operation may be omitted. 例如,如果手指触摸扩展键,在该状态下将通过拖拉操作移动“ghi ”键,并且从“ghi ”键上释放手指,则“g”、“h”和“i”的大写字母“G”、“H”和“I”显示在预测单词列表窗口中而不是“g”、“h”和“ i ”显示在预测单词列表窗口中,使得首字母大写的单词已经准备用于输入。 For example, if a finger touches the extended key, in this state, by dragging and dropping operation of the mobile "ghi" key, and releases the finger from the "ghi" key, "g", "h" and "i" capital letter "G" , "H" and "I" is displayed in the predicted word list window instead of "g", "h" and "i" in the predicted word list display window, such that the capitalized word is ready for input.

[0349] 如上所述,当前配置的核心思想是利用仅具有10个键的键盘通过一个扩展键执行多个功能从而提供比QWERTY键盘更方便的输入方法。 [0349] As described above, the core idea is to use the current configuration having only the keyboard 10 keys by more convenient than a QWERTY keyboard extended key method to provide a plurality of functions performed.

[0350] 也就是说,如图42所示,在触摸屏和触摸平板输入系统中,通过使用扩展键来将不同的功能分配给不同的操作,例如简单的触摸-释放操作和拖拉操作,可以提升字符输入的便利性和效率。 [0350] That is, as shown, the touch screen and the touch pad input system, to assign different functions to different extended key operation by using, for example, a simple touch 42-- drag operation and release operation, can enhance character input convenience and efficiency.

[0351] 在图42所示的触摸屏或触摸平板输入方法中,使用扩展键的操作是:首先,使用扩展键的简单触摸-释放操作4101 ;第二,触摸扩展键并通过拖拉操作选择其他键的操作4102;第三,触摸扩展键、通过拖拉操作选择其他键并返回扩展键的操作4103;第四,触摸不是扩展键的其他键并通过拖拉操作选择扩展键的操作4104 ;第五,触摸不是扩展键的其他键、通过拖拉操作经过扩展键、并通过拖拉操作选择其他键的操作4105。 [0351] In a touch screen or touch pad input method shown in FIG. 42, the operation of extended key is used: First, using a simple touch of the extended key - releasing operation 4101; a second, extended key touch and select another key by dragging and dropping operation operating 4102; third, extended key touch, select another key by dragging and dropping operation and returning operation of the extended key 4103; fourth operation, other than touch keys and the extended key is selected by a drag operation of the extended key 4104; fifth, touch other keys are not extended key by the drag operation has been extended keys, and other keys, the selection operation 4105 by a drag operation.

[0352] 如上所述,第一操作4101具有输入数字“5”或输入“space”的功能,并且当单词预测状态激活时,同时输入临时输入单词和“space”。 [0352] As described above, the first operation input 4101 having the number "5" or input "space" function, and when the word prediction activated state, and simultaneously input temporary input word "space".

[0353] 第二操作4102执行输入预测单词的功能,而第三操作4103则执行同时输入预测单词和输入“space”的功能。 [0353] Operation 4102 performs a second function of the input word prediction, while the third function input operation and the input predicted word "space" 4103 is executed. 第四操作4104执行输入被指定给每个键的符号的功能,而第五操作4105则执行修改符号输入的功能。 The fourth operation 4104 to perform an input function symbols are assigned to each key, and functional modifications fifth operation 4105 performs symbol input.

[0354] 图42显示了当使用扩展键在虚拟键盘上进行手指移动时所导致的键颜色变化以及指定给每一个键的字符的变化。 [0354] FIG. 42 shows the change in the character of the key color change when using an extended key on the virtual keyboard movement of the finger caused and assigned to each key.

[0355] 图42(1)显示了没有变化的虚拟键盘,其表示在扩展键被触摸前没有执行任何键的输入的状态。 [0355] FIG. 42 (a) shows a virtual keyboard does not change, indicating the state of the input is not performed before any key of an extended key is touched.

[0356] 也就是说,由于单词预测状态还没有激活,因此单词预测列表窗口未现在在输入窗口中,并且即使手指移动到扩展键周边的键,也不执行预测单词选择的操作。 [0356] That is, since the word prediction state is not active, so the word prediction window is not present in the list of the input window, and even if the finger is moved to the periphery of the extended key button, not performing the operation selected by word prediction.

[0357] 然而,如果在扩展键被触摸之前通过执行键输入来激活单词预测状态(该状态指的是预测单词列表窗口出现在输入窗口中),则如图42(11)和图42(111)所示,其可以被设置为一旦手指触摸扩展键则每一个键区域都变为黄色。 [0357] However, if the word to activate the key input is executed by the predicted state prior to an extended key is touched (the state refers to a list of predicted words appear in the input window of the window), then the FIG. 42 (11) and 42 (111 ) as shown, which may be set as soon as the finger touches the extended key regions each key to yellow. 这表示已经激活了单词预测状态,并通知用户,如果用户拖动手指至扩展键周边的键并在该状态下释放手指,则与被指定给在手指释放位置的键的数字对应的预测单词将会输入。 This has been activated the word prediction mode, and notifies the user if the user drags a finger extended key to the periphery of the key and release the finger in this state, the key is assigned to the release position of the finger corresponding to the digital word prediction will You will enter. 显示在对应键上的数字对应于预测单词列表窗口中的列表数字。 It is displayed on the corresponding key number corresponding to the predicted digital word list listing window.

[0358] 图42(IV)和图42(V)显示了每一个键上的颜色没有变化但是显示每一个键上的字符是符号,与图42(1)不同,其通知用户在扩展键被触摸之前,已经激活了符号输入状态。 [0358] FIG. 42 (IV) and 42 (V) shows the color on each key has not changed but the display characters on each key symbol, and FIG. 42 (1) differ, which notifies the user in the extended key is before touching, symbol input has been activated state. 尤其是,图42(IV)显示了只有已经被指定有“! ”(该符号表示感叹号)的“I”键显示为黄色,其表示在手指移动到扩展键之前第一触摸位置对应“I”键,并且图42 (V)显示将已经被指定有(该符号表示双引号)的“3”键显示为黄色,表示当释放手指时,双引号会被输入。 In particular, FIG. 42 (IV) shows that only has been designated the "!" (Represented by the symbol exclamation point) of "I" key is displayed in yellow, which indicates an extended key before moving to a first finger touch position "I" bonds, and FIG. 42 (V) which have been assigned a display (the double quote notation) "3" button is displayed in yellow indicating when the finger is released, the double quotes is entered.

[0359] 上文已经描述了用于操作扩展键的与手指动作相关的虚拟键盘上的变化的实施例且能变为适于操作扩展键的手指动作(图42(11〜V))的功能集。 [0359] Example embodiments have been described above on the virtual keyboard change associated with the finger for operating the operation key capable of extended operation becomes finger (FIG. 42 (11~V)) adapted to operate the extended key functional set.

[0360] 图43显示了图42所示的扩展键操作的另一个实施例,并且两者的区别在于符号输入的动作与预测单词输入的动作进行了互换。 [0360] FIG. 43 shows another embodiment 42 shown in FIG extended key operation, and the difference is that the operation of the operation input symbols and the predicted words entered interchanged. 也就是说,在图43中,通过首先触摸扩展键、经拖拉操作选择期望的键并释放手指,从而输入符号(4202),并且当单词预测状态激活时,通过首先触摸与预测单词的数字对应的键来选择预测单词、经拖拉操作将手指移动到该扩展键、并从扩展键上释放手指,从而输入预测单词(4203)。 That is, in FIG. 43, the extended key by first touching, by a drag operation to select a desired key and release the finger, so that the input symbol (4202), and when the word prediction activated state, touches the first digital word corresponding to the predicted key to select the predicted word, a drag operation by moving the finger to the key to the expansion, the expansion and the release of the finger from the key, so that the input word prediction (4203).

[0361] 也就是说,由于输入预测单词的动作结束于扩展键而不是开始于扩展键,因此,除非手指移动到扩展键,否则在虚拟键盘上没有发生变化,并且仅仅当手指移动到扩展键时,第一触摸键的颜色才变为蓝色以指示该第一触摸位置,而其他键的颜色都变为黄色,如图43 (IV)所示。 [0361] In other words, since the input word is forecast to expand key operation is completed rather than the beginning of the extended key, therefore, unless the finger is moved to the extended key, otherwise there is no change on the virtual keyboard, and only when the finger is moved to the extended key , the color of the first touch keys only to blue to indicate that the first touch position, while the other keys are changed to the color yellow, FIG. 43 (IV) shown in FIG.

[0362] 再者,在图43(IV)中的拖拉操作,当手指从第一触摸位置移动的距离大于指定距离时同样执行相同的功能,也没问题,从而不需要专门在扩展键处释放手指。 [0362] Further, the drag operation in FIG. 43 (IV) is, when the finger is greater than a specified distance from the first touch position moves the same distance perform the same function, there is no problem, so that no special extended release key at finger.

[0363] 图43 (V)显示了通过将手指返回到第一触摸键并释放手指来选择和输入临时输入单词并同时输入“space”的动作4204。 [0363] FIG. 43 (V) shown by the return to the first finger and releases the finger touch key to select and enter the temporary input simultaneously input word and "space" 4204 operation. 由于“space”在英文中的使用比其他语言中的使用实际上频繁的多,因此,图42(11)和图43(IV)中的拖拉操作都被设置为同时输入临时输入单词和“space”,并且图42(111)和图43(V)中的拖拉操作被设为仅输入临时输入单词,既然在输入单词之后输入“space”要比输入单词之后不输入“space”更加频繁地出现,因此上述设定减少了手指移动的距离。 Since the "space" in English actually used more frequently than in other languages, and therefore, the drag operation in Fig. 42 (11) and 43 (IV) are arranged to simultaneously enter the temporary input word and "space ", and FIG. 42 (111) 43 and drag operation (V) is inputted to the input word only temporary, since the input after the word" "is not input after the input word than the" space "space appears more frequently , thus reducing the set distance of movement of the finger.

[0364] 此外,当从扩展键开始并返回到扩展键的拖拉操作确实输入了没有“space”的预测单词时,则可以通过比图42(111)和图42(IV)中的两种拖拉操作更简单的方式来进行符号的输入,由于从扩展键开始并返回到扩展键的拖拉操作(参见图42 (VI)-①)在屏幕上显示了符号键盘布局(参见图42 (VI)-②)并且符号的输入可通过触摸-释放被指定有将被输入的符号的键来执行(参见图42 (VI)-③)。 [0364] Further, when the start key and returns from the extended to the extended key drag operation does not input a predicted word "space", the ratio of the two can drag FIG. 42 (111) and 42 (IV) in operation more simple way to input symbols, since the extended key from the extended key and returns to the start of the drag operation (see FIG. 42 (VI) -①) shows the symbol keyboard layout (see Fig. 42 (VI) on the screen - ② input) and by touching the symbol - is performed (see FIG. 42 (VI) -③) release specify a symbol to be input key.

[0365] 尤其是,在拖拉操作过程中(参见图42(VI)_②)符号键盘进行显示的情况要比图42(IV)中的情况好,原因在于,既然当浏览屏幕上的符号键盘布局时能实现用于符号输入的触摸-释放操作(参见图42(VI)_③),因而能够容易地选择要输入的符号。 Good case where [0365] In particular, during the drag operation (_② see FIG. 42 (VI)) than the symbol keyboard shown in FIG. 42 (IV) is because, since the symbol keyboard when browsing screen layouts when the touch can be realized for the input symbols - releasing operation (see FIG. 42 (VI) _③), it is possible to easily select a symbol to be inputted. 如果通过从图42 (VI)-③的符号输入准备状态离开来期望输入数字或其他字符的话,则用户通过在符号键盘布局上执行扩展键的触摸-释放操作来从符号输入过程中离开。 If desired leave to enter numbers or other characters by from FIG. 42 (VI) -③ symbol input ready state, then performing the user by touching the extended key on the keyboard layout symbol - free operation away from the symbol entry process. 为了做到这一点,在符号键盘布局上的扩展键执行“space”输入功能或执行从符号输入过程中离开的功能而不执行其他功能,并且这可以根据单词预测方法的配置来确定。 To do this, an extended key on the keyboard layout execution function symbol "space" or the input function performed away from the symbol entry process without performing other functions, and this may be determined according to the configuration word prediction method. [0366] 此外,可以通过将图42(VI)所示的过程应用到图43 (V)中的拖拉操作来实现简单符号的输入过程(参见图43 (VI))。 [0366] Further, by the FIG. 42 (VI) in the process shown in FIG. 43 to apply a drag operation (V), the process is simple to implement input symbol (see Fig. 43 (VI)).

[0367] 图44显示了虚拟键盘的实施例,其中除了数字之外只有字符和符号被指定到对应的键上,显示了当使用虚拟键盘时,经过扩展键的拖拉操作4301和4302执行被分配给每一个键的字符中的一个的输入功能。 [0367] FIG. 44 shows an embodiment of a virtual keyboard, wherein in addition only numeric characters and symbols are assigned to the corresponding key is displayed when using the virtual keyboard, an extended key drag operation after 4301 and 4302 are assigned execution to the input function of each key character in one. 也就是说,在手指触摸被指定有“xwyz”的“9”键的状态下,当释放手指并移动到被指定有“jkl”的“4”键时,“X,w, y和z”中的第四个字符“z”被输入,当释放手指并移动到“I”键时,则第一个字符“X”被输入,当释放手指并移动到“2”键时,则被输入,当释放手指并移动到“3”键时,则“y”被输入。 That is, the finger touch are designated under "xwyz" state "9" key, and when the finger is released to move are designated "JKL" to "4" when, "X, w, y and z" the fourth character "z" is input, when the finger is released and moved to the "I" key, the first character "X" is input, when the finger is released and moved to the "2" key, enter were when the finger is released and moved to the "3" key, the "y" is input.

[0368] 也就是说,当对应于手指最后释放位置的键分别为“ I”键、“2”键,或“3”键时,则第一,第二或第三字符分别被输入。 [0368] That is, when the finger corresponding to the final position of the release key are "I" key, the "2" key or the "3" key, the first, second or third characters are input. 当预测状态激活时,即使有多个4个字符被指定给每一个键,由于对应于最后手指释放位置的键会发生变化,因此,可以从被指定给每一个键的多个符号或字符中输入特定的字符或符号。 When activated predicted state, even if there are a plurality of four characters are assigned to each key, the key corresponding to the release position due to the last finger will change, and therefore, can give a plurality of symbols or characters of each key is specified from the enter the specific characters or symbols.

[0369] 此外,如果扩展键不执行“ space ”输入功能,则数字“ 5 ”可通过“ 5 ”键来输入,这样的话,每一个数字的输入都可以通过图43所示的拖拉操作来实现。 [0369] Further, if the extended key "space" input function is not executed, the number "5" can be input by the "5" key, this is the case, the drag operation each digital input can be illustrated by FIG. 43 is achieved .

[0370] 例如,由于被指定给“ I”键的字符有4个,S卩,除了数字“ I”之外还有“a,b和c”,被指定给每一个键的包含数字的字符中所期望的一个字符可以通过设置从“I”键开始经过扩展键并结束于“4”键的拖拉操作来输入数字的方式输入。 [0370] For example, due to being assigned to the "I" key has four characters, S Jie, in addition to a digital "I" as well as "a, b and c", numeric characters are assigned to each key comprising as a desired character can be set from the "I" key has elapsed manner and ends at the extended key "4" drag operation key input to the digital input. 通常来说,在“I”键中,以被指定给“I”键的字符“a”、“b”、“c”或“I”开始的所有单词将以预测文本输入方法进行搜索(消歧方法)。 Generally speaking, the "I" key, all words will be predictive text input methods to be assigned to the "I" key characters "a", "b", "c" or "I" begins to search (extinction manifold method). 如果键输入利用如44所示的操作来实现,则只有与“a”、“b”、“c”或“I”中的仅仅一个相关的单词会被搜索而不是搜索与所有“a”、“b”、“c”或“I”相关的单词。 If the key input is achieved by the operation as shown in FIG. 44, only with "a", "b", "c" or "I" associated with only one of the search word is not the search of all "a", "b", "c" or "I" related words.

[0371] 当不能使用预测文本输入方法时(消歧方法),例如,当输入专有名词时,则预测文本输入方法必须改变模式以允许输入组成单词的每一个字符(类似于移动手机中的多次击键方法)。 [0371] When not using the predictive text entry method (disambiguation), e.g., when inputting proper noun, the predictive text entry method must be changed to allow each character pattern consisting of a word input (similar to the mobile phone multi-tap method). 然而,如果输入设备的配置已经被设置为按照图44所示的拖拉方法输入每一个字符,则没有必要改变该虚拟键盘模式(例如,变为多次击键的方法)并且同样的虚拟键盘(键盘布局)可用于输入那些即使利用预测文本输入方法也难于输入的单词。 However, if the input device configuration has been provided for each input character is a drag method shown in FIG. 44, it is not necessary to change the mode of the virtual keyboard (e.g., into a multi-tap method) and the same virtual keyboard ( keyboard layout) can be used to enter those words even with the predictive text entry method is difficult to enter.

[0372] 图45显示了图42所示的功能使用扩展键通过触摸拖拉操作来实现的实施例。 [0372] Figure 45 shows the functions shown in FIG. 42 embodiment using the extended keys realized by a touch drag operation. 这是一个输入单词“boy”的过程,其是句子“I am a boy”中的最后一个单词。 This is an input word "boy" process, which is the last word in the sentence "I am a boy" in. 在输入“boy”时,键和“9”被连续触摸(参见图44(1),44(11)和44 (III)),然后从9个预测单词中选择“boy”,对应的列表号“III”的单词被选中并通过从扩展键开始的拖拉操作来输入该单词(参见图45(IV))。 When the input "boy", key and "9" is continuously touched (see FIG. 44 (1), 44 (11) and 44 (III)), and then select the "boy" from the 9 prediction word, the corresponding list numbers "III" is selected and the word to enter the word (see FIG. 45 (IV)) by a drag operation starting from the extended key. 在下文中,为了在图42(IV)所示的方法中输入句点C),则执行从“8”键开始并终止于扩展键的拖拉方法(参见图45 (V))。 Hereinafter, a period in order to input C in the method shown in FIG. 42 (IV)), then the implementation of the "8" key to start and terminate at the extended key drag method (see FIG. 45 (V)).

[0373] 如图45(111)所示,在输入“boy“时,预测的单词数量是9个。 [0373] FIG. 45 (111), the input "boy", the number of word prediction is nine. 为了在屏幕上列出9个预测的单词并直接从中选择一个,预测的文本列表窗口必须足够大,并且为了从该大的预测文本列表窗口4401中选择期望的单词,手指需要在虚拟键盘上移动较长的距离,更糟糕的是,如果预测单词的数量比在“boy”的情况下大的话,选择单词的区域增加,从而也带来整个输入窗口都被隐藏起来的不便。 To list the nine predicted words on the screen and choose a direct, predictable text list window must be large enough, and in order to select the desired from the large window predictive text list of 4401 words, need to move your fingers on the virtual keyboard longer distance worse, if the number of predicted words greater than in the case of "boy", then, select the word area increases, thus bringing the entire input window are hidden inconvenience.

[0374] 然而,根据图45,在预测单词列表窗口中对应于期望的预测单词的列表数量的键可使用扩展键通过拖拉操作来选择。 [0374] However, according to FIG. 45, a list of the number of key words in the prediction list of predicted words corresponding to the desired window can be selected by using the extended key drag operation. 根据该预测单词列表以及选择方法,单词预测的键输入以及预测单词的选择可以在一个手指(拇指)的关节运动范围内操作,从而容易地从预测单词中选择和输入期望的单词。 According to this selection method and a list of predicted words, the predicted word selection key input and predicted words may operate within a finger (thumb) of the articulation range, and thereby easily select a desired word from the input word prediction. 进一步,由于手指不需要触摸预测单词列表窗口的区域,即使预测单词列表窗口被尽可能地减少到能够识别的尺寸,也不会存在任何问题。 Further, since the finger does not need to touch the predicted word list window area, even if the predicted word list window is reduced to a size that can be recognized as much as possible, it will not have any problems.

[0375] 相应地,预测单词列表窗口隐藏了输入窗口的问题实际上也被解决了。 [0375] Accordingly, the predicted word list window to hide the problem input window actually been resolved. 这是由图45 (IV)所示的预测单词选择方法所带来的优势。 This is indicated by (IV) of FIG. 45 predicted word selection method brings advantages.

[0376] 进一步完善该优势的实施例显示在图46中。 [0376] This advantage is further improved embodiment shown in FIG. 46. 图46显示了这样一个实施例,其中预测单词被设置围绕在扩展键的周边以增加预测单词列表窗口4501的直观性。 Figure 46 shows an embodiment in which the predicted words are arranged around the periphery of an extended key to increase the predicted word list window 4501. intuitive. 这样的话,当将预测单词设置围绕在扩展键周边时,与图45(IV)不同,手指拖动的选择方向可以通过浏览预测单词的排列方向而不需要检查预测单词列表窗口的单词列表号码(下划线的数字)来得到。 In this case, when the predicted words in the extended key disposed around the periphery, and FIG. 45 (IV) different from the select direction can drag the finger without the need to check a list of predicted words browser window arrangement direction by a word list of words predicted numbers ( digital underlined) to get.

[0377] 进一步地,其也提供了通过改变选定的预测单词的背景颜色4502来检查选择操作是否正确执行的方法(图46 (IV))。 [0377] Further, it also provides the background color by changing the word of the selected prediction method selection 4502 to check the correct operation performed (FIG. 46 (IV)). 即使在符号输入过程中,通过在输入窗口显示符号排列布局显示窗口4503并且当手指移动到扩展键时与周边键相比改变第一手指触摸键的背景颜色4504来检查选择的键是否对应于要输入的符号的方法也被提供。 Even in the course of the input symbol by symbol and arranges the layout display window 4503 to change the extended key when moving a finger when compared to the surrounding key displayed on the input window background color of the first finger touch key 4504 to check whether the selected key corresponding to symbol input method is also provided.

[0378] 如果执行了的错误的选择,则在完成输入之前可通过图47(11)所示的方法来容易地更正该错误。 [0378] If a wrong selection is performed, then the completion may be easily correct the error by the method shown in FIG. 47 (11) prior to the input. 也就是说,如图47(11)所示,当通过拖拉操作触摸扩展键时,符号排列显示,窗口显示在输入窗口中,并且第一手指触摸键的背景颜色同时也与其他键不同地显示从而来检查期望的符号的选择是否正确执行,并且如果不是想要的键而是错误的键被选中的话,则手指移动到期望的键上并从其上释放手指。 That is, FIG. 47 (11), when the drag operation by touching the extended key, the symbol arrangement displayed, the window is displayed in the input window, and the background color of the first finger touch key is also displayed differently from the other keys to select the desired symbol to check whether correct, and if it is not desired key but the wrong key is selected, then move your finger to the desired key and release from the fingers. 然后,最后选定的键(句点”)则被输入,而不是第一触摸键(逗号“,”)被输入(参见图47(111))。因此,即使不执行输入取消过程,更正操作也可以很容易地执行,并且如果输入的符号不是期望的符号,则手指返回第一手指触摸键并释放手中(参见图47 (IV))。然后,则不会执行任何输入。 Then, the last selected key (period ") were input, instead of the first touch keys (comma", ") is input (see FIG. 47 (111)). Therefore, even if entry of the cancellation process is not performed, the operation is correct It can be easily performed, and if the input symbol is not the desired symbol, the finger returns to the first finger and releases the touch key hands (see FIG. 47 (IV)). then, it will not perform any input.

[0379] 虽然图46要求拖拉操作不仅能输入预测单词也要能输入符号,但图47则显示了通过对被指定有期望的标点符号的键的触摸-释放操作来实现输入期望的标点符号的方法。 [0379] Although FIG. 46 requires not only the drag operation can also input a predicted word input symbol, but FIG. 47 shows a pair designated by touching with the desired punctuation keys - punctuation input operation to achieve the desired release of method. 后者是在符号键盘布局显示在屏幕的这样一种状态下执行。 The latter is performed in a display screen in such a state that the symbol keyboard layout.

[0380] 图47 (III)显示了预测单词列表显示在屏幕上的与图46 (III)所示的状态相同的状态,其中已经执行了和“9”键的触摸-释放操作。 [0380] FIG. 47 (III) shows the predicted word list displayed on the screen is the same as in FIG. 46 (III) in the state shown in the state in which have been performed and "9" key touch - releasing operation. 然而,与图46(111)不同的是,“boy”+” space”输入是通过触摸图47(111)所示状态中的触摸键、将手指拖拉到“3”键并且从键“3”上释放手指(4602)来实现的,“boy”的输入是通过触摸图47 (III)所示状态中的触摸键将手指拖拉到“3”键、返回到扩展键并且从扩展键上释放手指(4603)来实现的,其中图42 (VI)的构思被应用到其中。 However, FIG. 46 (111) is different, "boy" + "space" is input by touching the touch key state in FIG formula (111) 47, dragging a finger to the "3" key and the key "3" releasing the finger (4602) to achieve, "Boy" is input in the state shown in the touch keys by touching a finger drag FIG. 47 (III) to the "3" key, and the key to return to the extended release of the finger from the extended key (4603) implemented, wherein FIG. 42 (VI) which is applied to the concept.

[0381] 返回到扩展键的拖拉操作4603使得一输入“boy “,则符号键盘布局就出现在屏幕上(参见图48 (V-1)),并且当虚拟键盘上的每一个键区域上的触摸-释放都被执行(4604),则输入被指定给每一个键上的符号而不是输入其对应的字符。 [0381] Back to the extended key drag operation 4603 so that an input "boy", the symbol keyboard layout appears on the screen (see FIG. 48 (V-1)), and when on each key region on the virtual keyboard touch - releasing are executed (4604), then the input is assigned to the symbols on each key instead of entering the corresponding character.

[0382] 本实施方式已经描述了单词预测输入方法的配置,在该单词预测输入方法中,扩展键被应用到触摸类型虚拟键盘输入方法中。 [0382] The present embodiment has described the configuration word prediction input method, the input word prediction method, the extended touch type virtual keyboard input method is applied to the key. 如图39所示,优选的是,将“5”键作为12键键盘系统中的扩展键。 As shown in FIG. 39, it is preferable that the "5" key as a key of the keyboard 12 key expansion system. 然而,如果键的数量增加或布局改变的话,也可以指定多于一个的扩展键,并且在这种情况下,优选的是,多个扩展键的位置应该是易于显示预测单词列表并且减少手指移动的位置。 However, if the number of keys to increase or layout change, it may be extended to specify more than one key, and in this case, it is preferable that the position of the plurality of extended key should be readily display a list of predicted words and reducing finger movement s position.

[0383] 如图59所示,对于不同于4*3 (4行*3列)的键盘排列布局的3*4 (3行*4列)的键盘排列(参见图59(1)),两个位于中间位置的键5501可被设置为扩展键,并且对于3*5(3行*5列)键盘排列(参见图59(11)),考虑到双手使用的方便,将两个扩展键5502则分别设置在中间位置的左右两侧。 [0383] As shown in FIG. 59, for a 3 * 4 (* 4 rows 3 columns) arranged in the keyboard layout is different from the 4 * 3 keypad arrangement (4 rows * 3 columns) (see FIG. 59 (1)), two are located in an intermediate position of the key 5501 may be extended key set, and for 3 * 5 (* 3 rows 5) keyboard arrangement (see FIG. 59 (11)), taking into account the convenience of both hands, the two extended key 5502 are respectively provided on left and right sides of the intermediate position. 扩展键的原理可应用到键盘类型单词预测方法中,如下面参照图49到51所描述的,以及图49到图51中的键盘4703表示的是实体键盘而不是虚拟键盘。 Extended key principles can be applied to the keyboard type word prediction method, as described below with reference to 49 to FIG. 51, FIG. 49 and FIG. 51 to represent a keyboard 4703 is the virtual keyboard rather than a physical keyboard.

[0384] 如图49所示,可通过按压已经被分配指定有“a”和“m”的“ I ”和“6”键、并且随后按压作为扩展键的“5”键并按压“2”键来从预测单词列表窗口4702选择预测单词“II:am”,从而输入单词“am”。 [0384] shown in Figure 49, there may have been assigned designated "a" and "m" of the "I" and "6" by pressing the key, and then pressing a "5" key is pressed and extended key "2" key word prediction list window select 4702 from the word "II: am", in order to enter the word "am". 在图49(111)中fir头表不在图45上的接触方式中的拖拉动作。 In FIG 49 (111) in the first table is not fir drag action on the contact 45 embodiment of FIG. “5”键被按压以输入“space”。 "5" key is pressed to enter "Space."

[0385] 然而,与触摸方法不同的是,在键盘的输入方法中,不能确定的是,对应于扩展键的“5”键的按压操作是输入数字“5”还是输入预测单词列表号码的操作。 [0385] However, the touch method is different, the input method keyboard can not be determined that corresponds to the extended key "5" is pressed operation key input digital operator "5" is input to the prediction word list numbers . 因此,如果只有字符而没有其他数字被指定给“5”键,则当预测单词状态被激活时,按压键“5”的操作执行输入预测单词列表号码的功能;而当预测单词状态未被激活时,则按压键“5”就执行“space”输入功能。 Therefore, if only the characters but no other numbers are assigned to the "5" key, when the predicted word state is activated, pressing the function key "5" to perform the operation input prediction word list numbers; and when the predicted word status is inactive when the key is pressed "5" on the implementation of "space" input function.

[0386] 然而,如果选择允许长时间键按压被识别为输入数字而不是输入字符的按压操作的常用方法,则除了选择预测单词以及输入“space”的功能之外,键“5”还可作为扩展键执行输入数字“5”的功能。 [0386] However, if the select key is pressed for a long time to allow common method is recognized as the pressing operation instead of the input digital input characters, in addition to the selection of a predicted word and input "space" function key "5" can be used as implementation of an extended key enter the number "5" function.

[0387] 如果图42 (IV)所示的输入符号的拖拉操作被应用于键盘上,则被指定有字符的键在首次按压之后必须按压扩展键。 [0387] FIG 42 if the drag operation input symbols shown in (IV) is applied on the keyboard, are designated with a character key must be pressed after the first extension key is pressed. 在这种情况下,由于根据被指定有字符的键的按压而激活了单词预测状态,因此不能确定的是,按压扩展键的动作是输入符号的按压操作还是选择预测单词的按压操作,因此,在键盘类型输入方法中,将应用在触摸类型方法中的对应于图42 (IV)的拖拉操作的功能不能执行。 In this case, since the characters are designated with the pressed key state and activates the word prediction, it is not determined that the pressing operation is extended key depressing operation input symbols selected predicted word or pressing operation, therefore, drag operation in the function keyboard type input method, the application method of the touch type corresponding to FIG. 42 (IV) can not be performed.

[0388] 因此,如图49到51所示,用于输入符号的单独符号选择功能键被设置(在图49到图51中,“ # ”键被指定为符号选择功能键),以便在按压被指定有字符的键之后再按压扩展键的操作仅仅执行预测单词选择功能。 [0388] Thus, as shown in Figure 49 to 51, for the individual symbols of the input symbol selection key is provided (in FIG. 49 to FIG. 51, the "#" key is specified as a symbol selection key), so that the pressing after being assigned a character key and then press the key expansion operation is performed only word prediction selection function. 相应地,在按压符号选择功能键之后再按压被指定有符号的键时则实现符号的输入。 Is achieved when the input symbol respectively, after pressing the function key is pressed again to select the symbol are designated with the symbol key.

[0389] 当单词预测状态被激活时,即使利用扩展键来输入“space”,符号输入方法也未产生任何问题,图49(IV)中按压扩展键来输入“space”反映了这一点。 [0389] When the word prediction operation is activated even by extended key input "space", symbol input method is not any problem, in FIG. 49 (IV) pressing the extension key to enter "space" reflects this.

[0390] 当单词预测状态被激活时,图49中将被指定给“O”键的“space”输入功能(当键盘被两手操作时,“space”输入功能则可被指定给键或“#,,键,作为替代,分配该替代键的功能被指定给“O”键)同时执行临时输入单词以及“space”的输入的确认,相比用于输入临时输入单词的扩展键的使用,这可以减少按压的次数并且提高效率。 [0390] When the word prediction is activated state, FIG. 49 will be assigned to the "O" "space" function key is input (when the keyboard is operated with both hands, "Space" can be assigned to the input function key or "# ,, bond, is designated as an alternative, the function key assigned to the alternate "O" key) while performing confirmation input word and an input of a temporary "space" as compared to the input of the input word using the temporary key expansion, which you can reduce the number of compressions and improve efficiency.

[0391] 图50显示了利用上述设定输入句子“I am a boy”中的最后的单词“boy”和”的过程。单词“boy”通过顺序地按压“ I ”、“6”和“9”键以显示对应于“boy”的预测单词列表(参见图50(111))并顺序按压对应于扩展键的“5”键以及对应于预测单词列表号码“II”的“2”键来选择“boy”。 [0391] FIG. 50 shows the final word set using the input sentence "I am a boy" in the "boy", "process. The word" and boy "by sequentially pressing" I "," 6 "and" 9 "button to display the corresponding" boy "predicted word list (see FIG. 50 (111)) and sequentially presses corresponding to the extension key" 5 "key and the word list of numbers corresponding to the predicted" II "in the" 2 "key to select "boy".

[0392] 在下文中,“boy.”的输入通过顺序的按压符号功能键以及“8”键以输入”来完成。与图49(111)类似,图50(IV)中的虚线箭头是参考标记以表示其对应于触摸方法中的拖拉操作。[0393] 图51与图50除了键盘排列不同之外,其他都相同,在图51中键盘的排列显示了预测单词列表在设置围绕在扩展键的周边而不是垂直设置的模式。由于键盘移动电话的屏幕尺寸不大,因此相比于其他移动电话,从预测单词列表窗口中选择单词会更加困难,并且相比于图50的号码顺序排列格式,图51的直观排列格式使得用户能更加容易地选择期望的单词。 [0392] In the following, "Boy." Input to input "done by sequentially pressing sign function keys and" 8 "key. Similar to FIG. 49 (111), a broken line arrow in FIG. 50 (IV) is reference numerals to indicate that it corresponds to a touch drag operation process. [0393] FIG. 51 and FIG. 50 except for the keyboard arrangement, others are the same, show the predicted words in the keyboard arrangement of FIG 51 is provided around the extended list of keys pattern of peripheral rather than vertically disposed. Since the small screen size of a mobile phone keypad, as compared to other mobile phones, will be more difficult to select the word from the word prediction list window, and the sequence number 50 as compared to FIG arrangement format, FIG 51 is arranged intuitive format so that the user can more easily select a desired word.

[0394] 当前的配置提供了一种通过将扩展键(预测单词选择功能键)分配在能够减少用户手指移动的位置并将预测单词设置在该扩展键周边从而增加单词预测效率的方法。 [0394] The current configuration is provided an extended key by the (predicted word selection key) can be assigned in a method of reducing the user's finger location and movement of the predicted word disposed outside the extended key words to increase prediction efficiency. 因此,根据将单词数据库中的预测单词的列表设置在扩展键周边并且输入直观地从预测单词列表中选择的预测单词的原理,当前的配置也可以应用在使用预测单词输入方法的并非英语的语目中。 Thus, according to the list set predictive word the word database in principle extended key peripheral and input prediction word intuitively selected from the predicted word list, the current configuration can also be applied in language use predictive word input method is not English heads.

[0395] 图51(VI)显示了在图42(VI)所示的触摸屏方法中同时地选择预测单词和自动地启用符号键盘布局的配置的实施例。 [0395] FIG. 51 (VI) shown in FIG. 42 (VI) the method shown in the touch screen simultaneously selected and activated automatically predicted word symbol keyboard layout arranged embodiment.

[0396] 在图42(VI)所示的过程中的扩展键的“space”输入方法与图42(1)到图42(V)所示的利用扩展键进行“space”输入的方法不同,这种不同同样也存在于图51 (V)和图51 (I)到图51(V)之间。 Different methods [0396] for "space" to the input 42 (V) shown in FIG. 42 using the extended keys (Vl) extended key process shown in "space" input in FIG. 42 (1), this difference is also present in FIG. 51 (V) and between 51 (I) to FIG. 51 (V). 也就是说,参考图42 (VI)所述,手指从被指定有预测单词的键区域释放的拖拉操作4102也执行“space”输入功能,并且手指返回扩展键并从扩展键释放的拖拉操作4103仅允许预测单词被输入。 That is, referring to FIG. 42 (VI) of the finger is released from the designated key word predictive region 4102 also performs the drag operation "space" input function, and the finger return to an extended key from the extended key and release the drag operation 4103 allowing only predict words are entered.

[0397] 也就是说,在将图42(1)到图42 (V)的配置分别应用到键盘方法的图51(1)到图51 (V)中,通过按压扩展键(“5”键)并且按压对应于预测单词号码的“3”键来选择预测单词从而实现预测单词“boy”的输入。 [0397] That is, in the FIG. 42 (a) to 42 (V) are applied to the configuration of the keyboard process of FIG. 51 (a) to 51 (V), the extended key by pressing ( "5" key ) corresponding to the predicted word and pressing the number "3" key to select the input to achieve predicted words "boy" in the predicted word.

[0398] 然而,在将图42(VI)的配置应用到键盘方法的图51 (VI)中,通过按压扩展键(“5”键),然后按压对应的预测单词号码“3”键(参见图51(VI)_①)来实现预测单词和“space”的同时输入,并且如果在该状态下再次按压扩展键(参见图51 (VI)-②),则取消输入的“ space ”,并实质上因此导致仅输入了预测的单词。 [0398] However, in the FIG. 42 (VI) configuration is applied to a keyboard process of FIG. 51 (VI), by pressing the extension key ( "5" key), then presses the corresponding predicted word number "3" key (see FIG. 51 (VI) _①) achieved and predicted word "space", while the input and an extended key is pressed (see FIG. 51 (VI) -②) again in this state, the input is canceled "space", and substantive thus resulting in only the input of the word prediction.

[0399] 通过这样操作,产生与在应用到图42(VI)的触摸屏方法上的配置的过程和结果相同的过程和结果。 [0399] By doing so, generating process on the touch screen configured to apply the method of FIG. 42 (VI) and the same procedure and Results. 这样的话,在单词预测状态被激活的状态下,在扩展键(“5”键)被按压之后,当对应于预测单词号码的“3”键被按压时,则预测单词“boy”和“space”被同时输入,并且在该状态下,当作为符号选择功能键的扩展键被按下时,“backspace”键的功能以及启用在屏幕上显示符号键盘布局的功能(参见图51 (VI)-③)也被同时执行。 In this case, in a word prediction state is activated, the extended key ( "5" key) is then pressed, when the "3" key is pressed, the predicted words "boy" and "space corresponding to the predicted word number "are simultaneously input, and in this state, when a function key expansion symbol selection key is pressed," Backspace "function keys and enabling the symbol display keyboard layout on the screen (see Fig. 51 (VI) - ③) is also executed simultaneously. 因此,已经通过图51(VI)_①的按压动作输入的“space”(对应于图42 (VI)的拖拉操作并被标记为虚线)被取消,并且输入光标立刻被设置在预测单词“boy”之后,并导致变成符号输入状态(尽管对于图51(VI)_①和图49 (VI)-②的过程,图42 (VI)所示的触摸屏方法中的拖拉过程并没有显示屏幕上,但实际上已经内在地执行了相同的过程)。 Thus, it has been entered by pressing the operation of FIG. 51 (VI) _① a "space" (corresponding to FIG. 42 (VI) is a drag operation and marked as a broken line) is canceled, and the input cursor is disposed immediately predicted words "boy" Thereafter, the symbol input into and resulting in a state (although for the FIG. 51 (VI) _① and 49 (VI) -② process, the process shown in drag (VI) in FIG. 42 is a touch screen and a method is not a display screen, but actually inherently perform the same process). 在这种状态下,当被分配了符号“.”(句点)的“8”键被按下时(参见图51(VI)_④),即完成符号输入(参见图51(VI)_ ⑤)。 In this state, when the symbol is assigned a "." (Dot) "8" key is pressed (see FIG. 51 (VI) _④), i.e. completed input symbol (see Fig. 51 (VI) _ ⑤) .

[0400] 如果预测单词的选择和“space”的输入同时实现,则通常来说,“space”并不需要通过按压扩展键来输入,因此在应用到图51 (VI)的配置中时不会产生大问题。 [0400] If the predicted word selected and "space" while achieving an input, the general, "space" does not need to be input by pressing the extension key, and therefore not when applied to FIG. 51 (VI) configuration have a big problem. 这样的话,当“space”输入频繁发生时,图42 (VI)的配置比图42(1)到图42 (V)的配置更加有效,在图42 (VI)的配置中,从扩展键开始并终止于被指定有预测单词列表号码的键区域的拖拉操作使得预测单词和“space”能同时输入,因此将图42 (VI)的配置应用到键盘方法中的图51 (VI)的配置比图42⑴到图42 (V)的配置更有效。 In this case, when the "space" input occurs frequently, FIG. 42 (Vl) is arranged to FIG. 42 (V) is disposed more effective than in FIG. 42 (1), in the configuration of FIG. 42 (Vl) in from the extended key start and terminates in are designated with the drag operation key region predicted word list numbers so that the predicted word and "space" can be input simultaneously, the FIG. 42 (VI) configuration is applied to the keyboard method of FIG. 51 (VI) is disposed than 42⑴ to FIG. 42 (V) more efficient arrangement of FIG.

[0401] 进一步地,当单词预测状态激活时,如果临时输入单词的输入以及“space”的输入可通过连续地按压扩展键两次来实现的话,那么则不需要使用单独的“space”键(“O”键),因此可提供将手指在“ I ”到“9”之间移动的方法。 [0401] Further, when the word prediction activation state, if the input and the temporary input word "space" in the input can be accomplished by continuously pressing the key twice extended, then no need to use a separate "space" key ( "O" key), and thus may provide a finger "I" to a mobile between "9".

[0402](第十六实施例) [0402] (Sixteenth Embodiment)

[0403] 第十六实施例将元音输入启用键的构思应用到单词预测输入系统中并且通过在用户直接触摸的虚拟键盘上显示预测单词列表来提供使预测单词列表更加容易地被识别的方法,如参考第十五实施例中的触摸屏所描述的。 [0403] The sixteenth embodiment is enabled vowel input key concept is applied to the input word prediction system and by displaying a list of predicted words in the user directly touching the virtual keyboard to provide a method of making a list of predicted words to be recognized more easily as the fifteenth embodiment with reference to the embodiments described touchscreen.

[0404] 通常来说,在单词预测输入方法的使用过程中的不方便性在于在来回浏览键盘(键区)和输入窗口的同时必须检查预测单词以及键输入所导致的烦恼。 [0404] In general, inconvenience in use word prediction input method is that the predicted word must be checked and a key input trouble resulting in the cycle through the keyboard (keypad) and an input window at the same time. 然而,如图53所示,如果预测单词列表显示在手指直接触摸的虚拟键盘的键上(如同触摸屏幕方法)的话,则实现了单词输入的输入窗和虚拟键盘不需要通过来回浏览来检查预测单词列表。 However, as shown in Figure 53, if the predicted word list displayed directly on the finger touches the virtual keyboard keys (like the touch screen method), then implements a virtual keyboard input window and enter the word does not need to check the forecast by browsing back and forth word list. 图52显示了将该配置应用于图51的过程相同的过程。 Figure 52 shows the same configuration applied to the process of FIG. 51 process.

[0405] 图53和图54显示了根据当前的配置在预测输入方法中的输入实施例。 [0405] FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 shows the input prediction input method embodiment in accordance with the current configuration. 也就是说,图53和图54显示了输入英文单词“coordination”的过程。 In other words, Figure 53 and Figure 54 shows the process input English word "coordination" of. 图53(1)显示了对“I”键执行触摸-释放以输入“coordination”中的第一个字母“c”的过程。 FIG 53 (a) shows the implementation of touch "I" key - is released in the first letter of "coordination" in the "c" process. 预测单词列表5101的内容显示在输入窗口和虚拟键盘上。 Content predicted word list 5101 is displayed on the input window and a virtual keyboard. 在预测单词列表窗口和虚拟键盘中标记为红色的键区域与扩展键具有一一对应关系。 Mark in predicting word list window and the virtual keyboard in red key areas and key extensions have one relationship. 在虚拟键盘上显示的预测单词被标记为红色从而与指定给对应键的蓝色字符区分出来。 It predicted words displayed on the virtual keyboard is colored red so as to distinguish the blue characters assigned to the corresponding key. 这就允许用户进行关联,扩展键必须被触摸或者经过扩展键的拖拉操作必须执行以输入预测单词中的任意一个,并且能以不同的方式来表示这一点。 This allows the user to associate the key must be extended through the extended key touch or drag operation must be performed to arbitrary input of a predicted word, and can be expressed in different ways it.

[0406] 在预测单词列表中,单词可按照字母表顺序或者按照使用频率来排列。 [0406] In the list of predicted words, or words can be arranged in alphabetical order according to frequency of use. 然而,如果可能的话,优选的是将临时输入单词放置在使手指易于到达预测单词列表窗口中的多个位置的位置。 However, if possible, it is preferable that the temporary input word is placed in the finger a plurality of readily accessible position prediction word list window position. 举例来说,不选择扩展键的对角线方向的位置(如“1”,“3”,“7”或“9”键),位于扩展键的上、下、左或右方向的位置(例如“2”,“4”,“6”或“8”键)对手指来说更易于从扩展键移动,因此,优选的是将临时输入单词设置在后者位置中的一个位置。 For example, the extended selection position is not a diagonal direction keys (e.g., "1", "3", "7" or "9" key), the key in the extended position, down, left or right direction ( for example, "2", "4", "6" or "8" key) of the finger is easier to move from the extended key, therefore, it is preferable that a temporary location in the input word is provided in the latter position. 在图53中,临时输入单词则设置在“2”键所在的位置。 In FIG 53, the provisional input word is set at a position where the key of "2."

[0407] 尽管被指定给键的数字并没有显示在图53中的虚拟键盘上,但它们是在假设用户非常清楚这些数字设置的位置的情况下被省略的。 [0407] Although the key number assigned to the virtual keyboard is not displayed in FIG. 53, but they are assumed to be omitted in the case where the user acutely aware of these numbers in the set position. 如果必要的话,数字可显示在如图51所示的虚拟键盘上。 If necessary, the number may be displayed on the virtual keyboard 51 shown in FIG.

[0408] 从虚拟键盘的每一个键上省略数字的原因是在虚拟键盘的键上显示被指定给每个键的所有的预测单词、数字以及字符会使得预测单词的识别变得非常困难。 [0408] From each key on the virtual keyboard will be omitted because the digital display of a virtual keyboard on all predicted words, numbers and characters are assigned to each of the keys makes the identifying word prediction very difficult. 因此,为了方便就不显示数字。 Accordingly, in order to facilitate not display numbers.

[0409] 设置图53的虚拟键盘使得扩展键也执行输入“space”的功能。 [0409] FIG. 53 is arranged such that a virtual keyboard also performs the extended key input "space" function. 在这种情况下,在输入窗口中的临时输入单词也显示在虚拟键盘的扩展键上,并且当执行扩展键的触摸-释放操作来输入“space”和临时输入单词(在图51的输入窗口中标下划线的单词)时,可以再次检查输入单词,从而防止输入错误。 In this case, the temporary input word in the input window is also displayed on the virtual keyboard of the extended key, and extended key is performed when the touch - free operation input "space" and the temporary input word (input window 51 of FIG. when winning the underlined word), you can check the input word again, so as to prevent input errors. 由于在预测单词列表窗口中临时输入单词被显示为标下划线的单词,因此尽管临时输入单词没有显示在扩展键上也不会产生任何问题。 Since the predicted word list window temporarily enter the word is displayed as underlined by the word, so even though temporarily enter the word does not appear it will not cause any problems on the extension key.

[0410] 图53 (V)显示了这样一种情况:在即使两个预测单词很长该两个预测单词也被显示在相邻的键上时,两个预测输入单词(此处,预测单词是从完整的预测单词中所提取的头部字符,提取是通过这样的方式,即预测单词的头部的字符数量与到目前为止输入预测单词时的键按压数量相同)被设置在扩展键的上方和下方以防止两个预测单词的重叠问题,如图51(1)到图51 (V)所示。 [0410] FIG. 53 (V) shows such a case: is also displayed on adjacent key, two predicted input word (here, even if the two predicted words in the predicted word is two words long predicted It is extracted from the full word predicted head character is extracted in such a way that the same prediction) the number of keys is pressed at the head of the number of characters of words and word prediction input so far is disposed in the extended bond above and below to prevent the overlap of the two predicted words, FIG. 51 (a) to FIG. 51 (V) shown in FIG.

[0411] 最后,当要输入的单词“coordination”的前7个字符已经被输入时(参见图54(11)),预测单词具有相同的头部且只有一个头部会保留。 [0411] Finally, a word to be entered when "coordination" of the first seven characters have been entered (see FIG. 54 (11)), the predicted word with the same head and only one head will be retained. 因此预测单词仅是跟在“coordin”之后的后缀部分不同,并且因此,预测单词与这些后缀的变形例被显示在对应的键区域。 Thus prediction only follows the word "coordin" suffix partially different, and therefore, the modification of predicted words these suffixes are displayed in the corresponding key region. 因此,显示后缀的变形例而不覆盖分配到邻近键上的其他单词,对预测单词来说是有帮助的。 Thus, modification of the display without covering the suffix assigned to other keys on adjacent words, word prediction is helpful. 当仅显示后缀部分时,搜索预测单词列表比显示整个单词时搜索整个列表要更加方便。 When the display is only part of the suffix search list of predicted words than searching the entire list to display the entire word to be more convenient.

[0412] 例如,如图54(11)所示,后缀变形例的列表,例如,_al,-al,-ate,-ates,-ation,以及-ating可以被显示,并且当后缀变形例中的一个被选择时(参见图54(111)),与“coordin”结合之后的单词则作为预测单词显示并且选定的后缀变形例被输入。 [0412] For example, FIG. 54 (11), a list of suffixes modification, e.g., _al, -al, -ate, -ates, -ation, and -ating may be displayed, and when a modified embodiment of the suffix when one is selected (see FIG. 54 (111)), and "coordin" after the word combination is displayed and the selected word as a predicted modification suffix is ​​inputted.

[0413] 在图54中,被分配有预测单词的键5201是蓝色背景。 [0413] In FIG 54, the predicted words is assigned key 5201 is a blue background. 这表明预测单词共享通用的头部字符并且预测单词可与紧跟在通用头部之后的后缀变形例一起显示。 This indicates that share a common word prediction and the prediction of the head character words may be displayed along with Example deformed immediately after the common header extension.

[0414] 相应地,当被分配有预测单词的键的背景颜色变为蓝色时,这会引导用户仅从预测单词列表搜索后缀部分以选择能够增加到预测单词上的后缀变形例而不是进行键输入。 [0414] Accordingly, when the predicted word is assigned the background color to blue key, which would lead the user only predicted search word suffixes can be added to the suffix portion to select the predicted word modification rather than The key input.

[0415] 例如,如图54所示,如果预测单词具有蓝色背景,这表明预测单词仅列出了后缀变形例,头部显示在扩展键上。 [0415] For example, as shown, if the predicted word has a blue background, indicating that only 54 predicted word lists suffix modification, the head is displayed on the extended key. 因此,“cooridination”的输入这样实现:用手指按压扩展键,通过拖拉操作将手指移动到被指定有后缀部分“-ation”的键上,并且释放手指。 Thus, "cooridination" Input achieved: extended key is pressed with a finger, a drag operation by moving the finger to the portion designated by the suffix "-ation" key, and releases the finger.

[0416] 也就是,在“coordin”被作为预测单词的临时输入的情况下,一个接一个地输入剩下的后缀部分“ation”所需的五次触摸可以减少。 [0416] That is, in the case of "coordin" is input as the provisional predicted words, one after another to enter the remaining part of the suffix "ation" five touch required can be reduced.

[0417] 然而,“coordination”的输入可通过按压“coordination”的每一个字母并执行扩展键的触摸-释放来完成输入而不是在图54(11)所示的状态中执行后缀变换的搜索。 Touch [0417] However, "coordination" is input by pressing each letter "coordination" of the extended key and performs - release is accomplished in the input instead of the state shown in FIG. 54 (11) searches performed suffix transformation. 这样的话,当后缀变换显示为预测单词时,其具有如下优势,可以防止当整个单词显示在对应的键上时指定给邻近键的预测单词彼此覆盖的情况。 In this case, when the display is converted suffix predicted word, which has the advantage, a display can be prevented when the entire word assigned to the word prediction adjacent keys overlaid on each other when the corresponding key.

[0418] 图54显示了当预测单词较长时,通过显示后缀变形例而在虚拟键区(键盘)上的相应键区域显示预测单词的方法。 [0418] FIG. 54 shows a method of predicting when a word is longer, and the corresponding key region on the virtual keypad (keyboard) is displayed by the display predicted words Modification suffixes. 如果期望在相应键区域上显示完整的预测单词,则将预测单词分配给扩展键左边和右边的列上的键使得扩展键所属的列上的任何键都是空的。 If it is desired to display the full predicted word, the word is assigned to the extended keys on the left and right columns of keys makes any key on the key belongs to the extended column are empty will be predicted on the corresponding key area. 这就防止了预测单词覆盖其他已经被分配给邻近键的字符。 This prevents the word has been allocated to cover other key characters adjacent to predict.

[0419](第十七实施例) [0419] (seventeenth embodiment)

[0420] 第十七实施例在第十五和第十六实施例之外还提供了一种将字符甚至(even)分配到扩展键上的方法。 [0420] seventeenth embodiment further provides a method of the character even on extended key (the even) assigned to the fifteenth and sixteenth embodiments in addition to Fig. 在这种情况下,通过将扩展键应用到单词预测输入方法中可以容易地选择预测单词。 In this case, word prediction can be easily selected by the extended key word applied to the input prediction method.

[0421] 图55的虚拟键盘显示了甚至将字符“jkl”分配到扩展键的情况。 [0421] FIG. 55 shows a virtual keyboard or even the character "jkl" assigned to the case of extended keys. 这样的话,当字符被恰好分配到扩展键上时,扩展键不能通过图42所示的扩展键有效操作中的触摸-释放操作来执行“space”输入功能(参见图42(1)),但是能执行根据图42(11)到图42 (V)中所示的拖拉操作的功能。 In this case, when the character is exactly assigned to the extended key, the extended touch extended key 42 shown in the key can not be FIG effective operation - a release operation is performed "space" input function (see FIG. 42 (a)), but perform the functions of the drag operation shown in FIG. 42 (V) in accordance with FIG. 42 (11).

[0422] 例如,尽管字符“jkl”被指定到扩展键上,也可以没有难度地实现图42(IV)所示的符号输入。 [0422] For example, although the characters "jkl" key is assigned to the extension, no difficulty may be represented by the symbol input (IV) of FIG. 42 implemented. 也就是说,在能够检测拖拉操作的触摸类型输入装置,因此即使如图39(1)所示的现有键区(键盘)实际上被使用,在单词预测输入中也没有任何难度。 That is, a touch type input device capable of detecting a drag operation, even if the 39 (1) conventional keypad (keyboard) is actually used as shown in the input word prediction nor any difficulty.

[0423] 因此,当前配置的优势是,在将现有键盘布局应用在触摸类型输入装置中的状态下,可以很容易地选择预测单词。 [0423] Thus, the advantages of this configuration is, in the conventional type keyboard layout used in a touch input device in a state, can be easily selected predicted word. 也就是说,尽管预测单词选择方法是一种新方法,但由于现有的键盘布局实际上被使用,因此用户能够通过使用熟悉的键盘布局而根据本发明当前的配置容易地适应该输入方法。 That is, although the predicted word selection method is a new method, but a conventional keyboard layout is actually used, the user can be easily accommodated by the input method using familiar keyboard layout according to the current configuration of the present invention.

[0424] 然而,由于具有扩展键功能的“5”键不能执行“space”输入功能,因此即使在临时输入状态中的预测单词输入也必须通过拖拉操作来执行。 [0424] However, since the extended key having a function of the "5" key can not be executed "space" input function, so even in the temporary input word prediction input state must also be performed by a drag operation. 因此,如果单独的“space”键5303执行确定在临时输入状态中的预测单词并输入“ space ”的功能,则临时输入状态中的预测单词不需要通过拖拉操作来被确认和输入,其可通过简单触摸-释放操作来完成。 Thus, if a single "space" key 5303 in the temporary word prediction performed to determine the input state and input "space" function, the temporary state input word prediction is confirmed and need not be input by the drag operation, which can be obtained by simple touch - release operation to complete.

[0425](第十八实施例) [0425] (eighteenth embodiment)

[0426] 第十八实施例提供了一种解决关于预测单词列表的空间非常有限以至于不能在预测单词列表窗口中列出所有的预测单词的问题的方法,同时还提供了一种通过将“move”键设定到预测单词列表窗口中的键区域中的一个并且选择“move”键来显示另一个预测单词列表的配置。 [0426] eighteenth embodiment provides a list of words on projected space is very limited so that the problem can not list all of the predicted words in the predicted word list window solutions, but also provides a means of " move "key is set to a predicted word list window and select key area" move "button to display another configuration predicted word list.

[0427] 图56到图58显示了该配置。 [0427] FIG 56 to FIG 58 shows this configuration. 在图40 (I)中的典型的英语键盘布局中,为了输入“boy”,“abc”键,“mno”键以及“wxyz”键都必须被顺序地按压。 In FIG. 40 (I) is typically in the English keyboard layout, in order to enter the "boy", "abc" key, "mno" key, and "wxyz" button must be pressed in sequence. 在这种情况下,假定有9个预测单词,例如,Amy, any, boy, box, bow, cow, cox, coy,以及BMW,如果除了在“ I” 到“9” 键中扩展键之外,图56(1)所示的预测单词列表窗口中预测单词的空间被限制为仅仅8个单词,那么所有这些预测单词都不能显示。 In this case, it is assumed that there are nine prediction words, e.g., Amy, any, boy, box, bow, cow, cox, coy, and the BMW, if other than "9" key in the extended key in addition to "I" to predicted word list window, as shown in FIG. 56 (1) in the predicted word space is limited to only eight words, then all of these predicted words can not be displayed.

[0428] 为了解决这个问题,“next page”键5401( “下一页”键5401)可被指定给预测单词列表窗口中的键区域中的一个以与其他7个预测单词一起显示“move”键5401,并且当“move”键5401被选定(5403),则显示另一个预测单词列表以选择性输入要被输入的单词(图56中显示的是“BMW”)。 [0428] To solve this problem, "next page" button 5401 ( "next page" key 5401) prediction can be assigned to a key word list window area to be displayed with the other seven predicted word "move" key 5401, and when the "move" button 5401 is selected (5403), another predicted word list is displayed with the word input selectively to the input (shown in FIG. 56 is "BMW"). 图56(111)中所示的“move”键5402是用于再次移动到上一页预测单词列表的反向“move”键。 FIG 56 is "move" button 5402 shown in (111) is again moved to a reverse "move" key Previous predicted word list. 如果在图56(111)所示的预测单词列表窗口中的预测单词的数量大于7个的话,则图56(111)所示的预测单词列表窗口也可包含前向“move”键5401。 If the number of predicted words in the predicted word of FIG. 56 (111) shown in the list window is greater than seven, then as shown in FIG. 56 (111) is predicted word list window can also comprise a forward "move" key 5401.

[0429] 图56中所示的虚拟键盘是将字符组“jkl”分配到给扩展键的示例。 Virtual keyboard shown in [0429] FIG. 56 is an exemplary character set to an extended key "jkl" assigned to. 其操作方法仿效第十七实施例。 A method to emulate the operation of the seventeenth embodiment.

[0430] 图57和58显示了扩展键执行与“move”键相同的功能而不使用图56所示的“move” 键5401 和“move” 键5402 的示例。 [0430] Figures 57 and 58 show examples of extended key performs the same function key "move" shown in Figure 56 without using the "move" button 5401 and the "move" key 5402.

[0431] 如果扩展键的“move”键功能不与扩展键的其他功能冲突的话,当启用单词预测状态时,则扩展键的触摸-释放操作执行“move”键的功能。 [0431] If the extended key "move" key functions do not conflict with other functions of the extended key words, when you enable word prediction state, the extension of the touch key - release function to perform the operation "move" button.

[0432] 图57⑴显示了在输入窗口中通过连续地执行图56⑴中所示的“abc”,“mno”以及“wxyz”键的触摸-释放从而将“any”显示为临时输入状态的预测单词的状态,即预测单词列表窗口显示在屏幕上的状态。 [0432] FIG 57⑴ displayed in the input window by continuously performing a touch FIG 56⑴ "abc" as shown in, "mno" and "wxyz" key - will be released so that "any" provisional input word prediction display state the state, that prediction word list window displays the status on the screen. 在该状态中,当执行扩展键的触摸-释放操作时(参见图57 (II)),则在屏幕上显示第二预测单词列表(仅显示一个单词“BMW”),并且当扩展键的触摸-释放再次执行时(参见图57 (IV)),则没有其他预测单词,因此将第二预测单词列表变为第一预测单词列表。 In this state, when a touch is performed extended key - releasing operation (see FIG. 57 (II)), the second displays the predicted word list on the screen (only one word "BMW"), and when a touch of the extended key - the release is performed again (see Figure 57 (IV)), there is no other word prediction, so the second prediction list of words into a first predicted word list. [0433] 如果期望输入“BMW”的话,则将手指移动到被指定由“BMW”的区域上并利用拖拉操作5406从该区域上释放手指,如图58 (III)所示。 [0433] If the desired input "BMW", then, will move the finger to be shown on a region designated by "BMW" and a drag operation using the 5406 release of the finger from the region, as shown in FIG 58 (III). 更简单的是,如图57 (III)或57 (V)所示,如果单词预测激活状态(只有预测单词而没有字符显示在对应的键区域上的情况)是明显的,则可仅通过在被指定有“BMW”的区域上执行触摸-释放操作来输入“BMW”。 More simply, FIG. 57 (III), or 57 (V), if word prediction active state (and not only the predicted words in the case of displaying characters corresponding key region) is evident, can only by performing a touch on are designated "BMW" region - free operation input "BMW".

[0434] 例如,既然手指必须移动到被指定有预测单词的区域并且通过拖拉操作来释放以选择和输入图58(1)中的预测单词,则当每一个键区域处于通过在虚拟键盘上仅显示预测单词而仅选择预测单词的状态时,可通过在对应的区域上执行触摸-释放操作来输入预测单词,如图58(111)所示。 [0434] For example, since the fingers must be moved are designated with the predicted words region and by the drag operation is released to predict words (1) to select and enter 58, when each key zone is by only on the virtual keyboard as shown in the release operation input word prediction, FIG. 58 (111) - the word prediction display only the selected state of predicted words, by performing on the corresponding area of ​​the touch.

[0435] 如图57所示,预测单词列表窗口未显示在输入窗口中。 [0435] shown in Figure 57, the predicted word list window is not displayed in the input window. 假定可以根据客户的爱好将预测单词列表窗口显示在输入窗口中的情形可以补充当预测单词仅显示在虚拟键盘上时手指有时会隐藏预测单词的情形。 According to the customer's preferences can be assumed that the predicted word list window shows the situation in the input window can predict when supplementary word displays only the fingers are sometimes hidden predicted words when the situation on the virtual keyboard. 然而,这具有如下劣势,即当预测单词列表显示在输入窗口中时,输入窗口的区域被减少。 However, this has the disadvantage that, when the predicted word lists displayed in the input window, the input window area is reduced. 因此,预测窗口列表的显示/缺席可根据用户的偏好来设定。 Thus, the prediction window displaying a list of / absence can be set according to user preference.

[0436] 当前配置的优势是,通过允许预测单词被容易地选择以及输入不同的语言,例如中文和印地文,可提高输入速度,其中根据与预测文本输入方法中英文的键顺序相同的键顺序,预测单词的数量多于10或20个的情形是常见的。 [0436] advantages of the current arrangement is, be readily selected and input in different languages ​​by allowing predicted word, such as Chinese and Hindi, can improve the input speed, which in accordance with the predictive text entry method for key sequences same as the English key sequence number, word prediction more than 10 or 20 is a common situation. 尤其是,当前的配置具有这样的优势,即手指可选择预测单词而不需要移出虚拟键盘(虚拟键区)或实体键盘的键区域。 In particular, the current configuration has the advantage that the fingers need to be selected out of a predicted word without a virtual keyboard (virtual keypad), or a physical keyboard key region.

[0437] 此外,由于当前配置也可应用在图49到51所示的键盘输入装置中,期望的单词使用“move”键来从多个预测单词中选出必定是困难的,这样的常见的不便性问题能被解决。 [0437] Further, since the current configuration may also be applied to a keyboard input device 51 shown in FIG. 49, the desired word using the "move" key must be difficult to select from a plurality of predicted words, such a common inconvenience of problems can be solved. 例如,在英文的情况下,如图56到58所示,在从临时输入单词“any”开始后“move”键必须按压七次来找到“BMW”以输入“BMW”的不便性问题被解决。 For example, in the case of English, as shown in Figure 56-58, after the start of the temporary input word "any" "move" key must be pressed seven times to find the "BMW" to enter "BMW" The problem is solved inconvenience . 进一步地,当前的配置具有这样的优势,用户可通过在图58(1)所示的输入窗口中显示预测单词列表,来经常检查键输入是否正确完成。 Furthermore, the current configuration has the advantage that, in FIG. 58 by the user (1) Display a list of predicted words in the input window shown to always check whether the key input is completed correctly.

[0438][第十九实施例] [0438] [Nineteenth Embodiment]

[0439] 第十九实施例将该扩展键应用至甚至滑动型预测文本输入法(该方法为通过触摸被指定有构成一个单词的第一个字符的键区,随后移动手指到被指定有构成该单词的其他字符的键区,然后从被指定有构成该单词的最后一个字符的键区释放手指来输入单词),该方法中通过一种触摸-拖拉操作来输入单词。 [0439] The embodiment is applied to an extended key even predictive text input slide (which are designated as a first character key region constituting a word by touching the nineteenth embodiment, and then moving the finger to the configuration are designated other characters of the word keypad, and then releases the finger from the last character are designated word constituting the input word to a keypad), which method by means of a touch - a drag operation to input a word.

[0440] 图60显示了通过将图42和43所示的给使用扩展键的拖拉操作设定的功能应用到滑动型字符输入方法而容易地选择和输入预测单词的示例,即输入“wrote”和句点”的过程。 [0440] FIG. 60 shows an example of the input prediction and readily select a word by applying to Figures 42 and drag operation using the extended key set 43 shown in function to the character input method of a slide type, i.e. the input "wrote" and periods "process.

[0441] 特定的事实是可以很容易地通过将扩展键指定为独立键(separate key),并且将该扩展键安排在“g”和“h”之间的空间,即在键盘的中心来使用扩展键。 [0441] Specific fact that can be easily extended key as specified by the individual keys (separate key), and the extended key arrangement space between "g" and "h", i.e., at the center of the keyboard is used extended key. 图60 (I)显示了使用虚拟QWERTY键盘,经过构成“wrote”的每个字符以输入句子的最后一个单词“wrote”的拖拉操作5601,并且由该轨迹预测的单词为“wrote, word, weird, wire, wore和wired”,并且这些预测的单词的每一个安排在扩展键周围的两个键区(参考图60 (II))。 FIG. 60 (I) shows the use of a virtual QWERTY keyboard, through configuration "wrote" each character in the last word of the input sentence "wrote" drag operation 5601, and predicted by the trajectory of the word "wrote, word, weird , wire, wore and wired ", and the word of each of these projections arranged in two key regions (see FIG. 60 (II)) extended around the bond.

[0442] 这是因为在图60所示的完整的QWERTY键盘中的单个键上安排预测单词很困难,因为如图60所示的完整的QWERTY键盘通常比使用12键的键盘具有更小的键。 [0442] This is because the arrangement on a single key word in the predicted full QWERTY keyboard shown in FIG. 60 is difficult, because, as shown in FIG. 60 typically has a full QWERTY keyboard keys less than 12-key keypad . 假如完整QWERTY键盘具有足够大的键来在每个键上安排预测单词,那么各个预测单词不必被安排在组合两个键的区域,不像图60(11)。 If a full QWERTY keyboard, a key having a sufficiently large to arrange a predicted word on each key, each predicted word combinations need not be arranged in the region of the two keys, like in FIG. 60 (11).

[0443] 由于图60(1)所示的手指轨迹对应输入“word”的轨迹,而不是“wrote”,所以“word”就选为临时输入单词5603。 [0443] FIG. 60 because (1) the finger path shown in the corresponding input of "word" track, rather than "wrote", so "word" as the temporary input word 5603 on. 在这种情况下,当在被指定有”的键区上执行触摸-释放5604时,很容易实现“wrote.”的输入。这是应用图42(VI)的设置的示例,即用于通过使用所述扩展键容易地输入预测单词和符号的设置,并且显示了扩展键的使用使得即使在滑动型输入方法中也容易实现字符输入。 In this case, when there is designated "performing a touch on the keypad - Release 5604, it is easy to achieve" wrote "This is an example of application of the input of FIG. 42 (VI) is arranged, was used by. using the extended key set predictive easily input words and symbols, and shows the use of such extended key even when the slide type input method, character input can be easily achieved.

[0444] 然而,如图60 (II)所不的符号键盘布局用于一次性输入(意味着在符号被输入之后,符号键盘布局自动变为如图60 (IV)所示的用于字符输入的QWERTY键盘布局)。 [0444] However, in FIG. 60 (II) are not used in disposable symbol keyboard layout input (input means after the symbol, the symbol keyboard layout automatically becomes as shown in FIG. 60 (IV) for character input the QWERTY keyboard layout). 假如符号或数字必须连续输入,那么可以使用一种设置用于键盘布局改变的独立键以固定用于符号的重复输入的符号键盘布局的方法。 If the symbol or number must be continuously input is provided may be used for changing the keyboard layout of independent key method for fixing symbols keyboard input symbol repetition layout. 然而,如图60(11)所示拖拉操作5602仅仅是用于当使用扩展键时,当然启用符号键盘布局而无需触摸独立键的功能的示例,并且拖拉操作5602并不意图显示只能够执行一种临时键盘布局功能。 However, FIG. 60 (11) 5602 only for a drag operation when using an extended key, of course, enable the symbol keyboard layout without separate key function exemplary touch and drag operation 5602 can be performed not only intended to show a kind of temporary keyboard layout features.

[0445] 另外,像通过使用韩文的元音输入激活键来输入元音的拖拉操作一样,用于预测单词选择的拖拉操作5602可以是将手指移动到被指定有预测单词的区域(该区域通过将由图56(11)中具有不同背景颜色的两个键组合来标识)或使手指经过该区域的动作,并且进一步,通过设置指向该区域的方向,当拖拉操作的方向与指向该区域的方向相同,并且拖拉操作移动超过了预定距离时,执行该功能。 [0445] Further, as to the input of vowels by using a Korean vowel key input is activated as a drag operation, the drag operation for the predicted word 5602 may be selected to move the finger to the designated word predictive region (the region by FIG 56 by (11) having two key combination to identify different background colors) or to the direction of the finger through the operation area, and further, by providing the point in the region, when the direction to the direction of the drag operation is directed to the region the same, and a drag operation moves exceeds a predetermined distance, perform the function. 该事实可以应用到如图42和43所示的拖拉操作。 This fact can be applied to the drag operation shown in FIG. 42 and 43.

[0446][第二十实施例] [0446] [Twentieth Embodiment]

[0447] 第二十实施例提供了一种在单词预测字符输入方法中同时输入两个键的方法。 [0447] A twentieth embodiment provides a character input method of the word prediction process two keys simultaneously input.

[0448] 参考图55描述第二十实施例。 [0448] FIG. 55 is described with reference to the twentieth embodiment. 第二十实施例提供了一种当在手指触摸键区“I”的情况下通过拖拉操作将手指移动到键区“6”而不是执行被指定有“b”的“I”键和被指定有“O”的“6”键的两个分离的触摸-释放以输入单词“boy”时同时输入指定给触摸开始点和手指释放点的字符的方法。 Twentieth Embodiment When the finger provides a drag operation by moving the finger in the case of a keypad touch key region "I" of "6" instead of executing are designated "b", "I" and a key designated there are "O" of "6" touch two separate keys - release method to input the word "boy" while assigned to the touch input starting point and release point the finger of characters.

[0449] 如上所述,当指定给触摸开始的键和指定给手指释放的键的子符冋时输入时,如图53所示的“boy”的输入可以通过两个触摸动作来完成,并且如图40所示用于输入“am”的两个触摸动作(在“I”键和“6”键上的两个触摸-释放操作)可以用一个触摸-拖拉操作代替。 [0449] As described above, when the start key is assigned to a touch of a finger and assigned to the released key sub Jiong character input, input "boy" as shown in FIG 53 may be accomplished by two touch action, and As shown in FIG. 40 for inputting "am" two touch operation (in the "I" key and the "6" key touch on two - releasing operation) may be a touch - instead of a drag operation.

[0450] 假如恰当地设置用于图42或43的拖拉操作的功能以便该拖拉操作的功能不会与图42和43所示的使用扩展键的拖拉操作的功能冲突,那么按键触摸的数量可以减半。 [0450] If appropriately provided for the function of the drag operation of FIG. 42 or 43 so that the function of the drag operation is not conflict with the function shown in FIG. 42 and 43 using the extended key of the drag operation, the number of key touch can be half. 另外,当将如图60所示滑动型单词预测输入方法应用到具有如图39 (I)所示4*3 (4行*3列)键盘配置的数字键定向键盘布局时,通过指定如图39(11)所示的扩展键也可容易地选择预测单词,并且在这种情况下,相较于如图60所示的完全的QWERTY键盘,手指移动范围减小,因此,使得具有在由一只手操作移动设备的情况下,仅通过一根手指(主要是拇指)的关节运动来使用滑动型单词预测输入方法的优点。 Further, when the slide type as shown in FIG word prediction method is applied to an input with FIG. 39 (I) * 3 shown in FIG. 4 (4 rows * 3) 60 key keyboard configuration of a digital keyboard layout orientation, as shown by specifying 39 (11) of the extended key can be easily selected predicted word, and in this case, compared to the full QWERTY keyboard as shown in FIG. 60, the finger movement range is reduced, therefore, that by having a case where the hand operation of the mobile device, use only the advantages of the prediction method of a slide-type word input by a finger (thumb mainly) of articulation.

[0451][第二 十一实施例] [0451] [twenty-first embodiment]

[0452] 在第二十一实施例中,当单词预测状态没有激活时,使用扩展键的拖拉操作执行在屏眷上移动光标(指针)的功能。 [0452] In a twenty-first embodiment, when the word prediction state is not active, a drag operation using the extended key of the move is performed cursor (pointer) on the screen dependents.

[0453] 只要移动光标的功能与分配给如图42或43所示的使用扩展键的拖拉操作的功能之间没有冲突,当光标移动控制功能被分配给图61 (II)和61 (IV)所示的拖拉操作时,可非常方便地使用固定在虚拟键盘上的手指来执行到屏幕上的期望位置的光标移动。 No conflict between the drag operation using the extended function keys [0453] As long as the cursor moving function assigned to the FIG. 42 or 43 when the cursor movement control function is assigned to FIG. 61 (II), and 61 (IV) when the drag operation can be easily performed to a desired position of the cursor movement on the screen of the fixed fingers on the virtual keyboard shown. 作为位于键盘中从而消除了手从键盘离开并移动至鼠标以在键盘使用期间操作鼠标来移动光标的一般不便的指点杆,这带来了便利。 As the keyboard thereby eliminating the inconvenience of general trackpoint hand from the keyboard and the mouse to move during use of the keyboard to move the mouse cursor, which is made easier.

[0454] 更详细地,图61显示了使用扩展键删除在触摸屏类型输入方法中显示在输入窗口5701的第四行中的单词“correction”的过程。 [0454] In more detail, Figure 61 shows the process of using an extended key to delete the word displayed in the fourth line of the input window 5701 in the "correction" in the type of input method for a touch screen. 由于在虚拟键盘5702上单词预测状态是非激活的,所以不能通过触摸扩展键执行预测单词选择功能,相反地,当触摸扩展键时,在屏幕上显示光标控制键盘布局5703。 Since 5702 on the virtual keyboard inactive state word prediction can not be performed by touching the extended key word prediction selection function, and conversely, when the touch extended key, the cursor is displayed on the control screen 5703 keyboard layout.

[0455] 假如执行扩展键的简单的触摸-释放,那么可输入“space”或者可执行由触摸-释放操作定义的功能。 [0455] If a simple touch of the implementation of the extended key - released, enter "space", or executable by a touch - releasing operation definition function. 然而,在当前实施例中,当手指触摸扩展键并向上、向下、向左或者向右移动时,执行光标(指针)的移动,并且假如从如图61 (III)所示的命名为“拖拉设置(setfor drag) ”的键释放手指,那么在屏幕上光标控制键盘布局仍旧是激活状态,从而能够执行如图61 (IV)所示的用于选择期望单词的拖拉操作。 However, in the present embodiment, when a finger touches the key to the expansion, down, leftward or rightward, performs a moving cursor (pointer), and if named from FIG. 61 (III) as shown in " drag is provided (setfor drag) "key releases the finger, then the on-screen cursor control keyboard layout is still active, and thus can be performed in FIG. 61 (IV) shown for selecting a desired word drag operation.

[0456] 由于“选择”键的主要目的是选择期望的字符、单词或句子,所以假如手指从“选择”键释放,那么光标的移动必须执行以选择期望的字符、单词或句子,因此,优选地,光标控制键盘布局持续保持激活。 [0456] Since the main purpose of the "Select" key to select the desired characters, words or sentences, so if the finger is released from the "Select" key, then the cursor movement must be performed to select a desired character, a word or a sentence, it is preferable , the cursor control continuously remains active keyboard layout. 在选择了期望的单词之后,假如想要简单地复制选择的单词,那么执行“复制(copy) ”键的触摸-释放,而假如想要删除选择的单词,那么用户通过在“复制/剪切(copy/cut) ”键的触摸状态下的拖拉操作移动手指到扩展键,并且从扩展键释放手指以删除单词“correction”,从而使得光标控制键盘布局消失,并且出现字符输入键盘布局。 After selecting the desired word, if you want to simply copy the word choice, then the implementation of "copy (copy)" touch button - release, and if you want to delete the selected word by the user in the "Copy / Cut (copy / cut) "key touch state of the drag operation to move the fingers extended key, and releases the finger from the extended key to delete the word" correction ", so that the cursor control keyboard layout disappears, and a character input keyboard layout occurs. 因为删除单词“correction”的目的可以是为了将单词“correction”插入到另一个位置或者是将另一个词插入到单词“correction”所在的位置,所以在屏幕上光标控制键盘布局消失,而出现字符输入键盘布局。 Because deleting the word "correction" The purpose may be to the word "correction" into another position or another word is inserted into the word "correction" location, so the on-screen cursor control keyboard layout disappear, and the character appears enter the keyboard layout. 假如想要将单词“correction”插入到另一个位置,那么用户通过手指触摸扩展键,并且拖动手指到“上/下/左/右移动(up/down/left/rightmove) ” 键5704,如图61(11)或61 (IV)所示。 If you want the word "Correction" into another position, the user touches the extended key by a finger and dragging the finger to "upper / lower / left / right movement (up / down / left / rightmove)" button 5704, as 61 (11) or 61 (IV) shown in FIG.

[0457] 操作“上/下/左/右移动”键的方法可以各种形式改变,其中一种是允许光标的移动保持在由“上/下/左/右移动”键中的一个所指向的方向上同时手指放在选定的“移动”键上,并且当手指回到扩展键时停止光标的移动的方法。 [0457] Operation "upper / lower / left / right" key method may be changed in various forms, one of which is held to allow movement of the cursor by a button in the "up / down / left / right" points direction while the finger on the selected "move" on the key, and when the finger movement of a cursor stops when extended key back. 然而,图61显示了也可执行一种通过使用扩展键控制光标移动的方法。 However, FIG. 61 shows a method may also be performed by using the cursor movement keys to control the extension. 因此,通过使用扩展键可设置预测单词的选择和字符的输入所需的各种功能,并且在多点触控型输入方法中,由于即使通过如图59(111)所示在字符输入键盘布局之外安排两个分离的扩展键5504来使得两根手指同时触摸两个扩展键也不存在问题,所以通过将不是上述功能的额外功能分配给字符输入键盘布局之外的扩展键或者允许字符输入键盘布局之外的扩展键共享与字符输入键盘布局中的扩展键5503相同的功能可更便利地执行字符输入。 Thus, by using the extended key set of predicted words and the character selection input required by the various functions, and multi-touch type input method, even when 59 (111) shown in the character input through the keyboard layout in FIG. Other arrangements of two separate extended key 5504 to enable the two fingers touching the two extended key there is no problem, so by the additional functionality not assigned to the above-described function key other than a character input keyboard layout extension or allows character input extended key shared with the same functionality as a character input keyboard layout extended key other than the keyboard layout 5503 may be more convenient character input.

[0458][第二十二实施例] [0458] [Twenty-second Embodiment]

[0459] 上述通过单词预测进行英文输入可被应用到韩文。 [0459] By the above-described English input word prediction may be applied to Korean. 在当前实施例中,单词预测方法被应用到使用如图27所示的元音输入启用键2501的韩文输入法。 In the present embodiment, word prediction method is applied to the input using the vowel keys shown in FIG. 27 2501 to enable Korean input method.

[0460] 单词预测方法作为命名为T9的字符输入法众所周知,并且正确地指示消除不确定性(disambiguating)的方法。 [0460] word prediction method is well known as a named character T9 input method, and correctly indicate the elimination of uncertainty (disambiguating) of. 当几个字符被指定给单个键时,通过一个按压动作输入这些字符,而不需要几个按压动作。 When several characters are assigned to a single key, input by a pressing operation of these characters, rather than several pressing operation. [0461] 例如,为了在典型的多次击键方法中输入单词“mom”,那么“mno”键必须如下所述连续地按压。 [0461] For example, to enter the word "mom" In a typical process multiple keystrokes, the "mno" key must be pressed continuously as follows. 在这种情况下,必须在中间按压“移动(一)”键来识别“m”和“O”,同样地,必须在中间按压“移动(一)”键来识别“ο”和“m”,因此总共需要七次按压动作。 In this case, you must press the "movement (a)" in the middle of the key to identify the "m" and "O", in the same manner, to press "movement (a)" in the middle of the key to identify the "o" and "m" Therefore a total of seven times pressing action. 相较于此,在单词预测方法中总共只需要三次按压动作,从而实质上使得输入速度提高了一倍以上。 Compared to this, a total of only three pressing action in word prediction method, so that the input speed substantially more than doubled.

[0462]多次击键方法:“mno,,、“一,,、“mno”、“mno”、“mno,,、“一,,、“mno” ; [0462] The method of multiple keystrokes: "mno ,,," a ,,, "mno", "mno", "mno ,,," a ,,, "mno";

[0463]单词预测方法:“mno”、“mno”、“mno”。 [0463] word prediction: "mno", "mno", "mno".

[0464] 即使提高了字符输入速度的单词预测方法亦不容易应用到韩文字符输入方法,因为通过被指定给每个键的字符的组合来预测单词的可能性降低或者没有像在英文情况下那样的输入速度上的提高。 [0464] Even if the speed of the improved character input method for word prediction nor readily applied to Korean character input method, because by reducing the likelihood of the character is assigned to each key combination or not as predicted words as in the case of English increase the input speed.

[0465] 表1显示了将具有相同键序列的单词数目为I到10的情况按照升序排列,其中键序列是韩语单词可通过现有的三星Cheonjiin、LG Naratgul和Pantech SKY-1I,以及图85(1)所不的本发明的键盘布局而具有的键序列。 [0465] Table 1 shows the number of words having the same key sequence is I to 10 in ascending case where the key sequence is a Korean word by conventional Samsung Cheonjiin, LG Naratgul and Pantech SKY-1I, and 85 in FIG. (1) keyboard layout according to the present invention does not have the key sequence.

[0466] 作为参考,由于Cheonjiin的情况下不存在用于元音的预测方法,所以表1中所示的分布情况扣除了通过“Cheon(.),Ji (一),and In (|) ”实际输入每一个元音以及将单词预测方法应用到每个辅音的情况。 [0466] For reference, since the prediction method for the vowel absence Cheonjiin, so the distribution shown in Table 1 deducted by "Cheon, Ji (a), and In (.) (|)" each of the actual input and a case where the vowel word prediction method is applied to each of the consonant. 虽然如此,正确预测仅一个单词的概率不高于90%。 Even so, only a word correctly predict the probability of not higher than 90%.

[0467] 因此,预测的精确度的顺序是:本发明> SKY-1I > Naratgul > Cheonjiin0当实际应用单词预测方法时,输入速度的提高分别是=Cheonjiin达12%、Naratgul达15%以及本发明达29%。 [0467] Thus, the order of the accuracy of the predictions are: the present invention> SKY-1I> Naratgul> Cheonjiin0 When the application word prediction method, to improve the input speed are = Cheonjiin up to 12%, Naratgul up to 15%, and the present invention up to 29%. 根据仅在输入速度可提高至少大约30%的情况下使用单词预测方法的结论,该结果表明为什么单词预测方法应用到现有的韩文输入法是困难的。 The speed can be increased only when the input word Conclusion of at least about 30% of prediction methods, the results show why conventional word prediction method is applied to Korean input method it is difficult. 因此,Hanalgul显示了可应用单词预测方法的键盘布局。 Therefore, Hanalgul shows the keyboard layout can be applied to word prediction methods.

[0468] 据此,当前配置提供`了一种当在本发明中使用单词预测方法时提高用户便利性的方法。 [0468] Accordingly, this configuration provides a method of increasing `user convenience when using the word predictive methods of the present invention. 图72显示了图27中所示键盘布局针对当前配置的改变。 Figure 72 shows the configuration for the current to change the keyboard layout shown in FIG. 27.

[0469] 如图72所示的键盘布局的一个特征是没有元音指定给“fortis, aspirate”键。 [0469] One feature of the keyboard layout shown in FIG. 72 is not assigned to the vowel "fortis, aspirate" key. 即使启用单词预测方法,也可以在任何时候选择典型的输入方法。 Even Enable word prediction method, you can also choose typical input methods at any time.

[0470] 例如,当在图72所示的键盘布局中启用词语预测方法时,通过按压《 ^ 55键来输入“ =I ''。然而,当在按压“ —I,,键之后按压“fortis, aspirate”键时,词语预测方法确认 [0470] For example, when the word prediction method for enabling the keyboard layout shown in FIG. 72, by pressing the "enter key 55 ^" = I ''. However, when the "key is pressed after -I ,," pressed Fortis , aspirate "key word prediction method validation

作为输入的辅音。 As a consonant input.

[0471] 因此,在辅音上不存在消除不确定性,并且即使单词预测方法被启用,与典型输入法相同的输入机制亦被应用到单词预测法中。 [0471] Thus, there is uncertainty as to eliminate the consonant, and even if word prediction method is enabled, the same mechanism typical input method was also applied to the input word prediction method.

[0472] 因此,假如按照当前配置使用图72所示键盘布局配置的输入法,那么可使用典型输入法和单词预测方法组合的输入方法。 [0472] Thus, according to the current configuration if the input method using the keyboard layout shown in FIG. 72 configuration, it may be used and a typical input word prediction method of combining input methods. 这是当前配置的关键点。 This is a key point of the current configuration.

[0473] [表I] [0473] [Table I]

[0474] 按照韩文键盘布局以相同的键顺序预测的单词的数目和与之对应的概率分布在单词集Hanalgd SKY II Naratgiil Cheonjiin [0474] Korean keyboard layout according to the same key sequence number of predicted words and the corresponding set of words probability distribution Hanalgd SKY II Naratgiil Cheonjiin

丨合中元素丨 I I Shu Shu together the elements I I

条卜1.数ΐί分比帋H数7:ϊ分比1ΐ分比項[1¾ 了:!_分i!.:1m.LOO |θ 0...................204 0.75285 O 丨O 1. Article Number ΐί Bu Zhi number division ratio H 7: ϊ 1ΐ division ratio division ratio of item [1¾ of: _ sub i:!!. 1m.LOO | θ 0 ............. ...... 204 0.75285 O Shu O

9 b O 3 0.00887175 0.27678 O 丨O 9 b O 3 0.00887175 0.27678 O O Shu

Figure CN103608751AD00461

[0475][表 2] [0475] [Table 2]

Figure CN103608751AD00462

[0477] 根据本发明的输入系统可应用到印地文输入法。 [0477] The input system of the present invention may be applied to the input Hindi. 与韩文一样,由于在印地文情况下通过组合辅音和元音来构成单词,所以可将上述实施例中被应用到韩文的元音输入启用键的构思引入到印地文中。 And Korean, as Hindi since in the case of a word constituted by a combination of vowels and consonants, it can be applied to the above-described embodiments enable Korean vowel input key concept is introduced into the Hindi.

[0478] 通过示例性实施例描述了更多的细节。 [0478] described in more detail through exemplary embodiments.

[0479][第二十三实施例] [0479] [23rd Embodiment]

[0480] 第二十三实施例提供了一种将元音输入启用键应用到使用触摸屏的印地文输入法中的方法,即通过配置辅音和元音到如图62所示的15个键中的8个凭一次触摸来输入元音或辅音的方法。 [0480] A twenty-third embodiment provides a vowel key is applied to the enable input of Hindi input method using a touch screen method, i.e., by the configuration shown in FIG consonants and vowels to 15 keys 62 with the eight to one-touch input method vowel or consonant.

[0481] 包括“candrabindu”的字符符号可被指定给没有被指定这些辅音和元音中的任何一个的键,其中字符符号可被指定给单个键,以便像在辅音和元音(参考图63(VIII))的情况下一样通过扩展功能输入字符符号,或者可被指定给如图62所示的对应键。 [0481] including "candrabindu" symbol characters may be assigned to a key is not specified these consonants and vowels any, wherein the symbol characters may be assigned to a single key, the consonant and vowel to like (refer to FIG. 63 case (VIII)) as a function of input characters through the expansion symbol, or may be assigned to the corresponding key 62 shown in FIG. 另外,如图64所示,当输入辅音时,可输入字符符号。 Further, as shown in FIG 64, when a consonant, can enter character symbols. 假如字符符号指定给独立键,并且通过如图63 (VIII)所示的扩展功能输入,那么如图65所示可在用于辅音输入的手指触摸状态下在辅音之后紧接着输入依赖元音(dependent vowel)。 If the character symbols are assigned to individual keys, and by FIG. 63 (VIII) shown extension input is available immediately after the input consonant shown in Figure 65. In the finger touch state to the input consonant vowel dependency ( dependent vowel). 这将参考图65进行描述。 This will be described with reference to FIG. 65. 当想要输入'If时,通过选择想要的辅音(参考图65 (I))并且返回原始键位置(参考图65 (II))来围绕该原始键扩展和安排依赖元音、移动手指到该状态下通过拖拉操作被指定元音CT的位置、以及从元音Cf释放手指,'爾'被输入。 When wants to input 'If, by selecting a consonant (refer to FIG. 65 (I)) and returns to the original desired key position (see FIG. 65 (II)) about the original key to extend and dependent vowel arrangements, moving the finger to CT vowel designated in this state, by dragging the operating position, and releasing the finger from the vowels of Cf, 'Seoul' is input. 然而,当键盘布局中能够扩展和安排依赖元音的列数为5时,这种情况是可能的。 However, when the keyboard layout can be expanded and the number of columns is dependent vowel arrangements 5, this situation is possible. 图65(1)显示了一种印地文虚拟键盘主屏幕,其中作为被指定所有元音的键的元音输入启用键5801具有作为对应于韩语元音“0的代表性字符的Λ ,并且在辅音情况下,包括由蓝色标记的代表性字符的5个字符指定给除了I之外的每个对应键,tr被指定有4个字符,并且指定给每个对应键的字符如下所示。 FIG 65 (a) shows a Hindi main screen virtual keyboard, which is designated as vowel keys for all vowel keys to enable input 5801 corresponding to the Korean vowel "representative of the character 0 as Λ, and in the case of consonant, including indicia representative of the blue characters assigned to 5 except I corresponding to each key, TR four characters are designated, and assigned to each key corresponding to a character as follows .

Figure CN103608751AD00471

[0482] 使用虚拟键盘的实际辅音输入法如下。 [0482] Actual input consonant follows using the virtual keyboard. 当在虚拟键盘主屏幕上触摸上面显示有其代表性字符的键时,指定给对应群组的字符在上面显示有其代表性字符的该键周围显示, 如图63所示,其中置于该虚拟键盘主屏幕左列的属于代表性字符键的群组的辅音按照顺时针顺序安排,置于中间列的属于代表性字符键的群组的辅音以对称的形式在左右两边从上到下安排,并且置于右列的属于代表性字符键的辅音按照逆时针顺序从上倒下安排。 When the touch key is displayed above the representative character in a virtual keyboard on the main screen, the characters assigned to the group corresponding to the periphery of the display key has a representative character display shown in Figure 63. In the above, the place where representative consonant character keys belonging to the group of the main screen virtual keyboard are arranged in order clockwise in the left column, placed in the middle row of consonants belonging to the group of the representative character keys form a symmetrical arrangement from top to bottom in right and left and placed in the right columns belong to a representative character consonant key arrangement from the down counter in accordance with the order.

[0483] 假如屏幕就虚拟键盘的配置而言足够大使得有5列,而不是3列,那么甚至对于在如图62所示的虚拟键盘的左右列中所安排的代表性字符,指定给代表性字符中的每一个代表性字符的字符可被安排在以与中央列对称的形式的左右列中。 [0483] If the terms of the virtual keyboard on the screen arranged so large that there is 5, instead of three, then even for a character representation around the column of the virtual keyboard 62 shown in FIG scheduled, to the representative designated the character of the representative character of each of the characters may be arranged around the central column to form column symmetry. 如图63所示的一个特定事实是触摸显示代表性字符的每个键以安排属于该键周围的对应群组的字符,而没有字符安排在代表性字符的原始位置。 A fact shown in particular in FIG. 63 is a touch display each representative key character corresponding to the character group belonging to arrange around the key, but not the characters arranged in the character representation of the original position. 因而,为了输入表示每个键的代表性字符,用户必须在虚拟键盘主屏幕上触摸显示代表性字符的键,向上移动手指一行以选择代表性字符,随后释放手指,因为在手指触摸下每个代表性字符从原始位置向上移动一行,并且当由于每个代表性字符的触摸使得属于每个群组的字符被扩展和安排时,其安排如图59所示。 Accordingly, in order to input characters of each key typically represents the user must touch display characters representative of keys on the virtual keyboard in the main screen, the finger is moved upward to select a representative character line, and then releases the finger, because the finger touch at each representative character line upward movement from the home position, and when the touch because each character so that the character belongs to a representative of each group and arranged to be extended, its arrangement 59 shown in FIG. 例如,通过触摸在虚拟键盘主屏幕上表示为《 W «的键5803、移动手指到属于对应群组的包括“雨«的5个字符被扩展和安排(参考图60a(I))的情况下的“ W »的位置、然后从“ W,,的位置释放手指(参考图60a(II))以输入一个代表性字符“ W *。 For example, the case represented by touching "W is« key 5803, to move a finger belonging to the corresponding group include "Rain« 5 characters are extended and arranged (see FIG. 60a (I)) is a virtual keyboard on the main screen the "W is» position, and then from the "finger release (see FIG. 60a (II)) W ,, a position to enter a representative character" W *. 为何 Why

没有字符被指定到每个代表性字符键的位置的原因是为了提供一种在印地文情况下容易输入要增加到辅音的符号的方法,另外,还为了允许在输入辅音之后容易地输入独立元音。 No reason is assigned to a representative position of each character of the character keys is to provide a case in Hindi To easily input a consonant symbol added, In addition, in order to allow to easily separate the input after the input consonant vowel. 在兀音输入法之后描述这个方法。 This method is described in Wu after the input method. 在印地文情况下,不同于辅音,每个兀音通过一个键输入,并且对于每个印地文元音,相同的读音有两种拼写,其中通过与辅音组合而拼写的元音被称为依赖元音,而不与辅音组合、独立进行拼写的元音被称为独立元音。 In Hindi case, unlike consonant, each Wu sound via a key input, and for each vowel Hindi, two spellings same pronunciation, which is referred to by a combination of the consonant and vowel spelling vowel dependent vowel, consonant and not in combination with separate spell is called independent vowel. 因此,通常使 Therefore, usually the

用的独立兀音数量是11个(3T ST 零拿2F 5 W 3ft Independent Wu using a 11 tone (3T ST take zero 2F 5 W 3ft

$ S ? 9 9 5 5 9 , $ S? 9 9 5 5 9,

3# 和更),而依赖元音的数量是10个(翁,^ f % , # 3 and more), while the number 10 is dependent vowel (Weng, ^ f%,

3 3

d 5 ^ ^ 2 )。 d 5 ^ ^ 2). 当前配置提供了一种通过当触摸元音输入启用键时,在元 When one kind of the current configuration is provided when the touch input vowel key is enabled by the element

>955 > 955

音输入启用键周围排列元音来输入这些元音的方法。 Surrounding sound input method of inputting the vowel key arrangement vowel enabled. 如同配置韩文的单元音和复合元音, 当触摸元音输入启用键一次时,如图62(111)所示,在元音输入启用键周围安排独立元音,CN 103608751 A以便输入这些独立元音,并且当触摸元音输入启用键两次时,如图62(IV)所示,在元音输入启用键周围安排依赖元音,以便输入这些依赖元音。 As Korean unit configuration complex vowel sound, when the touch input is enabled vowel key, shown as 62 (111), the enable input vowel key arrangement around independent vowel, CN 103608751 A input to the Independent Component sound, and when the touch input is enabled vowel key twice, as shown in FIG 62 (IV), the peripheries of the key arrangements enable dependent vowel to vowel in vowel input dependency of these inputs. 即,当前配置的构思是在一个键周围排列21个兀音。 That is, the current configuration is conceived 21 Wu arranged around a key tone.

[0484] 然而,可通过当在通过触摸元音输入启用键两次来显示依赖元音键盘布局的方法之外输入辅音时允许独立元音可输入状态自动改变到依赖元音可输入状态进行配置以便不必触摸两次元音输入启用键以输入依赖元音。 [0484] However, it can be configured by a touch when enabled by the input vowel key twice to display allows independent vowel input consonant vowel keyboard layout method depends on the input state can be automatically changed to the input state dependent vowel so you do not have to touch twice vowel input key to enable input dependent vowel. 即,当输入辅音时,元音键盘布局总是改变为依赖元音键盘布局,以便虚拟键盘改变为如图62(11)所示,并且当在这种状态下触摸元音输入启用键时,依赖元音键盘布局如图62 (IV)所示显示在屏幕上。 That is, when a consonant, vowel keyboard layout is always dependent vowel keyboard layout is changed, so that the virtual keyboard is changed to FIG. 62 (11), and when the touch input vowel key is enabled in this state, dependent vowel keyboard layout in FIG. 62 (IV) shown on the screen. 由于依赖元音总是在辅音输入之后才输入,所以用户必须选择独立兀音键盘布局或依赖兀音键盘布局以输入兀音的不便可通过在句子开始时、在句子中的新词开始时或在单词输入期间输入元音时改变键盘布局为依赖元音键盘布局而被消除。 Since always only entered after the consonant vowel dependent on the input, the user must select an independent or dependent Wu Wu sound keyboard layout keyboard layout to sound Wu sound can not enter through at the start of a sentence, at the beginning of a new word or sentence changing the keyboard layout for the keyboard layout dependent vowel is eliminated during the input vowel word input. 这种根据句子或单词的输入状态的在独立元音键盘布局和依赖元音键盘布局之间的自动切换也是当前配置的事实。 This is currently configured to automatically switch the input according to the state of the sentence or word between vowels independent and dependent vowel keyboard layout keyboard layout fact. 即,在当前配置下,在用于开始句子或用于间隔单词的“space”输入之后,总是保持独立元音输入状态,如图62(111)所示。 That is, in the current configuration, after the start of a sentence or a word interval for "space" input always remain independent vowel input state, as shown in FIG. 62 (111). 另外,如图68所示,当触摸图62(1)和图62(11)中的每一个所示的虚拟键盘的元音输入启用键时,这分别造成独立元音键盘布局(参考图68(1))或依赖元音键盘布局(参考图68(11))中所不的兀音输入启用状态。 Further, as shown in FIG. 68, when the touch input vowel FIG. 62 (a) and 62 (11) shown in each of the enabled virtual keyboard keys, which causes each independently vowel keyboard layout (refer to FIG. 68 (1)) or a dependent vowel keyboard layout (refer to FIG. 68 (11)) are not in the Wu sound input enabled. 该启用的兀音键盘布局仅显不将输入的一半兀音。 The voice-enabled keyboard layout Wu is not only significant input half Wu sound.

[0485] 因此,如图69和70显示了真实元音输入法。 [0485] Thus, as shown in FIG 69 and 70 shows the real vowel input method. 如图69 (I)所示,通过在独立元音键盘布局启用状态向上移动手指、选择“ 3T ” %并释放该手指,从而输入与音标[a]对应的独兄兀首“ 3Τ '' 。 FIG. 69 (I), the mobile by enabling the separate keyboard layout state vowel finger up, select the "3T"% and releases the finger, so that the input and the phonetic [a] corresponding to the first single brother Wu "3Τ ''.

[0486] 另外,通过在选择》^ ,的情况下返回手指到独立元音键盘布局启用键的原始位置并释放该手指,与音标[a:]对应的“ M «被输入。同样地,通过移动手指到在独立元音键盘布局启用状态下显示的对应元音的位置并释放手指来输入与在印地文元音中的长音和短音中的短音对应的 "Return ^, a case where a finger to separate vowel keyboard layout Enable key original position and releases the finger, with the phonetic [a:] corresponding to" [0486] Further, by selecting M «is input in the same manner, by. moving a finger to separate vowel keyboard layout at the display position corresponding to the enabled state and to release the finger vowel and the long sound input short sound in the Hindi short sound vowel corresponding

Figure CN103608751AD00481

中的每一个,并且当对应短元音被选定时,在元音输入启用键的位置显示与这些独立元音中的长元音对应的 Each of a, and when the corresponding selected short vowel, the vowel input enabled key in the display position of these independent vowel corresponding long vowels

Figure CN103608751AD00482

中的每一个并且通过将手指从对应短元音的位置返回到元音输入启 Each of the finger and by returning from a position corresponding to the vowel is a short vowel input start

用键的位置并释放手指来输入 A position key and release your finger to enter

Figure CN103608751AD00483

中的每一个。 Each. 然而,由于没有与依赖 However, in the absence of dependence

元音中的音标[a]对应的短元音,所以当启用依赖元音键盘布局时,与长元音[a:]对应的«『》与其他短元音一起显示,如图68(11)所示。 Phonetic vowels [a] corresponding to the short vowel, vowel dependency is enabled when the keyboard layout, and the long vowel [a:] corresponding to «" "is displayed together with other short vowels, as shown in FIG 68 (11 ) shown in FIG.

[0487] 如图69(11)和69 (IV)所示,当选择《 f ”或《 W »时,对应的键区扩展到4个相邻键区(黄色标记区域)以防止在移动手指到被指定了与“ Ψ,,或“ π «的长元音对应的《 f 0或《 t »的元音输入启用键的原始位置的过程中通过触摸相邻短元音而激活任何相邻短元音。 [0487] FIG. 69 (11), and 69 (IV), when selecting "f" or "when W is», corresponding to four extended keypad keys adjacent region (region marked in yellow) to prevent movement of the fingers key is assigned to the enabled "Ψ ,, or" «" f 0 or "t corresponding to the long vowel» vowel input π original position during any adjacent activated by touching the adjacent short vowel short vowels.

[0488] 例如,假如当选择“ f ^时只启用与《 f ”和“ f «对应的键区(标记为黄色),而不是启用4个相邻键区,如图69(11)所示,则可在移动手指从《 ψ «键区到《 4 w键区以选择《拿»的过程中触摸《 3T ”或《 3,,键区,从而使得短元音« 3T,,或《 3,,被激活,以致“ $ w不能被选择。 [0488] For example, if when you select "f ^ is enabled only when the" f "and" f «corresponding key region (marked yellow), instead of 4 adjacent the keypad is enabled, as shown in FIG 69 (11) , the finger can be moved from the "[Psi]« keypad to "4 w keypad to select" take »during touch" 3T "or" 3 ,, keypad, so that the short vowels «,, or 3T" 3 ,, is activated, so that the "$ w can not be selected.

[0489] 有时,存在在辅音之后紧接着必须输入独立元音(如“ srirf « (孟买))的情况。 [0489] Sometimes, there is a vowel followed must enter a separate (e.g., "srirf« (Bombay)) after the case of the consonant.

在这种情况下,在输入辅音之后自动显示依赖元音键盘布局的当前配置造成了依赖元音键盘布局必须通过触摸兀音输入启用键来改变成独立兀音键盘布局以输入独立兀音这样的不便。 In this case, the display automatically dependent vowel keyboard layout after entering the current configuration causes consonant vowel keyboard layout dependence must be enabled by a touch key input to change the tone Wu Wu into separate audio input to the keyboard layout so independent sound Wu inconvenient.

[0490] 然而,如上面针对辅音键盘布局所描述的,当触摸代表性字符键时,没有字符指定到代表性字符键的位置。 [0490] However, as described above for the keyboard layout consonant described, when the touch representative character key, the character is not specified to the position of the representative character keys. 这被用于另一个用途,即,将依赖元音键盘布局改变至独立元音键 This is used for another purpose, i.e., to change the keyboard layout will depend vowel to vowel keys independently

盘布局。 Disk layout. 即,根据当前配置,在《树”(孟买)的情况下,由于在执行《 IW «的辅音输 That is, according to the current configuration, in the case of the "tree" (Bombay), since the input consonant performed "IW« of

入之后,兀音输入键盘布局被改变为依赖兀音键盘布局,所以必须通过兀音输入启用键将 After the, Wu sound input keyboard layout is changed, it is necessary to enable the key to depend Wu Wu sound tone input via keyboard layouts

依赖元音输入键盘布局改变为独立元音键盘布局来输入独立元音《 f « ^然而,如图67 Dependent vowel input keyboard layout change is independent vowel input keyboard layout independent vowel "f« ^ However, in FIG. 67

所不,在辅音输入过程中,依赖兀音输入键盘布局可以改变为独立兀音输入键盘布局。 Do not, in the course of the input consonant, depending Wu sound input keyboard layout may be changed independently Wu voice input keyboard layout.

[0491] 例如,在通过触摸表示《 ¥ «所属的群组的代表性字符《 W ”的键(参考图67 (I))、在手指触摸状态下移动手指到《 1η的位置(参考图67(11))、返回手指到在虚拟键盘主屏幕上安排给》V ”的位置6201(参考图62(1)和图67(111))、并且从位置6201释放手指来输入《 W «之后,元音键盘布局改变为独立元音输入键盘布局。 [0491] For example, "(67 (the I) with reference to FIG.), Moving a finger to the finger in the touch state of the key" to mean "¥« group belongs to a representative character "W 1η by the touch position (see FIG. 67 after (11)), to return the finger to the arrangement on the virtual keyboard, the main screen to the "V" position 6201 (see FIG. 62 (a) and 67 (111)), and 6201 releases the finger from the position input "W«, vowel change the input keyboard layout keyboard layout as a separate vowel. 假如在图67(11)的状态下从《 ϊ «的位置释放手指,那么一旦如上所述输入《 Ϊ '',元音键盘布局就改 If the "finger release ϊ« position, as described above once the input "from the state in FIG. 67 (11) Ϊ '', to change the keyboard layout vowel

变到依赖元音输入键盘布局。 Dependent vowel is changed to the input keyboard layout. 因此,在这种情况下,《 f »的输入造成了必须触摸两次元 Therefore, in this case, "f» must touch input resulted in two yuan

音输入启用键以将已经改变到依赖元音输入键盘布局(参考图62 (II))的元音键盘布局改变到独立元音输入键盘布局(参考图62 (III))的不便。 Voice input key to enable the input has been changed to depend vowel keyboard layout (refer to FIG. 62 (II)) to change the keyboard layout vowel independent vowel input keyboard layout (refer to FIG. 62 (III)) inconvenience. 另外,当触摸代表性字符键时,没有字符指定给代表性字符键的位置,并且代表性字符键的位置另作他途。 Further, when the touch representative character keys, the position is not assigned to a representative character key character, and the position of the representative character keys to some other use. 在这种情况下,用附 In this case, the attachment

加符号(OO OO O-bindu, candrabindu, candra, nukta,和halant)中的任一个改变 Any plus sign (OO OO O-bindu, candrabindu, candra, nukta, and halant) a change in

• N • N

印地文辅音,并且启用辅音改变所需附加符号中的任一个的功能对应于该用途。 Hindi consonant, consonant and enable a change to any desired additional function symbols corresponding to the purpose. 例如,通过如图66所不在如图62所不的虚拟键盘上触摸表W »»所属群组的代表性字符《 »的键(参考图66(1))、在手指触摸状态下移动手指到《 Ϊ «的位置(参考图66(11))、返回手指到虚拟键盘主屏幕上安排“ W,,的位置6201 (参考图62(1)和图66(111))以显示五个辅音 For example, by the virtual keyboard 62 is not as shown in FIG. 66 does not touch the table W is »» representative belongs to a group of characters "» key (refer to FIG. 66 (1)), the finger moves the finger in the touch state to "Ϊ« position (see FIG. 66 (11)), the finger returns to the main screen virtual keyboard arrangement "W ,, position 6201 (see FIG. 62 (a) and 66 (111)) to display five consonants

补充符号(*"'* ''i'--bindu, candrabindu.* ^ a, nukta,和halant),移 Additional symbols (* " '*' 'i' -. Bindu, candrabindu * ^ a, nukta, and halant), shift

动手指到“ ° « (bindu)的位置,并且氛KV w ( bindu )的位置释放手指,《 mf «的第一个字符《 if,,被输入。 Finger to "°« (bindu) position and the atmosphere KV w (bindu) the position of the finger is released, "the first character MF« a "if ,, is input.

[0492] 输入用于兀音的字符符号的方法与辅音的情况相同。 [0492] A method for character input symbols Wu sound as in the case of the consonants. 例如,当输入意味着韩语 For example, when the input means Korean

“Ml”(英语“yes”)的“ ψ »时,首先输入《 ψ ” }然后元音键盘布局自动切换到依 "Of Ml" (English "Yes") of "when ψ», first enter "ψ"} is then automatically switched to the keyboard layout vowel by

赖兀音输入键盘布局,如图71所不,触摸兀音输入启用键(参考图71 (I))以在兀音输入启用键周围排列依赖元音(参考图71 (II)),并且在这种状态下,用户向上移动手指以选择“ t «,释放手指,然后在“candrabindu”指定的键上执行触摸-释放动作(参考图71 (IV)),导致《 T,,的输入。 Lai Wu sound input keyboard layout, FIG. 71 does not touch the key Wu voice input is enabled (refer to FIG. 71 (I)) In the voice input is enabled Wu dependent vowel keys arranged around (refer to FIG. 71 (II)), and in which state, the user moves a finger upward to select "t«, releases the finger, and then "candrabindu" performing a specified key on the touch - releasing operation (see FIG. 71 (IV)), resulting in "T ,, input.

[0493] 辅音互补符号可通过如图64 (V)和图64 (VI)所示在输入辅音时使用键扩展功能而输入或者可通过在键盘布局上的对应键上单独指定这样的辅音互补符号而输入。 [0493] FIG consonant complementary symbols by 64 (V) and 64 (VI) shown consonant complementary specify such a symbol is input using a separate key input when the extensions or by a consonant in the corresponding key on the keyboard layout and input.

[0494] 例如,辅音互补符号的任何一个可被指定给被指定有“candrabindu”的键之下的 [0494] For example, complementary consonant symbols may be assigned to any designated with a "candrabindu" key under

键,如在符号“ !:l (halant)”用来构成如图62 (I)所示的半辅音的情况中,或可在如图64 (V)和图64(VI)所示通过分配扩展功能给辅音键来输入辅音时同时输入,或者所有的辅音符号都指定给如图63 (VIII)所示的“candrabindu”的扩展区域。 Key, as the symbol ":! L (halant)" for constituting As shown in FIG 62 (I) in the case of semi-consonant, or in FIG. 64 (V) and 64 (VI) as shown by the distribution while the extensions to the input consonant key input consonant, consonant or all of the symbols are assigned to the FIG. 63 (VIII) "candrabindu" shown in the extended area. 这是利用了触摸式输入方法中的拖拉方法的优点。 This utilizes the advantages of the method of the touch drag input method.

[0495] 如上所述,结合辅音和元音的任何符号的位置和键指定能够为了方便用户而改变,并且下文中将描述详细使用。 [0495] As described above, in conjunction with any symbol consonants and vowels keys to specify the location and convenience for users can be changed, and use will hereinafter be described in detail. 通过通过印地文字符和字符符号的组合来输入在典型 In a typical input by combination of Hindi characters and character symbol

的计算机键盘上作为独立字符输入的诸如《 W,,之类的字符从而允许所有的印地文字符能够使用有限数量的键来输入也是当前配置的实情。 Such as a separate character input "W ,, like character so as to allow all Hindi characters on a computer keyboard can be used a limited number of keys to enter the truth is currently configured. 即,通过分别在输入《 W »和« T »之后输入符号“;:ucandra)”和“ V (halant)”来输入《 f »和'' % w ,并且由于《牙,,的输入通过组合“ cT »和《 J »而获得,所以通过输入*' ^ s ,输入“殳 That is, by separately enter "W is» and the input symbol after the «T» ";: ucandra)" and "V (halant)" input "F» and ''% w, and since the "input by the combination of teeth ,, "cT» and "J» is obtained, so that by entering * '^ s, enter "Shu

(halant)”和输入J w来输入“ W ”,因而,尽管通过一个键而不是通过组合形式来 (Halant) "and the input to the input J w" W ", and therefore, despite the adoption of a key rather than a combination of the form

输入在计算机键盘上作为独立字符输入的字符的方法是可能的,但本发明通过使感知字符位置变得容易并使用9个键来最小化手指移动距离而减少了感知键位置所耗费的时间,从而增强了输入便利性。 The computer keyboard as the input character independent character input methods are possible, but the present invention is by sensing the position of the character is easy to use and nine keys to minimize the movement distance of the finger to reduce the perceived time spent key positions, thereby enhancing the ease of input.

[0496]对于像贫m TT f那样不经常使用的字符,输入对应元音字符,然而输入candra [0496] For character image TT f m lean as infrequently used, corresponding to the input vowel, but input candra

符号。 symbol. 在另一方式下,具有candra符号的这些字符被分配给独立键。 In another embodiment, these characters have candra symbols are assigned to the individual keys. 或者这些字符可以通过将它们排列在对应元音字符周围并在用于该元音字符的键被选定时显示而使得这些字 These characters or words such that these may be arranged around them by the corresponding vowel and the vowel for displaying a character key is selected

符变得容易输入,如图73和74所示。 Breaks easily input, 73 and 74 shown in FIG. 相同地,像U; MIW那样不经常使用的字符被分 In the same manner as U; MIW as less frequently used characters are divided

配给独立键,并且提供了这些字符的容易的输入方法。 Dispensing individual keys, and provides an easy input of these characters. 或者这些字符可以通过将它们排列在对应元音字符周围并且在用于该元音字符的键被选定时显示而使得这些字符的输入变得容易。 These characters or they can be arranged around the corresponding vowel and the vowel for displaying a character key is selected such that these characters can be easily input.

[0497][第二十四实施例] [0497] [twenty-fourth embodiment]

[0498] 该实施例显示了元音激活键作为辅音扩展键的方法。 [0498] This example illustrates a method key extended vowel key activation as consonant. 如图75所示,在触摸辅音键以及触摸该辅音键的手指拖拉到元音激活键(7501)之后,与触摸的辅音键对应的五个辅音以双边对称的形式显示在元音激活键的周围。 As shown later, the finger touches the touch keys and the consonant consonant vowel key is activated to drag the key (7501) 75, the touch key corresponding to the consonant display activation five consonant vowel key in the form of bilateral symmetry around. 然后移动手指到要输入的辅音的键并且释放该手指以输入该辅音。 Then moving the finger to the input consonant key to release the finger and to the input consonant. 这种情况下,图18中所示同时输入韩语辅音和元音的相同步骤被应用到印地文。 In this case, while the input 18 shown in FIG Korean consonants and vowels are the same steps applied to the Hindi. 通过根据图75的步骤的印地文辅音的输入与图18所示的辅音和元音同时输入的韩语输入不同。 Different shown by consonants and vowels according Hindi consonant input step of FIG. 75 and FIG. 18 Korean input simultaneously input. 尽管存在这种不同,图75所示的印地文的输入法的优点是能够仅用9个键输入这些辅音和元音。 Despite this difference, the advantages Hindi input method shown in FIG. 75 is a key input is possible only 9 of these consonants and vowels. [0499] 本发明的输入系统不仅可应用到移动设备,还可以应用到有望引导泛在时代的智能电视。 Input system [0499] The present invention is applicable not only to a mobile device, the guide can also be applied to the expected times of the ubiquitous intelligent television. 在智能电视上的应用将给智能电视的用户接口提供解决方案。 User applications on Smart TV Smart TV interface will provide a solution. 关于用户的焦点不在输入设备,而在屏幕上这一点,智能电视相较于智能电话具有额外的限制,因为其屏幕比智能电话大,并且该屏幕离用户远。 The focus is not on the user input device, and at this point on the screen, Smart TV compared to the smart phone has additional restrictions, because its screen is larger than a smart phone, and the screen away from the user. 由于智能电视的这种限制,在不同层面需要与传统接口不同的新的用户接口。 Because of this limitation Smart TV, at different levels need different interfaces of traditional new user interface. 利用语音识别或手势识别的新的输入方法便是例子。 The new method of using voice recognition or gesture input recognition are examples. 这些方法中的每一种也都有限制。 Each of these methods also have limitations. 对于语音识别,其在噪音条件下(当电视音量高时)可以使用。 For speech recognition, which in noisy conditions (high when the TV volume) may be used. 并且对于手势识别,其在黑暗情况下使用有困难。 And for gesture recognition, which used in the case of the dark is difficult. 这些方法的另一个缺陷在于他们不如由简单的手指活动控制的传统摇控器便利。 Another drawback of these methods is that they are not as controlled by simple finger movements conventional remote control convenience. 因此用于智能电视的输入方法没有标准化,并且Π (用户接口)被公认为是智能电视的竞争力。 Thus for an input method is not standardized smart TV, and [pi (user interface) is considered to be competitive in the smart TV. 在这方面,本发明的输入系统将提供满足智能电视当前所需的用户接口的方法。 In this regard, the input system of the present invention provides a method for Smart TV user interface to meet the currently required.

[0500] 本发明的信息输入系统不仅可应用于单词输入,还可以用于某些功能命令的执行。 [0500] The information input system of the present invention is applicable not only to enter a word, it may also be used in order to perform certain functions.

[0501] 这里功能命令的执行包括智能电话、平板PC和台式PC中的信道选择、菜单选择和某些程序的运行。 Execution [0501] Here command functions, including smart phones, tablet PC and desktop PC in channel selection, menu selection and run some programs.

[0502] 尤其是当应用到智能电视的遥控器时,本发明更有优势。 [0502] Especially when applied to a smart TV remote control, an advantage of the present invention. 在下文中,提供了将本发明应用到智能电视的遥控器的情况的示例。 Hereinafter, an example of the case where the present invention is applied to a smart TV remote control.

[0503] 本实施例显示了将本发明第十五实施例中所阐述的预测文本输入系统应用到智能电视的遥控器的情况。 [0503] This example shows a case where the predictive text input system as set forth in a fifteenth embodiment of the embodiment of the present invention is applied to a smart TV remote control. 在第十五实施例中阐述的预测文本输入法可被应用于智能电视的文本输入法。 Predictive text input method set forth in the embodiment may be applied to the fifteenth embodiment of the text input smart TV. 智能电话的较小的屏幕被智能电视的较大的屏幕取代,在这点上两个实施例不同,但程序性的事项是相同的。 Smaller screen smartphone substituted smart TV larger screen, different embodiments two embodiments in this regard, but procedural matters are the same. 在智能电视的屏幕上显示虚拟键盘和输入窗口。 Virtual keyboard and input window displayed on the smart TV screen. 虚拟键盘对应于遥控器的小键盘。 Corresponding to the virtual keyboard of the remote control keypad. 由于9-键小键盘能够在眼睛因该小键盘的策略反馈而聚焦于屏幕上的同时用手指进行操作,所以在键输入之后无需将眼睛的焦点从小键盘移动到屏幕以便检查屏幕上的结果。 Since 9--key keypad can be in the eye due to the policy of the keypad is focused on the feedback on the screen simultaneously operated with the fingers, so after the key input is not necessary to move the focus of the eye from the keypad to the screen in order to check the results on the screen. 因此,很容易完成文本输入。 Therefore, it is easy to complete text entry. 另外,本发明的文本输入系统提供智能电视的控制方法。 Further, the text input system of the present invention provides a method for controlling the smart TV.

[0504] 由于智能电视的屏幕远离用户,所以用户不能触摸屏幕上的图标或菜单项。 [0504] Since the smart TV screen away from the user, so the user can not touch the icon or menu item on the screen. 因此,用与传统电视的遥控器中一样的移动键来使用逐级往下样式的菜单系统。 Thus, as with the conventional television remote control keys to move progressively down style menu using the system. 或者在建立与PC的windows系统中一样的⑶I之后再使用定点任务(pointing job)。 Or re-use the pointing task (pointing job) after the establishment of the same with the PC windows system ⑶I. 前一种情况(逐级往下样式)在应用到智能电视时有限制,因为智能电视不仅仅是用于看广播频道,且还具有类似计算机的环境。 In the former case (step by step down style) there are limitations when applied to smart TV, because TV is not just for smart watch broadcast channel, and also has computer-like environment. 后一种情况(GU1-窗口样式)还不受欢迎,因为定点任务不能用鼠标完成,其涉及从远处精确控制光标的复杂工作。 The latter case (GU1- window style) is also undesirable, because the task can not be designated with the mouse is completed, which involves complicated work precisely controlled from a remote cursor.

[0505] 在该背景下,本发明的输入系统提供了一种不仅会使文本输入方便,还使智能电视的控制变得方便的用于定点任务的按钮按压动作的方法。 [0505] In this context, the input system of the present invention provides a method of text input will not only convenient, but also that the control of the smart TV button press action becomes convenient point for the task.

[0506] 在代表⑶I的PC的windows系统中,通过表示为图标的菜单项或执行图像来执行所有命令。 [0506] In ⑶I behalf of PC windows system, in order to execute a menu item or icon image to execute all commands represented. 通常,这些菜单项或图标附有标题或标签。 Typically, these menu items or icons with titles or labels. 在该实施例中,通过输入这些标题或标签来执行菜单项或图标。 In this embodiment, an icon or menu item is performed by inputting the titles or labels.

[0507] 参考附图来阐述这些实施例的详情。 [0507] with reference to the accompanying drawings to illustrate the details of these embodiments.

[0508] 图94是显示用于该实施例的系统结构的方框图。 [0508] FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing the system configuration of this embodiment is used.

[0509] 本发明的信息输入系统包括输入单元(10010)、选择信息存储单元(10020)、选择信息提取单元(10030)和最终选择部件(10040)。 [0509] The information input system of the present invention includes an input unit (10010), selection information storage means (10020), selection information extraction unit (10030) and final selection means (10040). [0510] 输入单元(10010)从输入设备接收用户选择的按键的信息。 (10010) information [0510] from the input unit receives a user input device of the selected key.

[0511] 输入设备可以在诸如智能电话的设备的显示器上实现。 [0511] The input device may be implemented on a display device such as a smart phone. 或者其可以作为类似智能电视的遥控器的单独设备而提供。 Or it can be used as a separate device similar to a smart TV remote control is provided.

[0512] 在该实施例中,输入设备的特性是该设备具有多个键,并且对于某些键而言被分派多组信息。 [0512] In this embodiment, the characteristics of the input device is a device having a plurality of keys, and a plurality of sets of information are assigned for certain key terms.

[0513] 输入设备的示例显示在图76中。 Example [0513] The input device 76 is shown in FIG. 如同把“I”、 “丁”、“a”、“b”、“c”和“I”分派给按“ I”键,键-“ I”、“2”、“3”、“4”、“5”、“6”、“7”、“8”和“9”中的每一个均被分派 As the "I", "D", "a", "b", "c" and "I" is assigned to press the "I" key, the key - "I", "2", "3", "4" , "5", "6", "7", each of the "8" and "9" are assigned

多组信息。 Multiple sets of information.

[0514] 该输入设备可使用仅通过触摸来检测选择的触控板来实现。 [0514] The input device may be implemented using a touch panel by touching only the selected detected. 该输入设备也可以用通过每个键的按压动作来检测选择的可按压键来实现。 The input device may also be achieved by detecting a selected action by pressing each key button may be pressed.

[0515] 在选择信息存储单元中(10020),为了执行目标功能而存储选信息。 [0515] In the (10020) selection information storage unit, in order to perform certain functions selected stored information.

[0516] 通过选择信息执行的目标功能包括广播信道、各种程序和包含执行命令的命令。 [0516] includes a broadcast channel, various programs, and a command containing command information by selecting a target function execution.

[0517] 尽管如何体现该选择信息的方法是由生产厂商决定的,但可取的是将广播信道的名称用于信道的选择以及将程序的名称用于程序的执行。 [0517] While how to embody the method of selection information is determined by the manufacturer, but preferably is a name of a broadcast channel for selecting a channel and the name of the program for executing a program.

[0518] 例如,假如在智能电视的频道中有一个“KBS TV Replay" ( “KBS TV重播”)频道,那么可取的是使用“KBS TV R印lay”作为选择信息。 [0518] For example, if a smart television channel "KBS TV Replay" ( "KBS TV replay") channel, then it is preferable to use "KBS TV R printed lay" as the selection information.

[0519] 对于另一个示例,为了执行微软的“MS word”(品牌名称)程序,可取的是使用“MSword”作为选择信息。 [0519] For another example, in order to perform the Microsoft "MS word" (brand name) procedures, it is desirable to use "MSword" as the selection information.

[0520] 选择信息提取单元(10030)从键输入信息中提取被判断为用户想要的信息的选择信息。 [0520] selection information extraction means (10030) extracts the information determined as desired by the user selection information from the key input information. 并且其将该选择信息显示在屏幕上。 And the selection information which is displayed on the screen.

[0521] 提取方法是选择存储在选择信息存储单元(10020)中的选择信息并且利用从用户输入的键组合演绎出的选择信息进行部分匹配。 [0521] extraction method selecting selection information stored in the selection information storing means (10020) and with the deduced composition from the key selection information input by the user for partial matches.

[0522] 在下文中将再次解释更详尽的情况。 [0522] explained in more detail below in the case of again.

[0523] 一旦选择信息被提取,选择信息提取单元(10030)便将提取的选择信息显示在屏幕上。 [0523] Once the selected information is extracted, the selection information extracting unit (10030) put the extracted selection information displayed on the screen.

[0524] 显示方法可以是为所提取的选择信息的列表打开新窗口或者通过改变图标的状态将选择信息通知给用户,其可以是GUI上对应图标的颜色的改变。 [0524] display method may be open a new window to the list of the extracted selection information or by changing the state of the icon selection information to the user, which can be changed corresponding to the color of the icon of the GUI.

[0525] 在这种情况下,假如选择信息包括多个条目,那么可取的是提供分类信息和选择信息以便用户在最终选择步骤中使用它。 [0525] In this case, if the selected information includes a plurality of entries, it is preferable to provide class information, and the selection information for the user to use it in the final selection step.

[0526] 可取的是,让用户通过使用被分配给输入设备的每个键的信息来选择分类信息,例如字母、韩语辅音/元音或数字。 [0526] Preferably, so that the user is assigned to the information by using each of the key input device selects classification information, such as letters, Korean consonants / vowels or numbers.

[0527] 最终选择单元从提取的选择信息中提取最终选择的选择信息。 [0527] The final selection means the selection information extracted from the finally selected selection information extracted.

[0528] 提取最终选择信息的方法可以是进入到最终选择模式,并且提取根据用户通过输入设备输入的分类信息所选择的选择信息。 Method [0528] extracts the final selection information may be entered into the final selection mode, and extracts the selection information according to the classification information of the user input through the input device selected.

[0529] 假如提取的选择信息只有一条,那么不需要通过最终选择单元。 [0529] If the extracted information is only a selection, then no final selection by means. 另外,假如在一定时间段内用户没有输入,那么提取的选择信息可以自动作为最终选择信息。 Further, if the user does not enter a period of time, the selection information may be automatically extracted as the final selection information.

[0530] 通过这种方式提取了选择信息之后,执行与其对应的功能。 After the [0530] selection information extracted in this way, the function corresponding thereto. 因而,用户可以通过简单的键输入将用户想要的信息提供给像智能电视那样的设备。 Thus, the user can simply input the key information the user wants to provide such a device like a smart TV.

[0531] 图94显示了该实施例方法的流程图。 [0531] FIG. 94 shows a flow chart of the method of this embodiment. [0532] 首先,输入设备(10010)从输入设备接收用户选择的键信息。 [0532] First, the input device (10,010) from the key information selection device receives the user input.

[0533] 输入设备可以在诸如智能电话的设备的显示器上实现。 [0533] The input device may be implemented on a display device such as a smart phone. 或者其可以作为如同智能电视的遥控器一样的单独设备提供。 Or it may be provided as a smart TV remote control as a separate device. 该输入设备具有多个键,并且某些键被分派有多组信息。 The input device having a plurality of keys, and some keys are assigned a plurality of sets of information. 这与前述内容相同。 This is the same with the foregoing.

[0534] 输入设备可以检测包括触控板类型和按压键类型的多种类型的选择。 [0534] The input device may include various types of detecting the type of the touch panel and push button type selection. 这也与前述内容相同。 This is also the same as the foregoing.

[0535] 选择信息提取单元(10030)从键输入信息提取被判断为用户想要的信息的选择信息。 [0535] selection information extraction means (10030) extracts the input information from the key information is judged as desired by the user selection information. 并且在屏幕上显示该选择信息(10002)。 And displaying the selection information (10002) on the screen.

[0536] 提取方法是选择存储在选择信息存储单元(10020)中的选择信息并且利用从用户输入的键组合演绎出的选择信息进行部分匹配。 [0536] extraction method selecting selection information stored in the selection information storing means (10020) and with the deduced composition from the key selection information input by the user for partial matches. 这与前述内容相同。 This is the same with the foregoing.

[0537] 假如用户输入单个键,那么提取指定给该键的选择信息。 [0537] If the user inputs a single bond, then extracted assigned to the key selection information. 或者提取从指定给该键的信息开始的选择信息。 Or selection information extracted from the key information assigned to the start. 假如输入多个键,那么根据键序列组合指定给这些键的信息,然后提取与从该键序列演绎出的组合信息部分匹配的信息。 If a plurality of input keys, the specified information according to the key sequence combination of these bonds, and then extracts information from the matching key sequence deduced combination information portion.

[0538] 显示方法可以是为所提取的选择信息的列表打开新窗口或者通过改变图标的状态将选择信息通知给用户,其可以是在GUI上的对应图标的颜色改变。 [0538] display method may be open a new window to the list of the extracted selection information or by changing the state of the icon selection information to the user, which may be a color change corresponding to an icon on the GUI. 假如选择信息包括多个条目,那么为了让用户在最终选择步骤使用,可以和选择信息一起提供分类信息。 If the selection information includes a plurality of entries, then in order to allow users to use the final selection step, the selection information can be provided together with the classification information. 这与前述内容相同。 This is the same with the foregoing.

[0539] 可取的是,使用户通过使用指定给输入设备的每个键的诸如字母、韩语辅音/元音或数字的信息来选择分类信息。 [0539] Preferably, the user designate such as letters to each key of the input device by using the Korean consonant / vowel or digital information to select the classification information.

[0540] 假如提取的选择信息只有一条,并且在一定时间内用户没有输入(10003),那么最终选择单元(10040)将所提取的选择信息作为最终选择信息(10007),并且使得与最终选择信息对应的功能被执行(10006)。 [0540] If the extracted selection information is only one, and the user does not input (10003) for a certain time, then the final selection means (10040) the extracted selection information as the final selection information (10007), and such that the final selection information a corresponding function is performed (10006). 该方法可按照下面的选择程序有选择地应用,在该选择程序中,尽管所提取的选择信息只有一个,也在最终选择步骤中提取该选择信息。 The method may be selectively applied according to the following selection procedure, the selection procedure, although the selection information to select the extracted information is only one, are extracted in the final selection step.

[0541] 假如选择信息有多组(在单个组可用的情况下),最终选择单元(10040)识别是否选择了用于最终选择模式的键(10004)。 [0541] If multiple sets of selection information (in the case of a single set of available), final selection means (10040) identifies whether the selected key (10,004) for final selection mode. 假如开始最终选择模式,那么其接收最终选择(10005)并执行与该最终选择对应的功能(10006)。 If the final selection mode starts, then the final selection reception (10005) and performs the function corresponding to the finally selected (10006).

[0542] 这里,假如用户通过输入设备输入分类信息,那么提取与该分类信息对应的选择信息作为最终选择信息。 [0542] Here, if the user input through the input device classification information, then extracts the category information corresponding to the selection information as the final selection information.

[0543] 一旦提取了最终选择信息,就自动执行与其对应的功能。 [0543] Once the final selection information is extracted, automatically performing a function corresponding thereto. 或者通过输入设备上的被指定为功能切换键的独立键来执行该功能。 Or is designated to perform this function independently of the function key switch key on an input device by.

[0544] 根据屏幕上的专门示例来解释更详尽内容。 [0544] SUMMARY be explained in more detail according to exemplary specialized on the screen.

[0545] 图76显示了在本发明中使用的输入设备的实例。 [0545] FIG. 76 shows an example of an input device used in the present invention.

[0546]在图 76 中,“1”、“2”、“3”、“4”、“6”、“7”、“8”和“9”键被分配多组信息,而“5”键 [0546] In FIG. 76, "1", "2", "3", "4", "6", "7", "8" and "9" key is assigned a plurality of sets of information, and "5" key

被分配数字“5”和“执行功能”。 It is assigned the number "5" and "executive function."

[0547] 例如,假如要执行作为图77中电视屏幕上的图标之一的“Facebook”,那么与“def”的第一个字母对应的“def”键被按下,如图78所示。 [0547] For example, if one of the icons to be executed on the television screen "Facebook" as in FIG. 77, and then the "def" corresponding to the first letter "def" key is pressed, as shown in FIG 78. 然后用于“Facebook”的图标(7901)被激活为图79所示的反选图像,因为在按下“def”键时,没有其他会被激活的图标。 Then icon (7901) for "Facebook" is activated as the unselected image shown in FIG. 79, when pressed, because the "def" key, no other icon will be activated.

[0548] 然后,假如被分配鼠标执行功能的“5”键如图80所示被按下,或者假如经过一定时间间隔,则如图81所示执行“Facebook”。 [0548] Then, if the mouse is assigned to perform the functions of the "5" key is pressed as shown in FIG. 80, or if after a certain time interval, as shown in FIG 81 performs the "Facebook." [0549] 为了说明该实施例,图76在屏幕上采用有限数量的图标,并且通过键的单次按压实现目标图标的选择。 [0549] To illustrate this embodiment, FIG. 76 uses a limited number of icons on the screen, and to achieve a target icon selected by pressing a single key.

[0550] 事实上,会被应用到智能电视的windows系统中的图标和菜单项预期会比图76中显示的更多。 [0550] In fact, more windows will be applied to the system Smart TV icons and menu items than expected to show in Figure 76. 尽管如此,图标和菜单项的数量不超过100个。 Nevertheless, the number of icons and menu items no more than 100. 因此假如用于图标和菜单项的标题或标签使用根据预测文本输入法的9键键盘来输入,那么这些图标或菜单项的选择可用大约两个键输入来选择。 Thus, if the title or label for the icons and menu items to use to enter text input method according to the prediction of 9-key keyboard, the selection key input is available about these two icon or menu item is selected. 这意味着将光标精确放置于在windows系统中运行的图标或菜单项上的定点任务可用两个键按压动作来实现。 This means that the precise placement of the cursor on the run in the windows system icons or menu items on the designated task can be used to achieve two key pressing action.

[0551] 如上所述,该实施例的必要部分在于预测文本输入法不仅可以应用到文本输入,还可以应用到与文本字符串对应的菜单项或命令图标的标题的输入。 [0551] As described above, essential parts of this embodiment is that the predictive text input method can be applied not only to the text input, the input can also be applied to a text string corresponding to a menu item or command icon titles. 为此,处于小键盘中心的“5”键可以实现菜单项执行的功能和各种额外功能。 To this end, the keypad is in the center of the "5" key function can be achieved and a variety of additional functions performed by the menu item.

[0552] 例如,假如在输入菜单项或命令图标之前能够通过按压“5”键在屏幕上显示适于该情形的隐藏菜单,那么用户操作智能电视的便利性可被进一步增强。 [0552] For example, if the previous menu item or command input icons can be adapted to the case by pressing a hidden menu "5" key displayed on the screen, then the smart TV operating convenience for the user can be further enhanced. 通过将声音调节和频道选择放在隐藏菜单项中,当按下“5”键时,这些可以显示在屏幕上,并且可以被控制。 And the sound by adjusting the channel selection on the hidden menu item, when the "5" key, which can be displayed on the screen, and can be controlled.

[0553] 图82到图84中显示了智能电视上电影的屏幕。 [0553] FIGS. 82 - 84 are shown on the smart TV movie screen. 在屏幕上没有菜单项或命令图标。 No menu item or command icons on the screen. 假如按下“5”键(图83),那么隐藏菜单项(可显示亮度控制、频道选择、声音调节或打开/关闭这些选项的设置菜单)被显示(图84)并且可被控制而无需用于声音调节或频道选择的独立按钮。 If pressing the "5" key (FIG. 83), then the hidden menu item (displayable brightness control, channel selection, sound adjustment or on / off setting options menu) is displayed (FIG. 84) and can be controlled without the use to adjust the sound or the independent channel selection buttons.

[0554] 为了阐述该方法,仅选择声音调节菜单作为隐藏菜单项。 [0554] To illustrate the method, only the sound adjustment selection menu as a hidden menu item. 这些使用“5”键的功能操作使得手指停留在9键区域内,并且执行用于控制智能电视的动作。 The use of "5" of the functional operation key such that the key 9 stay in the finger area, and the operation is performed for controlling the smart TV. 因此,眼睛的焦点始终位于屏幕上,因为手指能够容易地分清围绕“5”键的键的位置。 Therefore, the focus of the eye is always on the screen, because the fingers can easily distinguish positions around key "5" key of.

[0555] 在图76中,为了应用该实施例到遥控器上,字母、韩语字符和数字被压印在每个键上。 [0555] In FIG. 76, in order to apply this embodiment to the remote control, letters, numbers, and Korean characters are imprinted on each key. 事实上,包括韩国在内的许多国家使用本国语言和外国语言(主要是英语)两者,并且有为智能电视上的菜单项或命令图标显示不仅本国语言的多种情况。 In fact, many countries, including South Korea, including the use of the national language and a foreign language (mainly English) both, and promising a menu item or command icon on the Smart TV displays a variety of circumstances not only the national language. 甚至数字和符号也被包含在菜单项和命令图标中。 Even numbers, and symbols are also included in the menu items and command icons. 顾及这种情形并且使得菜单项和命令图标的标题根据预测文本输入法来输入的键输入序列的原理在表3和表4中不出。 This situation and taking into account the principle that the title menu items and icons to enter the command in accordance with the predictive text input is not key input sequence in Tables 3 and 4.

[0556] [表3] [0556] [Table 3]

Figure CN103608751AD00541

[0557][表4] [0557] [Table 4]

Figure CN103608751AD00551

[0558] 如表3所示,用于预测文本输入法的键映射(与键对应的字符集合)不仅包括字母还包括韩语辅音、元音和数字。 [0558] As shown in Table 3, key map for predictive text input method (set of characters corresponding to the key) further comprises not only letters Korean consonants, vowels and numbers. 表4显示了与文本输入和菜单项(或图标)的执行对应的键序列。 Table 4 shows the implementation of the text input key sequences and menu item (or icon) corresponding.

[0559] 假如根据预测文本输入法输入韩语单词,则其键序列对应于“1636”。 [0559] If the input of Korean text input word based on the prediction, then the key sequence corresponding to "1636." 假如按完该键序列,那么根据本发明的第十三实施例在预测单词候选列表中列出,并且可被选择。 If the End key press sequence, are listed in the candidate list of predicted words that the present invention according to the thirteenth embodiment, and may be selected. 对于英语单词“open”,假如按完键序列“6726”,那么其在预测单词候选列表中列出,并且可被选择和输入。 For the English word "Open", if "6726", then it is listed in the candidate list of predicted words End key press sequence, and can be selected and entered.

[0560] 对于执行不同于文本输入的菜单项或命令图标的情况,诸如“空格”等不可能输入的某些字符在键序列中被忽略,如在表4 “KBS TV replay”的情况中。 [0560] Unlike the case of performing the text input menu item or command icon, some characters such as "space" and the like can not be ignored in the input key sequence, as in the case of Table 4 "KBS TV replay" of. 利用这个键序列,其可以用9键执行。 Using this key sequence, which may be performed in the 9 key. 同样地,对于包括(连字符)的诸如“KBS-1 1234567890”的菜单项,在键序列中忽视符号。 Likewise, for the menu item comprises (hyphen) such as "KBS-1 1234567890", ignoring the symbols in the key sequence. 这些菜单项可用9键执行。 These menu items are available 9 button to execute.

[0561] 为了简化数字输入,在键序列中“5”可被忽略,或者可以通过长按该键来进行输入,因为输入“5”具有额外的功能。 [0561] In order to simplify the digital input, the key sequence in the "5" may be ignored, or may be entered in the key through a long, since the input "5" having additional functionality. 对于包括数字“5”的菜单项,存在使该菜单项被执行的两种键序列。 For a number "5" of the menu item, so that the presence of these binding sequence of the menu item is executed. 一种键序列利用长按该键,另一种是忽视“5”。 Key sequence using one kind of press the button, the other is ignored. "5."

[0562] 在图76中,仅用一个键按压动作来运行命令图标。 [0562] In FIG. 76, only one key pressing operation to run the command icons. 然而,存在菜单项或命令图标具有相同键序列的情形。 However, there is a menu item or command icon with the situation the same key sequence.

[0563] 例如,在图76中“KBS TV r印lay”和“KBS News 24”就前三个数字而言共用相同键序列。 [0563] For example, "KBS TV r printed lay" and "KBS News 24" share the same key sequence is the first three terms of number 76 in FIG. 因此,对于增强该实施例的便利性而言,为了分开这两个菜单项,输入“KBS”是不正确的。 Therefore, for enhancing the convenience of this embodiment, in order to separate these two menu items, enter "KBS" it is incorrect. 对于相同键序列的这些菜单项,执行这些菜单项的简单方法从图76以及随后的图中显示。 These menu items for the same key sequence, a simple method of performing the menu items displayed in FIG. 76 and subsequent figures.

[0564] 如图87所示,假如输入“K”,那么激活3个命令图标。 [0564] As shown in FIG 87, if the input "K", 3 icons that activate command. (图88) “KBS TV replay^和“KBS News 24”被激活(如图88所示由围绕所述图标的粗体白色边界表明),因为他们的键序列以“K”开始。同样地,“Log out”(在韩语中,其标题为“至]0卜$”)菜单被激活,因为其以韩语辅音“己”开头。这些激活的菜单项被分配数字分类信息。利用这些数字,键输入序列被减少。减少键输入方法如下。 (FIG. 88) "KBS TV replay ^ and" KBS News 24 "is activated (FIG. 88 indicated by bold surrounding the white boundaries indicate the icon), as their key sequence" Start K. "Likewise, "Log out" (in Korean, entitled "to] 0 Bu $") menu is activated, because it begins with Korean consonants "own." the active menu item is assigned a digital classified information. Using these numbers, keys the input sequence is reduced. reduced key input is as follows.

[0565] 假如要在图88所示的激活了的菜单项中选择“KBS News 24”来观看,那么按下用于菜单项执行的功能键“5”键来停止键输入(图89)。 [0565] If activated to FIG. 88 shown in the selected menu item "KBS News 24" to watch, then press a function key "5" key to perform menu item to stop input (FIG. 89) key. 然后菜单项的标题消失,并且代替标题的数字出现以备选择(图90)。 Then title menu items disappear, and instead to prepare the title selection number appears (FIG. 90). 假如在这种状态下按下“2”键,由于数字“2” (8802)标记在“KBS News 24”菜单项上(图91),则执行“KBS News 24”(图92)。 If in this state, pressing the "2" key, since the number "2" (8802) labeled "KBS News 24" menu item (Figure 91), perform the "KBS News 24" (FIG. 92). 因此,提供了使用3个键按压动作执行菜单项的简单方式。 Therefore, it provides a simple way to use three key presses to perform the action menu item.

[0566] 假如当完成用于菜单项的选择的第一个键输入时,激活菜单项的数目超过10个(8个是可取的,因为利用除了“O”键和“5”键之外的数字键可选择的项目为8个),那么可取的是在设置中使菜单项上的编号无效以便用户做更多的键输入。 [0566] provided that when a first key for selecting the menu item is completed the input, the number of active menu items over 10 (eight is desirable, because in addition to using the "O" key and the "5" key key to select the item number eight), it is preferably provided on the manipulation of the menu item number for the user to do more invalid key input. 而且,假如在没有数字与激活的菜单项关联时用户按下“5”键,那么就在屏幕上显示消息“more key input isneeded.(需要更多的键输入)”。 Further, if when not associated with the activation of the menu item number user presses the "5" key, then the message is displayed on the screen "more key input isneeded. (Require more key input)."

[0567] 总的来说,从图76到图81和从图86到图92,假如在完成用于菜单项的选择的键输入时激活的菜单项只有一个,那么“5”键就作为执行该激活的菜单项的功能键。 [0567] In general, from FIG. 76 to FIG. 81 and FIG. 92 from FIG. 86 to, if activated upon completion of the key input for selecting the menu item of the menu items is only one, then the "5" key as the execution the activation of the function key menu items. 假如激活的菜单项超过2个,那么“5”键就作为激活用于最终选择的菜单项的功能键,该最终选择是通过键输入选择被激活的菜单项的数字的过程。 If the activated menu item more than two, then the "5" key as a function key for activating menu items finally selected, the final selection is activated to select the menu item numbers through the key input process.

[0568] 在触摸型输入设备中,“5”键的该功能类似于该过程。 [0568] In the touch type input device, the function "5" key is similar to the process. 在触摸型输入设备中,假如根据预测文本输入法输入文本,并且要输入的单词是预测候选单词列表中的第一个,那么仅通过触摸“5”键输入该词。 In the touch type input device, if the input text according to the predictive text input, and a word to be input is a first predicted word candidate list, the "5" key input only by touching the word. 假如不是第一个,那么手指首先触摸“5”键,然后移动到要输入的候选词指定的键。 If not the first, then the first finger touch "5" key, then move to the candidate word you want to enter the specified key.

[0569] 如图76所示,遥控器的小键盘具有类似“5”键的环形的“O”键,这使得手指容易分辨“O”键的位置。 [0569] As shown in FIG. 76, the remote control having a keypad similar to the "5" key ring "O" key, which makes it easy to distinguish the finger position "O" key. 该形状不限于环形。 This annular shape is not limited. 假如可与其他周围的键相区别,那么就“O”键和“5”键而言可接受其他形状或形式。 If may be distinguished from other surrounding keys, the "O" key and the "5" key is acceptable for other shapes or forms. 假如“O”键作为用于针对激活的窗口的“返回”键或“关闭”键的功能键,那么“O”键使得运行/完成程序变得更加便利。 If the "O" key for the active window as a "Return" key or "off" function of the bond, the "O" key such that the operation / completion process becomes more convenient. 因此,假如使用9键来执行程序,那么该程序的控制在9键内完成,并且完全分派给手指,而眼睛则固定在屏幕上。 Thus, if the key 9 used to execute the program, the control program in the key 9 is completed, and completely assigned to a finger, and eyes fixed on the screen. 假如不再需要运行程序,那么眼睛没有必要盯着屏幕,并且“O”键的控制也不是问题,尽管这涉及手指在9键区外的移动。 If you no longer need to run the program, so there is no need eyes staring at the screen, and the "O" key control is not an issue, even though this involves moving your finger outside the 9 keypad. 因此,隐藏或完成程序的“O”键功能可以使得遥控器的便利性更强。 Thus, to complete the process of hiding or "O" key may cause the remote control function of convenience more.

[0570] 如上所述,假如本发明的输入系统应用到遥控器,并且取用命令执行功能而非文本输入功能,那么智能电视的UI结构变得更加简单和便利。 [0570] As described above, if the input system of the present invention is applied to the remote controller, access and command execution, not a text input function, then the structure of the smart TV UI simpler and more convenient. 进一步,假如在小键盘上在9个键上方和下方安装额外的六个键,并且将该额外的6个键用于智能电视的控制,那么可用便利的方式执行智能电视的各种功能。 Further, if on the keypad 9 keys above and below install additional six keys, and the additional six keys to control smart TV, then the available convenient way to perform various functions of smart TV. 例如,可将文本输入模式和菜单项执行模式之间的切换键的功能分配给所述额外的键。 For example, the key switch function between text input mode and execution mode menu items may be assigned to the additional bond.

[0571] 本发明的方法还具体表现为在计算机可读记录介质上的计算机可读代码。 [0571] The method of the present invention is also embodied as computer readable code on a computer-readable recording medium. 计算机可读记录介质是可以存储以后可由计算机系统读取的数据的任何数据存储设备。 The computer-readable recording medium is any data storage device that can store data after read by a computer system. 计算机可读记录介质的实例包括只读存储器(ROM)、随机存取存储器(RAM)、CD-ROM、磁带、软盘、光学数据存储设备等。 The computer-readable recording medium include read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), CD-ROM, magnetic tapes, floppy disks, optical data storage devices. 计算机可读记录介质还可在网络耦合的计算机系统上分布,以便计算机可读代码以分布式形式存储和执行。 The computer-readable recording medium can also be on a distributed network coupled computer systems so that the computer readable code is stored and executed in a distributed fashion. [0572] 工业应用性 [0572] Industrial Applicability

[0573] 本发明可被用作最小化数字设备的输入设备。 [0573] The present invention may be used as an input device to minimize the digital device.

Claims (58)

1.一种用于通过使用扩展键输入信息的系统,所述系统包括: 输入单元,其具有多个分区并检测由用户从所述多个分区之中选择的分区;和输入分析单元,其用于向所述多个分区分配相应的信息并分析出如果所述输入单元检测到所述多个分区中的任何一个已被选定,则输入被分配给所选定的所述分区的信息, 其中,所述输入分析单元将所述扩展键分配给所述多个分区中的至少一个,并且如果所述扩展键被选定,则所述输入分析单元将新的信息分配给包括由所述扩展键定义的分区的扩展区。 1. A method for the key input by using the extended system information, the system comprising: an input unit having a plurality of partitions and selected by the user is detected from among the plurality of partitions partitions; and an input analysis unit for allocation to the plurality of partitions, and analyzing the information corresponding to the input unit detects if the plurality of partitions to any one has been selected, the input information is assigned to the partition selected , wherein the input analysis unit of said plurality of extended key assigned to the at least one partition, and if the extended key is selected, then the input analysis unit assigned to the new information comprises the said extended partition key definition extension region.
2.根据权利要求1所述的系统,其还包括用于将被分配给所选定的所述分区的所述信息输出到屏幕上的输出单元。 2. The system according to claim 1, further comprising said information of said partition will be assigned to the selected output to the output unit on the screen.
3.根据权利要求1所述的系统,其中,所述输入单元包括键盘。 3. The system according to claim 1, wherein said input means includes a keyboard.
4.根据权利要求1所述的系统,其中,所述输入单元包括触摸传感器。 4. The system according to claim 1, wherein the input unit includes a touch sensor.
5.根据权利要求4所述的系统,其中,所述输入单元包括所述触摸传感器和在所述触摸传感器下面的压力传感器,且当用户按压所述触摸传感器时,所述输入单元根据在所述触摸传感器向下移动时通过所述压力传感器检测压力的方法来检测所述用户是否已经按压。 5. The system of claim 4, wherein the input unit comprises a touch sensor and a pressure sensor below the touch sensor, and when the user presses the touch sensor, the input unit according to the said touch down sensor detects whether the user has pressed by a method of the pressure sensor detects the pressure moves.
6.根据权利要求4所述的系统,其中,所述输入单元根据触摸、按压、或触摸和释放检测所述分区是否已被选定。 6. The system according to claim 4, wherein the input unit whether the partition has been selected according to a touch, pressed or a touch and release detection.
7.根据权利要求5所述的系统,其中,所述系统用于游戏系统,并且当所述用户选择被分配有所述扩展键的分区时,所述输入分析单元将用于所述游戏系统的菜单分配至包含由所述扩展键定义的所述分区的`扩展区。 7. The system as claimed in claim 5, wherein said system for a game system, and when the user selects the assigned partition of the extended key, the input analysis unit for the game system assigned to the menu containing the extended region of the extended partition `key definition.
8.根据权利要求7所述的系统,其中,当所述用户用手指按压被分配有所述扩展键的分区、拖拉该手指到被分配有所述菜单的分区、并从被分配有所述菜单的所述分区释放该手指时,所述输入分析单元确定被分配到在释放位置处的所述分区的所述菜单已被选定。 8. The system of claim 7, wherein, when the user presses a finger is assigned with a partition of the extended key, drag of the finger is assigned to the partition of the menu, and is allocated from the release of the menu when the finger partition, the analyzing unit determines that input is assigned to the menu has been selected in the release position of the partition.
9.根据权利要求1所述的系统,其中,所述系统是字符输入系统。 9. The system according to claim 1, wherein said system is a character input system.
10.根据权利要求9所述的系统,其中,所述系统适用于移动电话并将字符键分配至被分配有键以便将电话号码输入到所述移动电话中的分区。 10. The system according to claim 9, wherein the system is adapted to assign the mobile phone and the character keys to the keys are assigned to the telephone number input to the mobile phone in the partition.
11.根据权利要求9所述的系统,其中,所述系统是韩文输入系统,其分配与所述多个分区一一对应的第一字符集,且如果被分配有所述扩展键的分区被选定,则新分配多个字符至包括由所述扩展键定义的分区的扩展区。 Partition 11. The system according to claim 9, wherein the system is a Korean input systems, which allocate one correspondence with the plurality of partitions a first character set, and if the extended key is assigned is is selected, the new plurality of characters assigned to the expansion area comprises extended key defined by the partition.
12.根据权利要求11所述的系统,其中,多个字符被分配给至少一个分区,并且每当被分配有所述多个字符的分区被选定时,改变将要输入的字符。 12. The system according to claim 11, wherein the plurality of characters are assigned to at least one partition, and each time the plurality of characters are assigned to partitions have been selected, to change the character to be inputted.
13.根据权利要求11所述的系统,其中,多个字符被分配给至少一个分区,将用于选择所述多个字符的功能键分配给至少一个分区,并且如果被分配有所述功能键的分区在被分配有所述多个字符的分区被选定后被选定,则根据被分配有所述功能键的所述分区的选择计数的数目改变所述多个字符中将要输入的字符。 13. The system of claim 11, wherein the plurality of characters are assigned to at least one partition, the plurality of characters for selecting the function key assigned to the at least one partition, and if the function key is assigned are assigned to partition the plurality of characters is selected after the selected partition, changing the plurality of characters to be input will be selected according to the number of counts of the partition is assigned to the function keys .
14.根据权利要求11所述的系统,其中,所述第一字符集是没有任何元音的字符集,并且包括元音的字符集被新分配给形成当至少一个扩展键被选定时定义的扩展区的分区。 14. The system of claim 11, wherein the first set of characters is no vowel character set and character set comprising a vowel is assigned to the newly formed when an extended key is selected at least one defined the partition expansion area.
15.根据权利要求14所述的系统,其中,被新分配所述包括元音的字符集的所述扩展区由相邻的分区形成,该相邻的分区在被选定作为所述扩展键的分区的周围形成规则四边形。 15. The system according to claim 14, wherein, by the newly assigned expansion region comprises said vowel character set formed by adjacent partition, the partition being adjacent to said extended key as a selected around the partition forming regular quadrilateral.
16.根据权利要求14所述的系统,其中,当用于新分配所述包括元音的字符集的扩展键被选定时所分配的字符集由简单元音形成。 16. The system according to claim 14, wherein, when the newly allocated for the extended key set including character vowel character set is selected to be formed by a simple allocated vowel.
17.根据权利要求16所述的系统,其中,对应于所述包括元音的字符集中的和“丁w的字符被分配到位于形成所述扩展区的所述规则四边形中的角部的分区。 17. The system according to claim 16, wherein the partition corresponding to the corner portion includes a vowel character set and "w D was assigned to characters forming the extension region of the regular quadrilateral .
18.根据权利要求16所述的系统,其中,当用于新分配所述包括元音的字符集的所述扩展键被选定时,由简单元音形成的所述字符集被分配给所述扩展区,并且当用于新分配所述包括元音的字符集的所述扩展键再次被选定时,由复合元音形成的字符集被分配至所述扩展区。 18. The system according to claim 16, wherein the extended key is used when allocating the new set of characters including a vowel is selected, the character set being formed by a simple vowels assigned to the said extension region, and when the extended key for the new assignment set includes a vowel character is selected again, the character set being formed from a composite vowels assigned to the expansion area.
19.根据权利要求14所述的系统,其中,辅音也被分配给被分配用于新分配所述包括元音的字符集的所述扩展键的所述分区,并且当被分配有所述扩展键和所述辅音两者的所述分区被选定时,分析出根据当前输入序列是用于辅音还是用于元音已选定所述扩展键和所述辅音中的一者。 19. The system according to claim 14, wherein, the consonants are also assigned to the partition of the extended key are allocated for the new assignment set includes a vowel character, and, when said extension is allocated key and the partition of both the consonants are selected, according to the current input sequence analyzed is a consonant or a vowel has been selected and the extended key of one of the consonant.
20.根据权利要求16所述的系统,其中,所述输入单元包括触摸传感器,当所述用户用手指选择用于新分配所述包括元音的字符集的所述扩展键、拖拉该手指到被分配有所述简单元音的分区并且释放该手指时,所述输入单元分析出通过组合当拖拉时所触摸的简单元音而形成的复合元音被输入。 20. The system according to claim 16, wherein the input unit includes a touch sensor, when the user selects a new finger assignment for said vowel keys including the extended character set, the drag of the finger is allocated when the partition simple vowel and releases the finger, the input unit analyzed by a combination of vowels simply dragging the touched when the composite formed is inputted vowels.
21.根据权利要求16所述的系统,其中,当被分配给所述扩展区的简单元音在用于新分配所述包括元音的字符集的所述扩展键被选定两次后被选定时,分析出所选定的所述简单元音的复合元音被输入。 21. The system according to claim 16, wherein, when the simple vowels assigned to the selected area is extended after the extended key twice for the newly assigned vowel character set comprising when selected, the simple analysis of the vowels are diphthongs selected input.
22.根据权利要求16所述的系统,其中,当被分配给所述扩展区的两个不同的简单元音在用于新分配所述包括元音的字符集的所述扩展键被选定两次后按顺序被选定时,分析出通过组合选定的两个所述简单元音所形成的复合元音被输入。 22. The system according to claim 16, wherein, when the simple two different vowels assigned to the selected region is extended in the extended key for the newly assigned vowel character set comprising when the sequence is selected twice, the two analyzed diphthong vowels simply by combining selected input is formed.
23.根据权利要求16所述的系统,其中,当用于新分配所述包括元音的字符集的所述扩展键被选定、被分配给所述扩展区的简单元音被选定、并且用于新分配所述包括元音的字符集的所述扩展键再次被选定时,分析出所选定的所述简单元音的复合元音被输入。 23. The system according to claim 16, wherein, when the newly allocated for the extended key comprises a vowel character set is selected, simply vowels are allocated to the extended area is selected, and the extended key is used when allocating the new set of characters including a vowel is selected again, the simple analysis of the vowels are diphthongs selected input.
24.根据权利要求14所述的系统,其中,所述系统适用于移动电话并且所述第一字符集包括用于改变输入位置的“移动”键。 24. The system according to claim 14, wherein the system is adapted to a mobile telephone set and the first character comprises a "Move" button for changing the input location.
25.根据权利要求14所述的系统,其中,所述系统适用于移动电话并且所述第一字符集包括用于取消最新输入字符的输入的“取消”键。 25. The system according to claim 14, wherein the system is adapted to a mobile telephone set and the first character input for canceling comprises the latest input of the character "Cancel" button.
26.根据权利要求14所述的系统,其中,所述系统适用于移动电话并且所述第一字符集包括用于将包含在所述第一字符集中的辅音改变成紧音或者送气音的紧音-送气音键。 26. The system according to claim 14, wherein said system is applied to a first character set and the mobile telephone comprises means for changing comprising a tone immediately to the first character set or a consonant immediately aspirated sound - aspirated key.
27.根据权利要求14所述的系统,其中,被分配有所述第一字符集中的辅音的分区也有扩展键的功能,并且当被分配有辅音的所述分区被选定时,所述包括元音的字符集被分配给邻近所述辅音的扩展区。 27. The system according to claim 14, wherein the first character is assigned a set of consonants partition also functions as the extended key, and when the partition is assigned with a consonant is selected, said comprising vowel character set is allocated to the region adjacent to the extended consonants.
28.根据权利要求27所述的系统,其中,当被分配有辅音的所述分区被选定时,元音和所述辅音的紧音和送气音被分配给由所选定的所述分区定义的扩展区。 28. The system according to claim 27, wherein, when a consonant is allocated to the selected partition, the vowel and consonant sounds and immediately aspirated by the partition assigned to the selected defined expansion area.
29.根据权利要求9所述的系统,其中,所述系统是英文输入系统,多个字符被分配给所述多个分区中的每一个,并且当被分配有所述扩展键的分区在所述多个分区中的一个或多个被选定后被选定时,通过被分配给所选定的所述分区的字符的组合能适用的单词列表被分配给所述扩展区并由所述用户选择。 29. The system according to claim 9, wherein the system is a text input system, a plurality of characters are assigned to each of said plurality of partitions, and is allocated when the partition in the extended key a plurality of partitions of said one or more selected time after being selected, by the combination of the selected character assigned to the partition of the word list can be applied to the extended area is allocated by the the user selects.
30.根据权利要求29所述的系统,其中,当被分配给所述扩展区的所述单词中的任何一个在选定所述扩展键后被选定时,分析出将所选定的所述单词和空格键按顺序输入。 30. The system according to claim 29, wherein, after being selected when a selected word of the extended key are assigned to any of the extended zone, and analyzed by the selected said word and a space key input sequence.
31.根据权利要求29所述的系统,其中,当所述扩展键被选定、被分配给所述扩展区的所述单词中的任何一个被选定、并且所述扩展键被再次选定时,分析出将所选定的所述单词和空格键按顺序输入。 31. The system according to claim 29, wherein, when the extended key is selected, assigned to the extended area of ​​any one of the word is selected, and the extended key is selected again when analyzed to the selected word and a space key input sequence.
32.根据权利要求29所述的系统,其中,当所述扩展键被选定、被分配有多个字符的一个或多个分区被选定、且所述扩展键再次被选定时,从通过被分配给所选定的所述分区的字符的组合能适用的单词中选定的单词以大写字母输入。 32. The system according to claim 29, wherein, when the extended key is selected, is assigned a plurality of characters or a plurality of partitions are selected, and the extended key is selected again, the by the combination of the selected character assigned to the partition can be applied to a selected word of the word entered in uppercase.
33.根据权利要求29所述的系统,其中,数字也被分配给被分配有多个字符的所述分区,并且当被分配有多个字符的所述分区的第一分区被选定、分区被分配给所述扩展键、并且被分配有多个字符的所述分区的第二分区被选定时,将在被分配给所述第一分区的多个字符中的与被分配给所述第二分区的数字的顺序对应的字符输入。 33. The system according to claim 29, wherein the figures are assigned to the partition is assigned a plurality of characters, and is selected when the first partition of the partition is assigned a plurality of characters, the partition the second partition is assigned to the extended key, and the partition is assigned a plurality of characters when selected, the plurality of characters are assigned to the first partition and assigned to the a second partition corresponding to the digital input of the character sequence.
34.根据权利要求29所述的系统,其中,被分配有多个字符的所述分区在拖拉方法中选定。 34. The system according to claim 29, wherein said partition is assigned a plurality of characters selected in the process drag.
35.根据权利要求29所述的系统,其中,当所述扩展键被选定、被分配给所述扩展区的所述单词中的任何一个被选定、并且所述扩展键再次被选定时,输入所选定的所述单词,并且将符号新分配给将被选定的所述扩展区。 35. The system according to claim 29, wherein, when the extended key is selected, assigned to the extended area of ​​any one of the word is selected, and the extended key is selected again when the input of the selected word, and the symbols to be assigned to the newly selected one of said expansion region.
36.根据权利要求29所述的系统,其中,被分配有多个字符的所述分区被按顺序选定时,所述输入分析单元从包含被分配给所选定的所述分区的字符组合的单词列表中提取一个单词,并且所述输出单元暂时地输出所提取的所述单词。 36. The system according to claim 29, wherein said partition is allocated a plurality of characters are sequentially selected, the character input analysis unit comprising the composition from being assigned to the partition of the selected extracting a word list of words, the word and the output unit outputs the extracted temporarily. ` `
37.根据权利要求36所述的系统,其中,当被分配给所选定的所述分区的所述字符组合在包含被分配给所选定的所述分区的字符组合的所述单词中都相同时,所述输出单元只输出除了被分配给所选定的所述分区的所述字符组合之外的字符给所述扩展区。 37. The system according to claim 36, wherein, when the character combination of the word is assigned to the partition containing the selected partition is allocated to the selected character combinations are the same, only the output of the output unit in addition to the character combination of the partitions is allocated to the selected character to the extended area.
38.根据权利要求29所述的系统,其中,当所述扩展键被选定、被分配有多个字符的一个或多个分区被选定、且所述扩展键再次被选定时,从通过被分配给所选定的所述分区的字符的组合能适用的单词中选定的单词以大写字母输入。 38. The system according to claim 29, wherein, when the extended key is selected, is assigned a plurality of characters or a plurality of partitions are selected, and the extended key is selected again, the by the combination of the selected character assigned to the partition can be applied to a selected word of the word entered in uppercase.
39.根据权利要求9所述的系统,其中,所述系统是印地文输入系统,其分配与所述多个分区一一对应的第一字符集,并且如果被分配有所述扩展键的分区被选定,则新分配包括元音的第二字符集至包括由所述扩展键定义的分区的扩展区。 39. The system according to claim 9, wherein the system is a Hindi input system, a plurality of said assigned partitions to-one correspondence with the first character set, and if the extended key is assigned partition is selected, the new character assignment comprising a second set of vowels to include an extension area defined by the extended key partitions.
40.根据权利要求39所述的系统,其中,当所述扩展键被选定两次时,包括元音的第三字符集被分配给所述扩展区。 40. The system according to claim 39, wherein, when the selected extended key twice, including a third vowel character set is allocated to the extended area.
41.根据权利要求39所述的系统,其中,当所述扩展键在辅音输入状态被选定时,所述第二字符集包括依赖元音。 41. The system according to claim 39, wherein, when the extended consonant key is selected in the input state, the second character set includes dependent vowel.
42.根据权利要求1所述的系统,其中,当包含在所述扩展区中的分区被选定时,被分配给所述分区的信息被初始化。 42. The system according to claim 1, wherein, when included in the extended area is selected partition, the partition information is allocated to be initialized.
43.—种用于输入用于执行一定功能的信息的系统,该系统包括: 输入单元,其用于接收由输入设备的用户通过键输入选定的键的信息,其中,所述输入设备包括多个键,并且所述多个键中的至少两个被分派多组信息; 选择信息存储单元,其用于存储选择信息以选择目标功能的执行; 选择信息提取单元,其用于从所述选择信息存储单元提取包括被分配给由所述用户选定的所述键的所述多组信息中的一组信息的选择信息,并将所提取的所述选择信息显示在屏幕上;以及最终选择单元,其用于提取由所述用户从所提取的所述选择信息中最终选择的最终选择信息。 43.- kinds of information input system for performing a certain function, the system comprising: an input unit for receiving key information from the key input selected by the user input device, wherein the input device comprises a plurality of keys, and the plurality of the at least two keys is assigned a plurality of sets of information; selection information storage unit for storing selection information to select a target function execution; selection information extracting means, for from said a selection information storage unit extracts information selected from the group comprising the plurality of sets of information being assigned to the keys selected by the user is, the extracted information is displayed on the selection screen; and finally selecting means for extracting finally selected by the user selection information in the final selection from the extracted.
44.根据权利要求43所述的系统,其中,当选择信息中的一条被提取并且在一定时间段内所述用户没有键输入时,所述最终选择单元提取所提取的所述选择信息作为所述最终选择信息。 44. The system of claim 43, wherein, when a selected information is extracted and is not the key input of the user in a certain period of time, the final selection of the selection unit extracts extracted information as the said final selection information.
45.根据权利要求43所述的系统,其中,所述最终选择单元接收用于将模式切换到最终选择模式的键输入,并且接着从所提取的所述选择信息中提取由所述用户通过键输入选定的选择信息作为所述最终选择信息。 45. The system according to claim 43, wherein said final selection means for receiving a key input mode is switched to a final selection mode, and then selects from the extracted information extracted by the user through a key input selection information selected as the final selection information.
46.根据权利要求43所述的系统,其中,所述选择信息提取单元输出选择所述屏幕上的所述选择信息所需要的分类信息连同所提取的所述选择信息,并且当所述分类信息通过所述用户的键输入被输入时,所述最终选择单元提取与所述分类信息对应的选择信息作为所述最终选择信息。 46. ​​The system according to claim 43, wherein said selecting said information extracting unit outputs the selection screen to select the desired classification information along with the extracted selection information, and when the classification information through the key input of the user is input, the final selecting unit extracts classification information corresponding to the selection information as the final selection information.
47.根据权利要求43所述的系统,其中,所述选择信息提取单元通过改变所提取的所述选择信息的来自于与被输出在图形用户界面(GUI)上的选择信息对应的图标中的图标的状态将所提取的所述选择信息通知给所述用户。 47. The system according to claim 43, wherein said selection icon selection information is output on a graphical user interface (GUI) corresponding to the selection information from the information extracted by the extracting unit change in the status icon of the selection information extracted notifying the user.
48.根据权利要求43所述的系统,其中,所述选择信息提取单元从其中的被分配给所选定的所述键的一条信息根据键序列进行排列的信息开始提取选择信息。 48. The system according to claim 43, wherein said selecting an information extraction unit which is assigned to the selected key from the key information arranged according to the sequence selection information extraction begins.
49.根据权利要求43所述的系统,其中,所述选择信息是用于选择计算机程序的信息。 49. The system according to claim 43, wherein said selection information is information for selecting a computer program.
50.根据权利要求43所述的系统,其中,所述选择信息是用于选择广播信道的信息。 50. The system according to claim 43, wherein the selection information is information for selecting a broadcast channel.
51.—种输入用于执行目标功能的信息的方法,该方法包括: 接收由用户从包括多个键的输入设备选择的键的信息,其中,所述多个键中的至少两个被分派多组信息; 从选择信息存储单元提取包括被分配给由所述用户选定的所述键的所述多组信息中的一组信息的选择信息,并且将所提取的所述选择信息显示在屏幕上,用于选择确定功能的执行的选择信息被存储在所述选择信息存储单元中;并且从所提取的所述选择信息提取由所述用户最终选择的最终选择信息。 51.- input method for performing a certain information function, the method comprising: receiving information from the key input device includes a plurality of selection keys, wherein at least two of said plurality of keys assigned by the user in the a plurality of sets of information; selection information extracted from the storage unit comprises a group selection information selected by the user of said plurality of keys in the group information is allocated to, and the extracted information is displayed in the selection screen, selection information for selecting functions are performed in determining the selection information storage unit; and extracts the final selection information selected by the user information finally selected from the extracted.
52.根据权利要求51所述的方法,其中,所述最终选择信息的所述提取包括:当选择信息中的一条被提取并且在确定时间段内所述用户没有键输入时,提取所提取的所述选择信息作为所述最终选择信息。 52. The method according to claim 51, wherein said final selection of the extracted information comprises: if a selected information is extracted and determining the period of time when no user key input, extracting the extracted the selection information as the final selection information.
53.根据权利要求51所述的方法,其中,所述最终选择信息的所述提取包括:接收用于将模式切换到最终选择模式的键输入,并且接着从所提取的所述选择信息中提取由所述用户通过键输入选定的选择信息作为所述最终选择信息。 53. The method according to claim 51, wherein said final selection of the extracted information comprises: receiving a key input mode is switched to the final selection mode, and then selection information extracted from the extracted selected by the user through the key input selection information as the final selection information.
54.根据权利要求51所述的方法,其中所述选择信息的所述提取包括输出选择所述屏幕上的所述选择信息所需要的分类信息连同所提取的所述选择信息,并且所述最终选择信息的所述提取包括当所述分类信息通过所述用户的键输入被输入时,提取与所述分类信息对应的选择信息作为所述最终选择信息。 54. The method according to claim 51, wherein said selecting said information comprises extracting said output selection on the screen to select the desired classification information along with the extracted selection information, and the final extracting the selected information includes the classification information when the user through the key input is input, extracting the classification information corresponding to the selected information as the final selection information.
55.根据权利要求51所述的方法,其中,所述选择信息的所述提取包括通过改变所提取的所述选择信息的来自于与被输出在图形用户界面(GUI)上的选择信息对应的图标中的图标的状态将所提取的所述选择信息通知给所述用户。 55. The method according to claim 51, wherein said selecting said information comprises extracting said selection information from the selection information is extracted by varying the output on a graphical user interface (GUI) with the corresponding status icon in the icon the extracted information to the selection of the user.
56.根据权利要求51所述的方法,其中,所述选择信息的所述提取包括从其中的被分配给所选定的所述键的一条信息根据键序列进行排列的信息开始提取选择信息。 56. The method according to claim 51, wherein said selecting said information comprises extracting the key to which allocated from the selected piece of information based on the key information arrayed beginning of the sequence selection information extracted.
57.根据权利要求51所述的方法,其中,所述选择信息是用于选择计算机程序的信息。 57. The method according to claim 51, wherein said selection information is information for selecting a computer program.
58.根据权利要求51所`述的方法,其中,所述选择信息是用于选择广播信道的信息。 51 58. The method as claimed in claim `described, wherein the selection information is information for selecting a broadcast channel.
CN201280020778.8A 2011-02-27 2012-02-27 Information input system and information input method using extension key CN103608751A (en)

Priority Applications (15)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR10-2011-0017492 2011-02-27
KR1020110017492A KR20120097921A (en) 2011-02-27 2011-02-27 System for inputting information utilizing extension key and method thereof
KR10-2011-0029726 2011-03-31
KR20110029974 2011-03-31
KR20110029726 2011-03-31
KR10-2011-0029974 2011-03-31
KR10-2012-0009596 2012-01-31
KR20120009596 2012-01-31
KR10-2012-0013034 2012-02-08
KR20120013034 2012-02-08
KR10-2012-0014237 2012-02-13
KR20120014237 2012-02-13
KR20120017159 2012-02-20
KR10-2012-0017159 2012-02-20
PCT/KR2012/001470 WO2012115492A2 (en) 2011-02-27 2012-02-27 Information input system and information input method using an extension key

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN103608751A true CN103608751A (en) 2014-02-26

Family

ID=46721371

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN201280020778.8A CN103608751A (en) 2011-02-27 2012-02-27 Information input system and information input method using extension key

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP5977764B2 (en)
CN (1) CN103608751A (en)
WO (1) WO2012115492A2 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104102413A (en) * 2014-07-28 2014-10-15 华为技术有限公司 Multi-lingual character input method and multi-lingual character input device based on virtual keyboards
CN106855760A (en) * 2015-12-08 2017-06-16 群创光电股份有限公司 Touch display device having pressure sensing function

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003091352A (en) * 2002-04-30 2003-03-28 Kazuo Yasaka Computer input device and key function converting method for computer input device
US6562078B1 (en) * 1999-06-29 2003-05-13 Microsoft Corporation Arrangement and method for inputting non-alphabetic language
KR100414416B1 (en) * 2000-09-28 2004-01-07 주식회사 어필텔레콤 korean language input device and the same input method
KR20050022560A (en) * 2003-08-20 2005-03-08 주식회사 팬택앤큐리텔 Letter input method using the shift key in mobile communication terminal
KR20050031806A (en) * 2003-09-30 2005-04-06 삼성탈레스 주식회사 Method for inputing hangul and terminal therefor
CN1761989A (en) * 2003-01-16 2006-04-19 克利福德·A·库什勒 System and method for continuous stroke word-based text input
JP2007066031A (en) * 2005-08-31 2007-03-15 Sharp Corp Information input system
CN101290555A (en) * 2007-01-30 2008-10-22 三星电子株式会社 Apparatus and method for inputing characters of terminal
KR20090130486A (en) * 2008-06-16 2009-12-24 주식회사 케이티테크 Apparatus using on screen keypad and method using the same

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3845100B2 (en) * 2004-06-18 2006-11-15 株式会社アイム Character input device, and a character input method
US9141283B2 (en) * 2007-01-30 2015-09-22 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Apparatus and method for inputting characters on touch screen of a terminal

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6562078B1 (en) * 1999-06-29 2003-05-13 Microsoft Corporation Arrangement and method for inputting non-alphabetic language
KR100414416B1 (en) * 2000-09-28 2004-01-07 주식회사 어필텔레콤 korean language input device and the same input method
JP2003091352A (en) * 2002-04-30 2003-03-28 Kazuo Yasaka Computer input device and key function converting method for computer input device
CN1761989A (en) * 2003-01-16 2006-04-19 克利福德·A·库什勒 System and method for continuous stroke word-based text input
KR20050022560A (en) * 2003-08-20 2005-03-08 주식회사 팬택앤큐리텔 Letter input method using the shift key in mobile communication terminal
KR20050031806A (en) * 2003-09-30 2005-04-06 삼성탈레스 주식회사 Method for inputing hangul and terminal therefor
JP2007066031A (en) * 2005-08-31 2007-03-15 Sharp Corp Information input system
CN101290555A (en) * 2007-01-30 2008-10-22 三星电子株式会社 Apparatus and method for inputing characters of terminal
KR20090130486A (en) * 2008-06-16 2009-12-24 주식회사 케이티테크 Apparatus using on screen keypad and method using the same

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104102413A (en) * 2014-07-28 2014-10-15 华为技术有限公司 Multi-lingual character input method and multi-lingual character input device based on virtual keyboards
CN104102413B (en) * 2014-07-28 2017-12-15 华为技术有限公司 Multi-language character input method and device virtual keyboards
CN106855760A (en) * 2015-12-08 2017-06-16 群创光电股份有限公司 Touch display device having pressure sensing function

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2014512585A (en) 2014-05-22
JP5977764B2 (en) 2016-08-24
WO2012115492A2 (en) 2012-08-30
WO2012115492A3 (en) 2012-12-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
Rekimoto et al. PreSense: interaction techniques for finger sensing input devices
US7190351B1 (en) System and method for data input
CN102707798B (en) Keys and gesture information text entry
KR101072762B1 (en) Gesturing with a multipoint sensing device
JP5310389B2 (en) The information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program
US10228833B2 (en) Input device user interface enhancements
JP5323070B2 (en) Virtual key pad system
CN103038728B (en) E.g. using a touch screen on the multi-mode mobile telephone text input system
CA2533298C (en) Manipulating an on-screen object using zones surrounding the object
US8327282B2 (en) Extended keyboard user interface
KR101290071B1 (en) Man-machine interface for real-time forecasting user&#39;s input
US8669941B2 (en) Method and apparatus for text entry
JP3630153B2 (en) Information display input device and the information display input method, and an information processing apparatus
US20090100383A1 (en) Predictive gesturing in graphical user interface
JP4975634B2 (en) Method and device for controlling the data input
CN1826573B (en) Text input system and method
US20140351760A1 (en) Order-independent text input
US20150317300A1 (en) Method for fast inputting a related word
US9304602B2 (en) System for capturing event provided from edge of touch screen
KR101117481B1 (en) Multi-touch type input controlling system
US20130212515A1 (en) User interface for text input
US9223471B2 (en) Touch screen control
US20110209087A1 (en) Method and device for controlling an inputting data
EP0660218B1 (en) User interface apparatus for computing system
JP5782699B2 (en) The information processing apparatus, an input control method, and a program of an information processing apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
C06 Publication
ASS Succession or assignment of patent right

Owner name: HANTIAN CO., LTD.

Free format text: FORMER OWNER: PARK TAEUN

Effective date: 20140306

Free format text: FORMER OWNER: SHEN XIANGZHEN

Effective date: 20140306

WD01